samson - "eks-m" elm İstehsalat mərkəzi | xoŞ … converters, limit switches, position...

SAMSONSAM

SO

N

2010

-04

WS

· K 1

3 EN

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · GermanyPhone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: http://www.samson.de

Control Valves for Industrial ProcessesVolume 3

Cont

rol V

alve

s fo

r In

dust

rial P

roce

sses

· Vo

lum

e 3

OverviewCatalog 2010

Appendix

Limit Switches

Positioners

Actuators

Rotary ValvesButterfly Valves, Ball Valves, Rotary Plug Valves

Series 280 · Steam-converting Valves

Series 250 · Globe, Three-way and Angle ValvesUp to PN 400 (Class 2500) · Up to DN 500 (NPS 16) · Up to 550 °C

Series 240 · Globe, Three-way and Angle ValvesUp to PN 40 (Class 300) · Up to DN 300 (NPS 12) · Up to 450 °C

255

117

23

Volume 1/2

Volume 2

Volume 2

Volume 1

Solenoid Valves and Accessories 161

Control Valvesfor Industrial ProcessesVolume 3

1

Positioners

Information SheetPositioners, Converters, Limit Switches,Position Transmitters, Solenoid Valves, Accessories 5

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-0 25

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-1 31

Electropneumatic PositionerType 3730-2 and Type 3730-3with HART® communication 37

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-4with PROFIBUS-PA communication 45

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-5with FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus communication 53

Electropneumatic Ex d Positioner Type 3731-3with HART® communication 59

Electropneumatic Ex d Positioner Type 3731-5with FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus communication 65

Series 3730 and Series 3731EXPERTplus Valve Diagnosticswith Partial Stroke Test (PST) 71

TROVIS-VIEW Software TROVIS 6661 79

Pneumatic Positioner Type 3766Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3767 85

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 4763Pneumatic Positioner Type 4765 97

Electropneumatic Positioner andPneumatic Positioner Type 3760 103

System 6000Electropneumatic Converter for Direct Current Signals

i/p Converter Type 6116 109

u/i Module Type 6151 115

Limit Switches

Electric or Pneumatic Limit Switch Type 4746 119

Limit Switch Type 3776 125

Inductive Limit Switchfor Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3768 141

Electric Limit Switch Type 4744 145

Electronic Limit Switch Type 3738-20 149

Analog Position Transmitter Type 4748 157

Solenoid Valves and Accessories

Field Barrier Ex d/Ex i Type 3770 163

Type 3701 Solenoid Valve 167

Solenoid Valve Type 3963 173



Supply Pressure Regulator Type 4708 221

Service Unit Type 3999-009X 233

Filter Regulator Type 3999-0096 237

Pneumatic Remote Adjuster Type 3759 241

Pneumatic Lock-up Valve Type 3709 243

Reversing Amplifier Type 3710 245

Pneumatic Volume Booster Type 3755 249

Appendix

SAMSON Product Range 255

SAMSON Subsidiaries, Agenciesand Service Facilities Worldwide 257

Data Sheet Summary 261

Index 263

Contents

3

Positioners • Converters

Limit Switches • Position Transmitters

Solenoid Valves • Accessories

Selection and Application

Information Sheet T 8350 EN 2010-01 5

Positioners, converters, limit switches, position transmitters, so-lenoid valves and lock-up valves are transfer elements designedto adapt pneumatic control valves to the requirements of indus-trial plants.Supply pressure regulators and air reducing stations are used tosupply the pneumatic instruments with compressed air.Positioners ensure a predetermined assignment between thevalve position (controlled variable x) and control signal (refer-ence variable w). They compare the control signal issued bypneumatic or electric automation equipment (controller, controlstation, process control system) to the travel or opening angle ofthe control valve and supply a corresponding output signalpressure (output variable y) (pst). Positioners are often used asservo-booster as they convert low-energy signals into strongproportional signal pressures up to the maximum supply pres-sure (6 bar/90 psi). They can be used in standard andsplit-range operation.Depending on the input signal, a distinction is made betweenpneumatic (p/p) and electropneumatic (i/p) positioners. Pneu-matic positioners accept an input signal of 0.2 to 1 bar (3 to15 psi) and issue an output signal pressure (pst) of maximum6 bar (90 psi).Electropneumatic (i/p) positioners use an analog direct currentsignal of 4(0) to 20 mA or 1 to 5 mA as the input variable andissue an output signal pressure (pst) up to 6 bar (90 psi).The Type 3730-3 Positioner additionally uses HART® communi-cation between field devices and the process control system.The Type 3730-4 and Type 3731-4 Positioners with PROFIBUScommunication and Type 3730-5 and Type 3731-5 Positionerswith FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication are used to inte-grate final control elements into fieldbus systems.Electropneumatic (i/p) converters convert a DC input signal(control signal) directly into a pneumatic control signal (outputsignal pressure pst).Limit switches consist of two inductive, electric or pneumaticcontacts. They issue a signal whenever an adjusted limit is ex-ceeded or not reached.Analog position transmitters assign a continuous 4 to 20 mAoutput signal to the valve travel. They signalize both end posi-tions of the valve "Valve OPEN" and "Valve CLOSED" as wellas intermediate valve positions.Solenoid valves convert binary signals issued by electric controlequipment into binary pneumatic control signals.Lock-up valves shut off the signal pressure line of a pneumaticactuator upon failure of supply air or when the supply air fallsbelow an adjusted value. As a result, the actuator is blocked.The control valve remains in its last position until the fault hasbeen eliminated.The pneumatic remote adjuster is a precision regulator that canbe adjusted precisely by hand.Air reducing stations and supply pressure regulators are used toprovide pneumatic measuring and control equipment with fil-tered supply air at a constant pressure.

10.2 to 1 bar

3

pst

Fig. 1 · Schematics of pneumatic control valves

Fig. 2 · Two control valves operated in parallel using acontrol signal y in split-range operation

Fig. 3 · Schematics of a pneumatic control valve

1.1With p/p positioner

1.2With i/p positioner

1.3With i/p converter

2.1Schematics

2.2Control signal versustravel diagram for twocontrol valves operatingin the same direction

2.3Control signal versustravel diagram for twocontrol valves operatingin opposing directions

Legend for Figs. 1 to 31 Pneumatic controller3 p/p positioner4 Continuous-action elec. controller5 i/p converter6 i/p positioner7 Limit switch

8 3/2-way solenoid valve9 Supply pressure regulator

10 Air supplyw Reference variablex Controlled variabley Output variable

6 Information Sheet T 8350 EN 2010-01

Electropneumatic and pneumatic positionersElectropneumatic (i/p) Pneumatic (p/p)

For linear actuators acc. to IEC 60534-6-1,up to … mm 200 200 200 – 120 90 – – – 120 90

For Type 3277 (direct attachment) • • • • • • •

For linear actuator with rod-type yoke • • • • • • •

For Type 3278 Rotary Actuator • • • • • •

For rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845 • • • • • •

Also with explosion protection EEx ia IIC T6 • • • • • • • • • •

Also intrinsically safe w. CSA/FM approval • • • • • •

Referencevariable

0.2...1 bar (3...15 psi) • • • •

4...20 mA • • • • • • •

0...20 mA • • •

1... 5 mA • •

Also split-range operation • • • • • • • • •

Also with limit switch • • • • • • •

Also with solenoid valve • • •

Also with position transmitter • • • •

Convertible to p/p or i/p positioner – • • • • • • • •

Type 3730-0 3730-1 3730-2* 3760 3767 4763 3761 3761 3760 3766 4765

Refer to Data Sheet T … EN for details T 8384-0 T 8384-1 T 8384-2 T 8385 T 8355 T 8359 T 8386 T 8386 T 8385 T 8355 T 8359

* Configuration and operation possible using TROVIS-VIEW software

Smart positionersFor linear actuators acc. to IEC 60534-6-1,up to … mm 200 200 200

For Type 3277 (direct attachment) • • •

For linear actuator with rod-type yoke • • •

For Type 3278 Rotary Actuator • • •

For rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845 • • •

Also with explosion protection EEx ia IIC T6 • • •

Also intrinsically safe w. CSA/FM approval • • •

Referencevariable

4...20 mA •

Also split-range operation • • •

Communication HART® PROFIBUS FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

Also with limit switch • • •

Also with solenoid valve • • •

Also with position transmitter •

Type 3730-3* 3730-4* 3730-5*

Refer to Data Sheet for details T 8384-2/3 EN T 8384-4 EN T 8384-5 EN

Ex d version (see next table) Type 3731-3 – Type 3731-5

* Configuration and operation possible using TROVIS-VIEW software


Electropneumatic Ex d positionersFor linear actuators acc. toIEC 60534-6-1, up to … mm 200 200 200 120 90

For Type 3277 (direct attachment) • • • • • –For linear actuator with rod-type yoke • • • • •For Type 3278 Rotary Actuator • • • • •For rotary actuators acc. VDI/VDE 3845 • • • • •

Flameproof enclosure (EEx d) • •With Type 6116 i/p Converter • • • •

Type 3770 Field Barrier •

Referencevariable

4 … 20 mA • • • • • •Also split-range • • • • •

Communication HART® FFM™ (HART®)Also with limit switch • • •Also with solenoid valve • • •Type 3731-3 3731-5 3730/3770 3760/6116 3766/6116 4765/6116 3761/6116Refer to Data Sheet T … EN for details T 8387-3 T 8387-5 8384/8379 8385/6116 8355/6116 8359/6116 8386/6116

Approvals ATEX · FM · CSA · NEPSI ATEX ATEX · FM · CSA · GOST

Limit switches, position transmittersLimit switches for linear actuators • • • •Limit switches for rotary actuators • • •Position transmitter for linear actuators,4 … 20 mA, two-wire connection •

Alarm contacts Inductive • • •Electric • • • •Pneumatic •

Version Without protection • • • • •EEx ia IIC T6 • • • • •EEx de II T6 •

Type 4746 3776 3768 3738-20 4744 4748Refer to Data Sheet for details T 8365 EN T 8368 EN T 8356 EN T 8390 EN T 8367 EN T 8363 EN

Field barriers, solenoid valves, lock-up valves, supply pressure regulators, accessoriesField barrier Ex d/Ex i •Solenoid valve f. pneum. control valves • •Pilot valve Ex d/Ex em •Supply pressure regulator •Service unit model •Filter regulator •Pneumatic remote adjuster •Pneumatic lock-up valve •Reversing amplifier •Pneumatic volume booster •Type 3770 3701 3963 3962 4708 3999-009X3999-0096 3759 3709 3710 3755Refer to Data Sheet T … EN for details T 8379 T 3701 T 963 T 962-4 T 8546 T 3999-6 T 3999-8 T 8510 T 8391 T 8392 T 8393


Digital positionersThe Type 3730 and Type 3731 Positioners are single-acting ordouble-acting positioners designed for attachment to pneu-matic linear or rotary actuators.Compared to conventional positioners, the use of digital signalprocessing provides the following advantages:• User-friendly operation• Automatic adjustment of zero and span during the initializa-

tion procedure (except for Type 3730-0)• Automatic detection of faults occurring in the actuator• Direction of action independent of the mounting position• Permanent monitoring of zero• Minimized air consumption• Safe storage of all parameters in non-volatile EEPROMOptionally, these positioners may be equipped with the follow-ing additional functions:• One or two inductive limit switches (proximity switches)• Forced fail-safe venting of the actuator over a solenoid valve

upon failure of an external signal. As a result, the controlvalve moves to its fail-safe position.

Type 3730-0 Electropneumatic PositionerSingle-acting or double-acting electropneumatic positioner forattachment to pneumatic control valves. Travel range, range ofreference variable, and direction of action selectable over DIPswitches, zero and span adjustable over potentiometers

Travel 5.3 to 200 mm

Attachment Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator,to NAMUR ribs or rod-type yokes

Explosion protec-tion

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 acc. to ATEXII 3 G EEx nA/nL T6 andII 3 D IP 54/65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA, GOST, JIS approvals

Options –

Data Sheet T 8384-0 EN

Type 3730-1 Electropneumatic PositionerSingle-acting or double-acting electropneumatic positioner forattachment to pneumatic control valves. Self-calibrating, auto-matic adaptation to valve and actuator.Simple one-knob, menu-driven operationLC display easy to read in any mounted position due toselectable reading direction


Angle of rotation 24 to 100°

Attachment Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator,to NAMUR ribs, rod-type yokes, VDI/VDE 3845

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 andII 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEXII 3 G EEx nA/nL II T6 andII 3 D IP 54/65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA approval

Options Two standard programmable position alarms


Fig. 4 · Type 3730-0 Electropneumatic Positioner,direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator

Fig. 5 · Type 3730-1 Electropneumatic Positioner,attachment to NAMUR rib of Type 3271 Actuator

Fig. 6 · Type 3730-1 Electropneumatic Positioner,attachment to rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845


Type 3730-2 and Type 3730-3 Electropneumatic Positionerwith HART® communicationSingle-acting or double-acting electropneumatic positioner forattachment to pneumatic control valves. Self-calibrating, auto-matic adaptation to valve and actuator. EXPERT diagnosticfunctions.




Reference variable 4 to 20 mA

Communication Type 3730-3 with HART® communication

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 andII 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEXII 3 G EEx nA/nL II T6 andII 3 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA approval

Options Extended EXPERTplus diagnostics, ESD version,inductive limit switch, position transmitter,solenoid valve with SIL 4 approval acc. toIEC 61508, external position sensor


Type 3730-4 Positioner with PROFIBUS-PA communicationand Type 3730-5 Positioner with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

communicationSmart, bus-powered field devices according to PROFIBUS-PAor FOUNDATION™ fieldbus specification based onEN 61158-2 transmission technology.




Communication Type 3730-4 with PROFIBUS-PA communicationType 3730-5 with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

communication

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 andII 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEXII 3 G EEx nA II T6 andII 3 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA, NEPSI Ex ia/nL approval

Options Inductive limit switch, solenoid valve, binaryinput, external position sensor, EXPERT+

Data Sheets T 8384-4 EN and T 8384-5 EN

EXPERT+ valve diagnostics for Series 3730 and Series 3731PositionersPositioner firmware for early detection of control valve faultsgiving maintenance recommendations.EXPERT is an enhanced firmware designed for predictive,status-oriented maintenance on control valves with pneumaticactuators. The diagnostic functions are completely integratedinto the positioner.EXPERT enables viewing and editing in TROVIS-VIEW operatorinterface or FDT/DTM engineering tools, which makes opera-tion easy to learn.Refer to Data Sheet T 8388 EN for details.

Fig. 8 · Typ 3730-4 PROFIBUS-PA Positioner,attachment to rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845

Fig. 7 · Type 3730-2/-3 Electropneumatic Positionerwith external position sensor mounted on Type 3510Micro-flow Valve

Fig. 9 · Step response test for checking dynamic control response


Ex d positionersType 3731-3 Ex d Positioner with HART communicationSingle-acting or double-acting Ex d positioner for attachment topneumatic control valves. Self-calibrating, automatic adapta-tion to valve and actuator.




Reference variable 4 … 20 mA

Communication HART® communication

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 andEEx de IIC T6 andII 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA, NEPSI approvals

Options Binary contact, position feedback,forced venting, EXPERT+


Type 3731-5 Ex d Positioner with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

communicationSmart, bus-powered field devices according to FOUNDATION™

fieldbus specification based on EN 61158-2 transmission tech-nology. Integrated Function Blocks: PID Process Controller, An-alog Output (AO), 2 Discrete Inputs (DI) and Link Master Capa-bility.




Communication FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 andEEx de IIC T6 andII 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA, NEPSI approvals

Options Binary input, limit switch,forced venting, external position sensor


TROVIS-VIEW Operator InterfaceTROVIS-VIEW is a standard operator interface, allowing theuser to configure and parameterize various SAMSON instru-ments using a device-specific database module.Data is transferred between the TROVIS-VIEW software and theSAMSON device either directly using a connecting cable or in-frared adapter or indirectly using a memory pen or memorymodule. A direct connection enables both online and offline op-eration. This means that data can be changed in the device im-mediately, or they can be saved on the PC first and later down-loaded to the device on site.The device-specific modules contain a database providing thecharacteristic properties of each device type, such as parame-ters, data points, user levels, etc.Refer to Data Sheet T 6661 EN for details.

Fig. 12 · TROVIS-VIEW Operator Interface withType 3730 Positioner

Fig. 11 · Type 3731 Ex d Positioner, terminal compartmentand cover for operating button opened

Fig. 10 · Type 3731-3 Ex d Positioner withHART® communication or Type 3731-5 Positionerwith FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication


Electropneumatic and pneumaticpositionersType 3766 Pneumatic PositionerType 3767 Electropneumatic PositionerSingle- or double-acting p/p (Type 3766) or i/p (Type 3767)positioners for pneumatic linear and rotary actuators.


Angle of rotation Up to 90°


Reference variable Type 3766: 0.2 … 1 bar (3 … 15 psi)Type 3767: (0)4 … 20 mA

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 andII 3 G EEx nA II T6 acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA, GOST, JIS approvalsType 3766 also with IECEx TSA (Australia)approval or Ex d with Type 6116 i/p Converter

Options Limit switch, solenoid valve, position transmitter

Data Sheet T 8355 EN

Type 4763 Electropneumatic PositionerType 4765 Pneumatic PositionerSingle-acting electropneumatic (Type 4763) or pneumatic(Type 4765) positioner for pneumatic linear actuators.

Travel 7.5 to 90 mm

Attachment NAMUR ribs, rod-type yokes

Reference variable Type 4763: (0)4 … 20 mAType 4765: 0.2 … 1 bar

Explosionprotectionfor Type 4763Type 4765


FM, CSA approvalsEx d with Type 6116 i/p Converter

Options Special version with oxygen as operating me-dium


Type 3760 Electropneumatic Positioner andPneumatic PositionerCost-effective, single-acting pneumatic or electropneumaticpositioner designed for direct attachment to Type 3277 Pneu-matic Actuator.

Travel 5 to 15 mm

Attachment Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator

Reference variable 0.2 … 1 bar (3 … 15 psi)(0)4 … 20 mA, 1 … 5 mA

Explosionprotection


FM, CSA, JIS, AUS approvalsEx d with Type 6116 i/p Converter

Options Limit switch


Fig. 13 · Type 3766 Positioner,attachment acc. to IEC 60534 (NAMUR)

Fig. 14 · Type 4763 Electropneumatic Positioner withpressure gauges

Fig. 15 · Micro-flow valve with EEx d positioner(Type 3760 Positioner and Type 6116Electropneumatic Converter)


Type 3761 Electropneumatic Positionerfor rotary actuatorsSingle-acting or double-acting pneumatic or electropneumaticpositioner for attachment to rotary actuators.

Angle of rotation Max. 90°

Attachment According to VDI/VDE 3845

Reference variable 0.2 … 1 bar (3 … 15 psi) or4 … 20 mA

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6

Options Limit switch


Fig. 16 · Type 3761 Electropneumatic Positionerattached to Type 3278 Rotary Actuator


System 6000Converters for direct current signal

Type 6116 Electropneumatic ConverterDevices used to convert a direct current input signal into a pneu-matic output signal for measuring and control. Especially suit-able as intermediate element between electric measuring de-vices and pneumatic controllers or between electric control de-vices and pneumatic control valves.The electropneumatic converter can be combined with variouspneumatic positioners to provide a flameproof version.

Input 4 … 20 mA

Output 0.2 ... 1 bar (3 ... 15 psi) or0.4 ... 2 bar (6 ... 30 psi)Special ranges available

Supply air Min. 0.4 bar above upper signal pressurerange

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 andII 2 G EEx d IIC T6 acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA, GOST, JIS, AUS approvals

Options Pressure gauge; extended temperature range


Type 6151 u/i ModuleThe Type 6151 u/i Module converts a DC voltage into a currentsignal. It is suitable for attachment to devices with an electricalconnection according to DIN EN 175301-803. The standardhousing connector or a special device connector for differentversions may be used.

Input 0(2) … 10 V

Output 0(4) … 20 mA

Auxiliary power 16 … 30 V DC


Fig. 17 · Type 6116 Electropneumatic Converter mountedon Type 3766 Pneumatic Positioner

Fig. 18 · Type 6151 u/i Module


Limit switches, position transmitters

The limit switches supply a signal when an adjusted limit value isexceeded in either direction. This signal is suitable for initiatingvisual or audible alarms as well as pilot valves or other switch-ing units. Moreover, the limit switches can be connected to cen-tral control or alarm systems.

Type 4746 Electric or Pneumatic Limit SwitchLimit switch for attachment to pneumatic or electric controlvalves as well as for attachment to Type 4763 ElectropneumaticPositioners or Type 4765 Pneumatic Positioners.

Contacts 2 contacts optionallyinductive, electric or pneumatic

Attachment Actuators with cast yokes or rod-type yokesacc. to IEC 60534-6Type 4763 Electropneumatic PositionerType 4765 Pneumatic Positioner

Supply air 1.4 bar for pneumatic limit switch

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 andII 3 G EEx nA II T6, Zone 2 acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA, GOST, NEPSI approvals


Type 3776 Limit Switch (SAMSOMATIC)Limit switch with inductive or electric contacts and solenoidvalve for linear actuators or rotary actuators according toVDI/VDE 3845.

Travel range 7.5 … 120 mm

Rotational angle 0 … 100° or 0 … 180° adjustable

Contacts Max. 3 piecesinductive proximity switches,inductive double proximity switches orelectric microswitches

Solenoid valve Safety integrity level SIL 4 acc. to IEC 615081 or 2 integrated pilot valvesNominal signals 6/12/24 V DC or24/115/230 V ACSupply air 2.2 to 6 bar

Attachment Direct attachment to Type 3277 andType 3277-5 ActuatorsAttachment to actuators with NAMUR rib acc.to IEC 60534-6-1Rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845 withfixing levels 1 or 2

Explosionprotection


GOST approval

Options Integrated AS-Interface module with bus con-nection


Fig. 19 · Type 4746-x2 Inductive Limit Switch

Fig. 20 · Type 3776 Limit Switch for linear actuators

Fig. 21 · Type 3776 Limit Switch forrotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845


Type 3768 Inductive Limit SwitchLimit switch with two inductive switches (proximity switches) andoptionally one 3/2-way solenoid valve, which registers a binarysignal issued by a control device and converts it into a binary sig-nal pressure. When the solenoid valve is in de-energized state,the actuator moves the valve to the fail-safe position.


Contacts 2 inductive proximity switches

Attachment Direct attachment to Type 3277 ActuatorAttachment to actuators with NAMUR rib acc.to IEC 60534-6-1Attachment to rotary actuators acc. toVDI/VDE 3845

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 andII 3 G EEx nA II T6; Zone 2; acc. to ATEX

FM, CSA, GOST, NEPSI approval

Option 3/2-way solenoid valve


Type 3738-20 Electronic Limit SwitchElectronic limit switch for on/off applications to indicate the endposition of rotary actuators. Optionally with integrated solenoidvalve.Proven operation concept already used in Series 373xPositioners:Menu-driven, on-site operation using one rotary pushbutton,display easy to read in any mounting position. Additionally,communication connection for convenient parameter settingsand documentation using TROVIS-VIEW software.

Range of rotation Min. 0 … 30°, max. 0 … 170°

Sensor Wear-free magnetoresistive travel sensor

Contacts acc. toNAMURIEC 60947-5-6

A: Limit switch for fail-safe positionB: Limit switch for operating positionC: Signal when target range reached during

advanced partial stroke testSTAT: Status message or error message

Attachment Using mounting platform acc. toVDI/VDE 3845, fixing level 2

Solenoid valve External: 24 V DC, max. 18 WInternal: 3/2-way or 5/2-way-function

Electric powersupply

Supplied over a two-wire system solely from theNAMUR signal

Indications LC display with reversible reading direction,LED for solenoid valve status

Explosionprotection

II 2 G Ex ia IIC/IIB T6: Type 3738-20-110II 2 G e [ia] IIC T4: Type 3738-20-310


Fig. 22 · Type 3768 Inductive Limit Switch

Fig. 23 · Type 3738-20 Electronic Limit Switch mounted on apiston actuator


Type 4744 Electric Limit Switch forhazardous areasLimit switch with one or two momentary-contact limit switches intype of protection “Flameproof enclosure” EEx de IIC T6.Type 4744-2 Limit Switch with one momentary-contact switchfor mounting to a rod-type yoke of V2001 Series Valves


Contacts Type 4744: 1 or 2Type 4744-2: 1

Attachment Type 4744: Attachment to actuators withNAMUR rib acc. to IEC 60534-6-1Type 4744-2: Rod-type yoke of V2001 SeriesValves

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ed IIC T6 andII 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C andII 2 G EEx de IIC T6 andII 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX

Type 4744-2: II 2 G EEx d IIC T6/T5GOST approval


Type 4748 Analog Position TransmitterAnalog position transmitter for attachment to control valves aswell as Type 4763 Electropneumatic Positioner or Type 4765Pneumatic Positioner to convert the valve travel into a continu-ous output signal between 4 to 20 mA.Connection as two-wire transmitter.

Travel range 7 … 120 mm

Output signal 4 … 20 mA

Attachment Attachment to actuators with NAMUR rib orpillar-type yoke acc. to IEC 60534-6-1Type 4763 Electropneumatic PositionerType 4765 Pneumatic Positioner

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 andII 3 G EEx nA II T6 Zone 2 acc. to ATEX


Fig. 24 · Type 4744 Electric Limit Switch

Fig. 25 · Type 4744-2 Electric Limit Switch

Fig. 26 · Type 4748 Analog Position Transmitter


AccessoriesType 3770 Ex d/Ex i Field BarrierField barrier with flameproof enclosure serving as an interfacebetween intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits inhazardous areas. The field barrier is suitable for operatingpositioners, smart positioners using HART protocol,electropneumatic converters, solenoid valves, or limit switches.Refer to Data Sheet T 8379 EN for more details.

Type 3701 Solenoid Valve (SAMSOMATIC)The pilot-controlled solenoid valve converts electric binary sig-nals into binary pneumatic signals.

Solenoid valve 3/2-way or 5/2-way

Attachment Attachment to actuators with NAMUR rib,rod-type yokes or to rotary actuators withNAMUR interface

Nominal signal 6/12/24 V DC or 24/48/115/230 V AC

Supply air 1.4 … 6 bar (20 … 90 psi)

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6; Zone 1 andII 3 G EEx nA II T6; Zone 2; acc. to ATEX

CSA, FM approvals

Options Safety approval SIL 4 or TÜV


Type 3963 Solenoid Valve (SAMSOMATIC)Solenoid valve series consisting of a 3/2-way pilot valve anddiverse 3/2-way, 5/2-way or 6/2-way booster valves.Low power consumption between 20 and 150 mW.

Pilot valve e/p binary converter

Nominal signal 6/12/24 V DC or 24/48/115/230 V AC


Booster valve 3/2, 5/2, 5/3 or 6/2 function

Attachment Attachment to actuators with NAMUR rib acc.to IEC 60534-6-1 or to rotary actuators withNAMUR interface acc. to VDI/VDE 3845

Explosionprotection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 orII 3 G EEx nA II T6 acc. to ATEX

CSA, FM, GOST, NEPSI approvals

Options SIL 4 acc. to IEC 61508


Fig. 27 · Type 3770 Ex d/Ex i Field Barrierwith Type 3780 Positioner

Fig. 28 · Type 3701-01 Solenoid Valve

Fig. 29 · Type 3963-..25 Solenoid Valve


Type 3962 Pilot Valve (SAMSOMATIC)The pilot valve is used to control booster or diaphragm valves aswell as valves conforming to ISO 5599/1 with CNOMOinterface.

Construction Solenoid coil and seat valve with return spring

Nominal signal 24 V DC or 24/115/230 V AC


For controlling Type 3756 Booster Valve(Data Sheet T 756-1/5 EN and T 756-6 EN)

Type 3994-0671 Diaphragm Valve(Data Sheet T 994-0671 EN)

Valves acc. to ISO 5599/1with CNOMO interface

Attachment Attachment to actuators with NAMUR rib acc.to IEC 60534-6-1 or to rotary actuators withNAMUR interface acc. to VDI/VDE 3845

Explosionprotection

EEx em T5/T6 orEEx d IIC T4/T5/T6


Type 4708 Supply Pressure RegulatorSupply pressure regulators provide pneumatic measuring andcontrol equipment with a constant air supply. The pressure reg-ulator reduces and controls the pressure of a compressed airnetwork to the pressure adjusted at the set point adjuster.Versions for installation in pipelines or control panels or for di-rect attachment to positioners or pneumatic actuators.

Set point range 0.5 … 6 bar (8 … 90 psi) or0.2 … 1.6 bar (3 … 23 psi)

Operating pressure Max. 12 bar (175 psi)

Versions Aluminum or stainless steel body

Filter Optionally with plastic, aluminum orstainless steel filter receptacle

Adapter For attachment to positioners or pneumaticactuators

Option Pressure gauge


Type 4708-45 with ½” connections and increased air capacity

Fig. 30 · Type 3962-9x04 EEx d Pilot Valvewith Type 3756 Booster Valve

Fig. 31 · Type 4708-11 Supply Pressure Regulator withpressure gauge and filter

Fig. 32 · Type 4708-45 Supply Pressure Regulator with½” connection


Type 3999-009x Service Unit Model (SAMSOMATIC)for purifying and controlling compressed airThe service unit model is used to supply compressed air to pneu-matic converters, controllers and positioners. It cleans the com-pressed air, removing any dirt particles, water and oil. In addi-tion, it regulates the air pressure to a constant output pressure.

Set point range 0.5 … 10 bar (8 … 145 psi) adjustable

Operating pressure Max. 16 bar (230 psi)

Version Pipe or wall mounting

Filter unit Coarse filter, submicro filter, pressure regulatorwith secondary venting, pressure gauge

Condensatedrainage

Automatic over float valve or solenoid valve

Options Pressure switch or differential pressure switch,solenoid valves


Type 3999-0096 Filter Regulator (SAMSOMATIC)The filter regulator is used to supply compressed air to volumeboosters for large actuators. It cleans the compressed air, re-moving any dirt particles, water and oil. In addition, it regulatesthe air pressure to a constant output pressure.

Set point range 0.5 … 10 bar (8 … 145 psi) adjustable

Operatingpressure p1

Max. 16 bar (230 psi)

Version With mounting bracket

Filter unit Filter, pressure regulator and pressure gauge

Condensatedrainage Manually over drainage valve


Type 3759 Pneumatic Remote AdjusterA precision pressure regulator which can be manually adjusted.It is designed for use in pneumatic control loops as either a setpoint adjuster or manual remote adjuster and can be used as anadjustable precision pressure regulator for measuring, calibra-tion and testing equipment.

Set point ranges 0 … 0.6 bar (0 … 9 psi)0 … 1.6 bar (0 … 23 psi)0 … 4 bar (0 … 60 psi)0 … 6 bar (0 … 90 psi)

Operatingpressure p1

Max. 7 bar (100 psi)

Version Panel mounting or installation


Type 3709 Pneumatic Lock-up ValvePneumatic lock-up valve for shutting off the signal pressure lineof pneumatic actuators upon failure of the supply air.

Signal pressure Up to 6 bar (90 psi)

Supply air Max. 12 bar (175 psi)


Fig. 34 · Type 3999-0096 Filter Regulator

Fig. 35 · Type 3759 Pneumatic Remote Adjuster

Fig. 36 · Type 3709 Pneumatic Lock-up Valve

Fig. 33 · Type 3999-009x Service Unit Model


Type 3710 Reversing AmplifierThe reversing amplifier allows double-acting pneumatic actua-tors to be operated using single-acting positioners.The positioner creates an output signal pressure Y1, to which theair pressure Y2 is added.The reversing amplifier uses the supply pressure Z as auxiliarypower. The following rule applies:Y1 + Y2 = Z

Supply pressure Max. 6 bar (90 psi)

Threadedconnections ISO 228/1-G ¼ or ¼-18 NPT

Ambient tempera-ture range –25 ... 80 °C (–13 ... 176 °F)

Degree of protec-tion IP 65

Options Pressure gauge for Y1 and Y2 ora pressure gauge for Y2 in conjunction withType 4708-54 Supply Pressure Regulator


Type 3755 Pneumatic Volume BoosterThe volume booster is used together with positioners to increasethe positioning speed of pneumatic actuators. It supplies an airflow output at the actuator port whose pressure corresponds ex-actly with the signal pressure, except that it has a much highervolume output.

Supply pressure Max. 10 bar (150 psi)

Signal and actua-tor pressure Max. 7 bar (105 psi)

Pressure ratio Signal to output = 1:1

Ambient tempera-ture range –40 to 80 °C (–40 … 176 °F)

Options Flanged-on exhaust portNPT threads


Fig 37 · Type 3710 Reversing Amplifier with two pressuregauges

Fig. 38 · Type 3755 Pneumatic Volume Booster


Positioners

Pneumatic and electropneumatic positionersfor linear and rotary actuators

23

Series 3730

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-0

ApplicationSingle-acting or double-acting positioner for attachment topneumatic control valvesReference variable 4 to 20 mATravels 5.3 to 200 mm

The positioner ensures a predetermined assignment of the valvestem position (controlled variable x) to the input signal (refer-ence variable w). It compares the input signal received from acontroller to the travel of the control valve and issues acorresponding output signal pressure (output variable y).

Special features• Easy attachment to common linear actuators over SAMSON

direct attachment interface (Fig. 1), over NAMUR rib (Fig. 3)or to control valves with rod-type yokes according toIEC 60534-6

• Any desired mounting position• Calibrated travel sensor without gears susceptible to wear• Analog pneumatic output prevents pulsing in case of leaking

actuator• Fast analog control loop• High control accuracy (fine tuning) without dead band and

continuous pneumatic output• Two-wire system with small electric load below 300 Ω for

explosion-protected version and version without explosionprotection

• Output pressure limitation over DIP switch• Selectable tight-closing function with fixed switching point• Low air consumption of approx. 110 ln/h independent of

supply and output pressure• Aluminum housing in IP 66 degree of protection• Check valve in the exhaust air port• Resistant to shock and vibrations• Extended temperature range also for intrinsically safe version• Travel range selectable over DIP switches within the rated

travel range• Zero and span adjustable over potentiometers• Reference variable range and direction of action adjustable

over DIP switches, e.g. for split-range operation• Certified according to IEC 61508/SIL

Additional options– Stainless steel housing

Fig. 2 · Type 3730-0 Positioner on Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve

Fig. 3 · Type 3730-0 Positioner, NAMUR attachment

Fig. 1 · Type 3730-0 Positioner,direct attachment to Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator

JIS

Data Sheet T 8384-0 EN 2010-01 25

Principle of operationThe electropneumatic positioner is attached to pneumatic con-trol valves. It is used to assign the valve stem position (controlledvariable x) to the input signal (reference variable w). The inputsignal received from a control system is compared to the travelof the control valve, and an output signal pressure (output vari-able y) is produced.The positioner consists of a travel sensor system proportional toresistance, an analog i/p converter with a downstream boosterand the electronics with microcontroller.The position of the valve stem is transmitted as a linear travelmotion over the pick-up lever to the travel sensor (2) and sup-plied to an analog PD controller (3). The PD controller comparesthis actual value to the DC control signal coming from the con-trol system, e.g. a 4 to 20 mA signal. In case of a system devia-tion, the operation of the i/p converter (6) is changed so that theactuator of the control valve (1) is pressurized or vented accord-ingly over the downstream booster (7).This causes the valve plug to move to the position determined bythe reference variable.

The supply air is supplied to the booster and the pressure regu-lator (8). An intermediate flow regulator (9) with fixed settings isused to purge the positioner and, at the same time, guaranteestrouble-free operation of the booster.The output signal pressure of the booster can be limited by acti-vating DIP switch S5 (4).The volume restriction (10) and DIP switch S6 are used to opti-mize the positioner by adapting it to the actuator size andchanging the gain factor.

OperationThe positioner is operated and adjusted over potentiometersand DIP switches. The configuration of the positioner is facili-tated by instructions included on the inside of the cover whichare intended to ensure a quick and trouble-free adaptation ofthe positioner to the control valve.

2

3

6

7

8

10

1

9

4

w

x

Q y

x

Fig. 4 · Functional diagram of the Type 3730-0 Positioner

Legend1 Actuator2 Travel sensor3 Analog PD controller4 DIP switches S1 to S106 i/p converter7 Booster8 Pressure regulator9 Flow regulator

10 Volume restriction

26 Data Sheet T 8384-0 EN 2010-01

Table 1 · Technical data

Type 3730-0 i/p PositionerTravel Adjustable Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator 5.3 to 30 mm (lever M)

Attachment to Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve 5.3 to 15 mm (lever S)Attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR) 5.3 to 200 mm (lever S, M, L, XL)

Travel range Adjustable Within the initialized travel/angle of rotation; restricted to 1/5 at the maximumReference variable w Signal range 4 to 20 mA · 4 to 12 mA and 12 to 20 mA

Adjustable over DIP switches S6 and S7Static destruction limit 100 mA

Minimum current > 3.6 mALoad impedance ≤ 6 V (corresponds to 300 Ω at 20 mA) for versions with and without explosion protectionSupply air Supply air

Air qualityISO 8573-1

1.4 to 7 bar (20 to 105 psi)Max. particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil content: Class 3 · Pressure dew point: Class 3 or atleast 10 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected

Signal pressure (output) 0 bar up to the capacity of the supply pressureCan be limited to approx. 2.4 bar over DIP switch S5

Characteristic Linear · Deviation ≤ 1 %Hysteresis ≤ 1 %Sensitivity ≤ 0.1 %Direction of action Adjustable Over DIP switch S4Air consumption Independent of supply air approx. 110 ln/h at a supply pressure of 4 barAir output capacity

for the actuator to bePressurized At Δp = 6 bar: 8.5 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 3.0 mn3/h · KVmax(20 °C) = 0.09

Vented At Δp = 6 bar: 14.0 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 4.5 mn3/h · KVmax(20 °C) = 0.15Permissible ambienttemperature

–20 to +80 °C · –45 to +80 °C with metal cable glandThe limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected versions

Influences Temperature ≤ 0.15 %/10 KSupply air NoneVibrations ≤ 0.25 % up to 2000 Hz and 4 g according to IEC 770

Electromagnetic compatibility Complies with EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 requirementsElectrical connections One M20 x 1.5 cable gland for 6 to 12 mm clamping area · Second M20 x 1.5 threaded

connection additionally exists · Screw terminals for 2.0 to 2.5 mm² wire cross-sectionExplosion protection See table belowDegree of protection IP 66 / NEMA 4XImplementation in safety-related systemsin compliance with IEC 61508

Suitable for use in safety-relevant applications up to SIL 2 (single device) and SIL 3 (with redundantconfiguration), safety shutdown at a reference variable of 0 mA.

MaterialsHousing Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi12(Fe) (EN AC-44300) acc. to DIN EN 1706

Chromated and powder paint coated · Special version in stainless steel 1.4581External parts Stainless steel 1.4571 and 1.4301Cable gland Polyamide, black, M20 x 1.5Weight Approx. 1 kg

Summary of explosion protection certificatesType of approval Certificate number Date CommentsEC Type Examination Certificate

First Addendum

PTB 03 ATEX 2099 2003-07-21

2006-08-25

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6Perm. ambient temperature T6/50 °C; Type 3730-01II 2 D IP 66 T 80 °C

Statement of Conformity PTB 03 ATEX 2179 X 2003-09-30 II 3 G EEx nA II T6First Addendum 2004-12-09 II 3 G EEx nL IIC T6; Zone 2

II 3 D IP 54/65 T 80 °C; Zone 22; Type 3730-08FM approval 3021579 2004-12-01 Cl. I, II, III; Div. 1; Gr. A, B, C, D, E, F, G

Cl. I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6Cl. I; Div. 2; Gr. A, B, C, DNEMA Type 4X; Type 3730-03

GOST approval POCC DE.GB04.B00885 2008-01-15 0 Ex ia IIC T6 X; 2 Ex nA II T6 X2 Ex nL IIC T6; valid until 2011-01-15

JIS approval TC17330 2005-07-29 Ex ia IIC T6; Type 3730-07

Data Sheet T 8384-0 EN 2010-01 27

Dimensions in mm

70 1558

46

34

40

34

210

86164

2858

M 20x1.5

Output (38) Supply (9)

1480

Directattachment

Attachment acc. toIEC 60534-6 andNAMUR

Pressure gauge bracket or connecting plateG ¼ or ¼ NPT

LeverS = 17 mm, M = 50 mmL = 100 mm, XL = 200 mm

Output A1

Output A2

Supply (9)

A1 Z

A2

50

495979

76

80

130

15164

50

58

150

Attachment to rotary actuatorsVDI/VDE 3845for all sizes of fixing level 2

Reversing amplifier(option)

Connecting plateG ¼ or ¼ NPT

28 Data Sheet T 8384-0 EN 2010-01

Attachment of the positionerThe Type 3730-0 Electropneumatic Positioner can be mounteddirectly on a Type 3277 Actuator. When attached toType 3277-5 (120 cm²) and to actuators with fail-safe action“Actuator stem extends“, the signal pressure is routed to the ac-tuator through an internal bore in the actuator yoke.For all actuators with fail-safe action “Actuator stem retracts“and effective areas of 240 cm² and larger, the signal pressureis routed to the actuator over ready-made external piping.Using the appropriate bracket, the positioner can also be at-tached according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR recommendation).The positioner can be mounted on either side of the controlvalve.

Ordering textPositioner Type 3730-0x– Without pneumatic connection (only for direct attachment to

Type 3277 Actuator)– With pneumatic connecting rail ISO 228/1 - G ¼– With pneumatic connecting rail ¼-18 NPT– Without/with pressure gauge up to max. 6 bar– Attachment to Type 3277 Actuator

(120/240/350/700 cm²)– Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)– Travel: ... mm

If applicable, stem diameter: ... mm– Adapter M 20x1.5 to ½ NPT– Metal cable gland

Specifications subject to change without notice

Article code

Positioner Type 3730- 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 0

With DIP switches, 4 … 20 mA reference variable*

Explosion protection

Without 0

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 acc. to ATEX 1

Ex ia acc. to FM/CSA 3

Ex ia Japan JIS 7

II 3 G EEx nA/nL II T6 and II 3 D IP 54/65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX 8

Housing material

Standard aluminum 0

Stainless steel 1.4581 1

Special applications

Without 0

Device compatible with paint (lowest permissible ambienttemperature –20 °C)

1

Exhaust air connection with ¼-18 NPT thread 2

Special version

None 0 0 0

GOST approval Ex ia/Ex nA 1 0 1 4

* Additional functions such as limit switches, solenoid valve, position transmitter or external position sensor, e.g. with Type 3730-2 Positioner

Data Sheet T 8384-0 EN 2010-01 29

Series 3730

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-1

ApplicationSingle-acting or double-acting positioner for attachment topneumatic control valves. Self-calibrating, automatic adapta-tion to valve and actuator.Reference variable 4 to 20 mATravels 3.75 to 200 mmOpening angle 24° to 100°

The positioner ensures a predetermined assignment of the valvestem position (controlled variable x) to the input signal (refer-ence variable w). It compares the input signal received from acontroller to the travel or rotational angle of the control valveand issues a corresponding output signal pressure (output vari-able y).

Special features• Easy attachment to common linear and rotary actuators with

SAMSON direct attachment interface (Fig. 1), over NAMURrib (Fig. 2), to control valves with rod-type yokes according toIEC 60534-6-1, or to rotary actuators according toVDI/VDE 3845 (Fig. 3)

• Any desired mounting position of the positioner• Simple one-knob, menu-driven operation• LCD easy to read in any mounted position due to selectable

reading direction• Variable, automatic start-up• Preset parameters - only values deviating from the standard

need to be adjusted• Calibrated travel sensor without gears susceptible to wear• Permanent storage of all parameters in EEPROM (protected

against power failure)• Two-wire system with a small electrical load of 300 Ω• Activatable tight-closing function• Continuous monitoring of zero point• Two standard programmable position alarms• Certified according to IEC 61508/SIL

Version– Type 3730-1 · Electropneumatic positioner operable on

site with LCD

Additional options– Stainless steel housing

Fig. 3 · Type 3730,attachment acc. to VDI/VDE 3845

Fig. 2 · Type 3730,attachment to NAMUR rib

Fig. 1 · Type 3730,direct attachment toType 3277 Pneumatic Actuator

Data Sheet T 8384-1 EN 2010-01 31

Principle of operationThe positioner is attached to pneumatic control valves and isused to assign the valve stem position (controlled variable x) tothe electric input signal supplied by a control system (referencevariable w). It compares this signal to the travel or rotational an-gle of the control valve and produces the corresponding outputsignal pressure (output variable y) for the pneumatic actuator.The positioner mainly consists of an electric travel sensor system(2), an analog i/p module with a downstream booster as wellas the electronics unit with a microcontroller (5).When a deviation occurs, the actuator is pressurized or vented.If required, the changes in the signal pressure can be sloweddown by a volume restriction.A constant air stream with a fixed set point to the atmosphere iscreated by flow regulator (9) with a fixed set point. The airstream is used to purge the inside of the case as well as to opti-mize the air capacity booster. The i/p module (6) is suppliedwith a constant upstream pressure by the pressure reducingvalve (8) to make it independent of the supply air pressure.

OperationThe positioner is operated with a user-friendly rotarypushbutton system. The parameters are selected by turning theknob, pushing it activates the required setting. In the menu, allparameters are listed in one level, eliminating the need tosearch in submenus. All parameters can be checked andchanged on site.All values are displayed on the LCD. The reading direction ofthe LCD can be rotated by 180° at the push of a button.

%

Smm

%mm

w

x

Q

PD

A2

A1

4 5

3

14

16

6

7

8

10

1

w

9

xy

2

Fig. 4 · Functional diagram of Type 3730-1 Positioner

Legend1 Control valve2 Travel sensor3 Controller4 A/D converter5 Microcontroller6 i/p module7 Pneumatic booster8 Pressure reducing valve9 Flow regulator10 Volume restriction14 Software limit switches16 LCD

32 Data Sheet T 8384-1 EN 2010-01


Type 3730-1 Positioner

Travel Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator: 3.75 to 30 mmAttachment according to IEC 60534-6-1: 3.75 to 200 mm

Opening angle Attachment according to VDI/VDE 3845 24 to 100°

Travel range Adjustable within initialized travel/angle of rotation; restricted to 1/5 at the maximum

Reference variable w

Signal range 4 to 20 mA · Two-wire device, reverse polarity protection

Split-range 4 to 11.9 and 12.1 to 20 mA

Static destructionlimit 100 mA

Minimum current 3.7 mA

Load impedance ≤ 6 V (corresponds to 300 Ω at 20 mA)

Supply airSupply pressure 1.4 to 7 bar (20 to 105 psi)

Air quality acc. toISO 8573-1 (2001)

Maximum particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil content: Class 3Pressure dew point: Class 3 or at least 10 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected

Signal pressure (output) 0 bar up to the capacity of the supply pressure · Limitable to approx. 2.4 bar per software

Characteristic optionally 1 characteristic for linear travel · 8 characteristics for angle of rotation

Hysteresis ≤ 1 %

Sensitivity ≤ 0.1 %

Direction of action w/x reversible

Air consumption, steady state Independent of supply air approx. 110 ln/h

Air output capacityActuator pressurized At Δp = 6 bar: 8.5 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 3.0 mn3/h · KVmax (20 °C) = 0.09

Actuator vented At Δp = 6 bar: 14.0 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 4.5 mn3/h · KVmax (20 °C) = 0.15

Permissible ambient temperature –20 to +80 °C · –45 to +80 °C with metal cable glandThe limits in EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices.

Influences

Temperature ≤ 0.15 %

Supply air None

Vibrations ≤ 0.25 % up to 2000 Hz and 4 g acc. to IEC 770

Electromagnetic compatibility Complies with EN 61000-6-2, 61000-6-3 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 requirements

Electrical connections One M20 x 1.5 cable gland for 6 to 12 mm clamping range · Second M20 x 1.5 threadedconnection additionally exists · Screw terminals for 2.0 to 2.5 mm² wire cross-sections

Explosion protection See summary of explosion protection certificates

Degree of protection IP 66 / NEMA 4X

Implementation in safety-related systemsin compliance with IEC 61508

Suitable for use in safety-relevant applications up to SIL 2 (single device) and SIL 3 (withredundant configuration), safety shutdown at a reference variable of 0 mA.

Binary contacts 2 software limit switches with adjustable limit values in steps of 0.5 %, reverse polarity protection

Signal status Version Without explosion protection Explosion-protected version

No response Conductive (R = 348 Ω) ≥ 2.1 mA

Response Non-conducting ≤ 1.2 mA

Operating voltage For connection to the binary input of a PLCacc. to EN 61131Pmax = 400 mW

Only for connection to NAMUR switchingamplifier acc. to EN 60947-5-6

Materials

Housing Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi12(Fe) (EN AC-44300) acc. to DIN EN 1706 · Chromated andpowder paint coated · Special version in stainless steel 1.4581

External parts Stainless steel 1.4571 and 1.4301

Cable gland Polyamide, black, M20 x 1.5

Weight Approx. 1.0 kg

Data Sheet T 8384-1 EN 2010-01 33

Dimensions in mm

40

34

210

86

164

2858

M 20x1.5


1480

Direct attachment

70 1558

46

34

Attachment acc. toIEC 60534-6 and NAMUR


LeverS = 17 mmM = 50 mmL = 100 mmXL = 200 mm

Output A1

Output A2

Supply (9)

A1 Z

A2

50

495979

76

80

130

15164

50

58

150

Attachment to rotary actuators


Reversing amplifier

Connecting plate

34 Data Sheet T 8384-1 EN 2010-01

Summary of explosion protection certificates

Type of approval Certificate number Date Comments

EC Type Examination CertificateFirst AddendumSecond Addendum

PTB 04 ATEX 2033 2004-04-192005-01-252008-02-25

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C; Type 3730-11

Statement of ConformityFirst Addendum

PTB 04 ATEX 2114 X 2004-12-092008-02-26

II 3 G EEx nA II T6II 3 G EEx nL IIC T6; Zone 2

II 3 D IP 54/65 T 80 °C; Zone 22; Type 3730-18

IECEx approval IECEx PTB 06.0055 2006-11-02 Ex ia IIC T6; Type 3730-11

FM approval 3023478 2004-12-012008-11-03

Cl. I, II, III; Div. 1; Gr. A, B, C, D, E, F, GCl. I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6Cl. I; Div. 2; Gr. A, B, C, DNEMA Type 4X; Type 3730-13

CSA approval 1675820 2005-08-292009-07-14

Ex ia IIC T6; Cl. I, Zone 0Cl. II, Gr. E, F, GEx nA II T6; Cl. II, Div. 2, Gr. E, F, GType 4 Enclosure; Type 3730-13

Article code

Positioner Type 3730- 1 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 x 0 0 0

With LC display and autotune,4 … 20 mA reference variable, two software limit switches*


Without 0

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 and II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX 1

Ex ia / Ex n acc. to FM/CSA 3

II 3 G EEx nA/nL II T6 and II 3 D IP 54/65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX 8

Housing material

Standard aluminum 0

Stainless steel 1.4581 1


None 0

Device compatible with paint (lowest permissible ambient temperature –20 °C) 1


Special version

None 0 0 0

* Additional functions such as limit switches, solenoid valve, position transmitter or external position sensor, e.g. with Type 3730-2 Positioner

Data Sheet T 8384-1 EN 2010-01 35

Attachment of the positionerThe Type 3730-1 Electropneumatic Positioner can be attacheddirectly to the Type 3277 Actuator over a connection block. Inactuators with fail-safe action “Actuator stem extends” andType 3277-5 Actuator (120 cm²), the signal pressure is routedover an internal bore in the actuator yoke to the actuator. Inactuators with fail-safe action “Actuator stem retracts” and inactuators with effective diaphragm areas of 240 cm² or larger,the signal pressure is routed to the actuator over ready-madeexternal piping.Using the appropriate bracket, the positioner can also beattached according to IEC 60534-6-1 (NAMURrecommendation). The positioner can be mounted on any sideof the control valve.A pair of universal brackets is used to mount the Type 3730-1Positioner to a Type 3278 Rotary Actuator or other rotaryactuators according to VDI/VDE 3845. The rotary motion of theactuator is transferred to the positioner over a coupling wheelwith degree scale.

Ordering textPositioner Type 3730-1x– Without pneumatic connecting rail

(only when directly attached to Type 3277)– With pneumatic connecting rail ISO 228/1-G ¼– With pneumatic connecting rail ¼-18 NPT– Without/with pressure gauge up to max. 6 bar– Additional cover label with list of parameters and operating

instructions in English/Spanish or English/French (standardversion German/English)

– Attachment to Type 3277 Actuator (120 to 700 cm²)– Attachment to IEC 60534-6-1 (NAMUR)

Travel: ... mm, if applicable, stem diameter: ... mm– Attachment to Type 3278 Rotary Actuator (160/320 cm²)– Attachment to rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845– Pneumatic reversing amplifier for double-acting actuators

with connection according to ISO 228/1 - G ¼ or ¼-18 NPT– Adapter M20 x 1.5 to ½ NPT– Metal cable gland– Positioner free of substances that can impair surfaces to be

painted– Exhaust air connection with ¼ NPT thread– Special version: housing made of CrNiMo steel

Specifications subject to change without notice.

36 Data Sheet T 8384-1 EN 2010-01

Series 3730

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-2 andType 3730-3 with HART® communication

ApplicationSingle-acting or double-acting positioner for attachment topneumatic control valves. Self-calibrating, automatic adapta-tion to valve and actuator.Reference variable 4 to 20 mATravels 3.6 to 200 mmOpening angles 24° to 100°

The positioner ensures a predetermined assignment of the valvestem position (controlled variable x) to the electric input signal(reference variable w). It compares the control signal receivedfrom a controller to the travel or opening angle of the controlvalve and issues a corresponding output signal pressure (outputvariable y).

Special features• Simple attachment to common linear and rotary actuators

with SAMSON direct attachment interface (Fig. 1), NAMURrib (Fig. 2), valves with rod-type yokes acc. to IEC 60534-6-1or rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845 (Fig. 3)

• Any desired mounting position• Simple one-knob, menu-driven operation• LCD easy to read in any mounting position due to selectable

reading direction• Configurable with a PC over the SSP interface using the

TROVIS-VIEW software• Variable, automatic start-up with four different initialization

modes• Preset parameters – only values deviating from the standard

need to be adjusted• Calibrated travel sensor without gears susceptible to wear• "Sub" initialization mode (substitution) allows the positioner

to be started up in case of emergency whilst the plant is run-ning without the valve moving through the whole travel range

• All parameters saved in EEPROM (protection against powerfailure)

• Two-wire system with a small electrical load between 300 Ωand 410 Ω depending on the version (see Table 1)

• Adjustable output pressure limitation• Tight-closing function can be activated• Continuous monitoring of zero point• Integrated temperature sensor and operating hours counter• Two standard configurable position alarms• Self-diagnostics; alarms as condensed state conforming to

NAMUR Recommendation NE 107, issued over a fault alarmcontact or optional analog position transmitter

• Integrated EXPERTplus diagnostics (see T 8388 EN), suitablefor valves for throttling and on/off service with additionalpartial stroke test for valves in safety-related applications

• Certified according to IEC 61508/SIL

Versions– Type 3730-2 · Electropneumatic positioner with LCD,

operable on site, local communication using SSP interface,EXPERTplus diagnostics

– Type 3730-3 · Positioner as above, additionally with HART®

communication– Type 3731 Ex d Positioner · As above, additionally with

HART® communication · See Data Sheet T 8387-3 EN

Fig. 3 · Type 3730,attachment according toVDI/VDE 3845

Fig. 2 · Type 3730,attachment to NAMUR rib

Fig. 1 · Type 3730,direct attachment to Type 3277Pneumatic Actuator

Fig. 4 · Type 3730,external position sensorwith Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve

Data Sheet T 8384-2/3 EN 2009-12 37

Additional options– Inductive limit switch with proximity switch– Analog position transmitter with two-wire transmitter– Forced venting function with solenoid valve– Binary input– External position sensor (Fig. 4)– Stainless steel housing

Principle of operationThe electropneumatic positioner is attached to pneumatic con-trol valves. It is used to assign the valve stem position (controlledvariable x) to the input signal (reference variable w). The inputsignal received from a control system is compared to the travelor opening angle of the control valve and an output signal pres-sure (output variable y) is produced.The positioner consists of an electric travel sensor system (2), ananalog i/p converter with a downstream booster and the elec-tronics unit with microcontroller (5).When a deviation occurs, the actuator is pressurized or vented.If required, the changes in the signal pressure can be sloweddown by a volume restriction. The signal pressure to the actua-tor can be limited by software to 1.4, 2.4 or 3.7 bar.A constant air stream to the atmosphere is created by the flowregulator (9) with a fixed set point. The air stream is used topurge the inside of the case as well as to optimize the air capac-ity booster. The i/p module (6) is supplied with a constant up-stream pressure by the pressure regulator (8) to make it inde-pendent of the supply air pressure.

OperationThe positioner is operated with a user-friendly rotarypushbutton. The parameters are selected by turning the knob,pushing it activates the required settings. In the menu, all pa-rameters are listed in one level, meaning there is no need tosearch through submenus. All parameters can be checked andchanged on site.All values are displayed on the LCD. The reading direction ofthe LCD can be rotated by 180° at the push of a button.The closing direction of the control valve is indicated to thepositioner by the slide switch "Air to open/Air to close". It assignsthe CLOSED position of the control valve to the 0 % reading.The INIT key activates initialization, which is started accordingto (pre)set parameters (autotune). After initialization has beencompleted, the positioner immediately starts control operation.To configure the positioner with SAMSON’s TROVIS-VIEW con-figuration software, the positioner is equipped with an additionaldigital interface to be connected to the RS-232 interface of a PC.Additionally, all parameters of the Type 3730-3 Positioner canbe accessed using HART® communication.

w

x

Q

%S

mm

GG

PD

SerialInterface 16

13

22

15

A2

A3

BE

A1

112

4

21 FSK

20

195

3

12

6

7

8

10

1

14

14

w

xy

24V DC

9

17 18

Fig. 5 · Functional diagram of Type 3730-2/-3 Positioner

Legend1 Control valve2 Travel sensor3 Controller4 A/D converter5 Microcontroller6 i/p module7 Pneumatic booster8 Pressure regulator9 Flow regulator

10 Volume restriction11 Inductive limit switch (optional)12 Solenoid valve (optional)13 Position transmitter or

binary input (optional)14 Software limit switches15 Fault alarm output16 LCD17 Control of solenoid valve18 Galvanic isolation (optional)19 D/A converter20 Communication interface21 HART® connection

(Type 3730-3 only)22 Binary input BE (optional)

38 Data Sheet T 8384-2/3 EN 2009-12

Table 1 · Technical data for Type 3730 Positioner

Common data for Type 3730-... Positioner

Travel, adjustable Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator: 3.6 to 30 mmAttachment acc. to IEC 60 534-6-1: 3.6 to 200 mmAttachment to rotary actuators: 24° to 100° opening angle

Travel range Adjustable Within the initialized travel/opening angle · Can be restricted to maximally 1/5

Referencevariable w

Signal range 4 to 20 mA · Two-wire device with reverse polarity protection · Minimum span 4 mA

Static destructionlimit 100 mA

Minimum current 3.6 mA for display · 3.8 mA for operation

Supply air Supply pressure 1.4 to 7 bar (20 to 105 psi)


Max. particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil content: Class 3Pressure dew point: Class 3 or at least 10 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected

Signal pressure (output) 0 bar up to the capacity of the supply pressure · Can be limited to 1.4 bar/2.4 bar/3.7 bar ± 0.2 barusing software

Characteristics Adjustable Linear/equal percentage/reverse equal percentageUser-defined (over operating software and communication)Butterfly valve, rotary plug valve and segmented ball valve: Linear/equal percentage

Deviation ≤ 1 %

Hysteresis ≤ 0.3 %


Transit time Up to 240 s separately adjustable for exhaust and supply air via software

Direction of action Reversible

Air consumption, steady-state Independent of supply air approx. 110 ln/h

Air outputcapacity

Actuator pressurized At Δp = 6 bar: 8.5 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 3.0 mn3/h · KVmax (20 °C) = 0.09


Permissible ambient temperature –20 to +80 °C · –45 to +80 °C with metal cable glandThe limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices.

Influences Temperature ≤ 0.15 %/10 K

Supply air None


Electromagnetic compatibility Complies with EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 requirements

Electrical connections One M20x1.5 cable gland for 6 to 12 mm clamping range · Second M20x1.5 threaded connectionadditionally available · Screw terminals for 0.2 to 2.5 mm² wire cross-sections


Use in safety instrumented systems incompliance with IEC 61508

Suitable for use in safety-relevant applications up to SIL 2 (single device) and SIL 3 (with redundantconfiguration), safety shutdown at a reference variable of 0 mA.


ATEX, IECEx, FM/CSA etc. See summary of explosion protection certificates

Binary contacts

Two software limit switches with reverse polarity protection, configurable switching behavior, default settings according to table below

Signal status Version Without explosion protection With explosion protection

No response Effectively non-conducting ≤ 1.2 mA

Response Conductive (R = 348 Ω) ≥ 2.1 mA

One fault alarm contact

Signal status Version Without explosion protection With explosion protection

No alarm Conductive (R = 348 Ω) ≥ 2.1 mA

Alarm Effectively non-conducting ≤ 1.2 mA

To be connected to Binary input of a PLC acc. to EN 61131,Pmax = 400 mWor for connection to NAMUR switching amplifieracc. to EN 60947-5-6

NAMUR switching amplifier acc. to EN 60947-5-6

Data Sheet T 8384-2/3 EN 2009-12 39

Materials

Housing Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi12(Fe) (EN AC-44300) acc. to DIN EN 1706 · Chromated and powderpaint coated · Special version in stainless steel 1.4581


Cable gland Polyamide, black, M20 x 1.5


Additional data for Type 3730-2

Load impedance Without explosion protection: ≤ 6 V(corresponds to 300 Ω at 20 mA)

With explosion protection: ≤ 7 V(corresponds to 350 Ω at 20 mA)

Communication (local) SAMSON SSP interface and serial interface adapter

Software requirements (SSP) TROVIS-VIEW with database module 3730-2

Additional data for Type 3730-3

Load impedance ≤ 8.2 V (corresponds to 410 Ω at 20 mA)

Communication (local) SAMSON SSP interface and serial interface adapter


Communication (HART®) HART® field communication protocolImpedance in HART® frequency range: Receiving 350 to 450 Ω · Sending approx. 115 Ω

Softwarerequirements(HART®)

Handheld communicator Device description for Type 3730-3

PC DTM file acc. to Specification 1.2, suitable for integrating the positioner into frame applications thatsupport the FDT/DTM concept (e.g. PACTware); other integration options (e.g. AMS, PDM) available

Table 1a · Options for Type 3730-2 and Type 3730-3 Positioners

Solenoid valve · Approval acc. to IEC 61508/SIL

Input 24 V DC · Electrical isolation and reverse polarity protection · Static destruction limit 40 V

Current consumption I =U 5.7 V−3840 Ω

(corresponds to 4.8 mA at 24 V/114 mW)

Signal “0” no pick-up ≤ 15 V

Signal “1” safe pick-up > 19 V

Service life > 5 x 106 switching cycles

Use in safety-related systems incompliance with IEC 61508/SIL Same as positioner pneumatics

Analog position transmitter Two-wire transmitter · Electrical isolation

Power supply 12 to 30 V DC · Reverse polarity protection · Static destruction limit 40 V

Output signal 4 to 20 mA


Operating range –10 to +114 %

Characteristic Linear

Hysteresis Same as positioner

High-frequency influence Same as positioner

Other influences Same as positioner

Fault alarm Issued as status current 2.4 ± 0.1mA or 21.6 ± 0.1mA

Inductive limit switch

SJ-2SN proximity switch For connection to switching amplifier acc. to EN 60947-5-6.Can be used in combination with a software limit switch.

External position sensor

Travel Same as Type 3730 Positioner

Cable 10 m · Flexible and durable · With M12x1 connector · Flame-retardant acc. to VDE 0472Resistant to oils, lubricants and coolants as well as other aggressive media

Permissible ambient temperature –60 to +105 °C · The limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply forexplosion-protected devices.

Immunity to vibration Up to 10 g in the range of 10 to 2000 Hz

Degree of protection IP 67

40 Data Sheet T 8384-2/3 EN 2009-12

Summary of explosion protection certificatesType of approval Certificate number Date Type of protection/Comments


EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 00 ATEX 2158 2001-03-01 II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6

First Addendum 2002-03-01 Position transmitter

Second Addendum 2004-02-16 II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C, Zone 21 dust, device index .01

Third Addendum 2007-08-24 Electrical data for forced venting altered

Fourth Addendum 2008-11-06 Electrical data, structure-borne sound sensor and binary input added

Statement of Conformity PTB 03 ATEX 2016 X 2003-03-07 II 3 G EEx nA II T6; Zone 2; Type 3730-28

First Addendum 2005-05-03 II 3 G EEx nL IIC T6; II 3 D IP 54/IP 65 T 80 °C

Second Addendum 2008-11-06 Electrical data, structure-borne sound sensor and binary input added

IECEx IECEx PTB 05.0007 2005-02-21 Ex ia IIC T6/T5/T4; IP 54 and IP 65 T 80 °C; Type 3730-21.9...

GOST approval B02637 2009-02-26 0 Ex ia IIC T6 X, valid until 2012-02-26; Type 3730-21

FM approval ID 3012394 2002-10-30 Intrinsically safe, Class I, II, III; Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, E, F, G;Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6;Non-incendive, Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D; NEMA Type 4;Type 3730-23

Revision 2004-02-04 Div. 2 Gr. F and G

CSA approval 1330129 2003-03-17 Ex ia IIC T6, Cl. I, Zone 0;Intrinsically safe, Class I, Group A, B, C, D;Class II, Group E, F, G;Non-incendive, Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D;Type 4 Enclosure; Type 3730-23

Revision to 1330129 1500997 2004-03-05 Class II, Div. 2, Group E, F, G

JIS approval C16679 2003-11-25 Ex ia IIC T6; Type 3730-27

KOSHA 2005-2359-Q1 2005-12-16 Ex ia IIC T6; valid until 2010-12-15; Type 3730-21

SIL 4 acc. to IEC 61508/SIL 3 acc. to IEC 61511

V 60 2007 C4 2008-01-07 Test report by TÜV Rheinland for Series 3730,valid until November 2012


EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 02 ATEX 2174 2002-11-15 II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6; without position transmitter

First Addendum 2003-06-18 Forced fail-safe venting function

Second Addendum 2004-02-16 II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C, Zone 21 dust, model index .01

Third Addendum 2007-09-10 Binary input. Electrical data for forced venting altered

IECEx IECEx PTB 05.0008 2005-02-21 Ex ia IIC T6/T5/T4; IP 54 and IP 65 T 80 °C; Type 3730-31.9...

GOST approval B00885 2008-01-15 0 Ex ia IIC T6 X; 2 Ex nA/nL; valid until 2011-01-15

NEPSI approval GYJ04133 2004-02-27 Ex ia IIC T4...T6; valid until 2007-02-27; Type 3730-31

GYJ04134 andGYJ04135

Ex nA II T4...T6; Ex nL IIC T4...T6Valid until 2007-02-27; Type 3730-38


First Addendum 2005-04-26 II 3 G EEx nL IIC T6; II 3 D IP 65 T 80 °C; Zone 22

Second Addendum 2007-09-10 Electrical data, structure-borne sound sensor and binary input added

Third Addendum 2008-12-10 Permissible ambient temperature range extended

Binary input · Electrical isolation · Switching behavior configured over software (e.g. TROVIS-VIEW, DTM)

Active switching behavior (default setting)

Connection For external switch (floating contact) or relay contact

Electrical data Open-circuit voltage when contact is open: 10 VPulsed DC current reaching peak value of 100 mA and RMS value of 0.01 mA when contact is closed

ContactClosed, R < 50 Ω “On” switching state (default setting)

Open, R > 400 Ω “Off” switching state (default setting)

Passive switching behavior

Connection For externally applied DC voltage, reverse polarity protection

Electrical data 3 to 30 V, destruction limit 40 V, current draw 3.7 mA at 24 V

Voltage> 6 V “On” switching state (default setting)

< 1 V “Off” switching state (default setting)

Data Sheet T 8384-2/3 EN 2009-12 41

Positioner attachmentThe Type 3730 Electropneumatic Positioner can be attacheddirectly to the Type 3277 Actuator over a connection block. Inactuators with fail-safe action “Actuator stem extends” andType 3277-5 Actuator (120 cm²), the signal pressure is routedover an internal bore in the actuator yoke to the actuator. Inactuators with fail-safe action “Actuator stem retracts” and inactuators with effective diaphragm areas of 240 cm² or larger,the signal pressure is routed to the actuator over ready-madeexternal piping.

Using a bracket, the positioner can also be attached accordingto IEC 60534-6-1 (NAMUR recommendation). The positionercan be mounted on any side of the control valve.A pair of universal brackets is used for the attachment toType 3278 Rotary Actuators or other rotary actuatorsaccording to VDI/VDE 3845. The rotary motion of the actuatoris transferred to the positioner over a coupling wheel.

Type of approval Certificate number Date Type of protection/Comments

EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 03 ATEX 2211 X 2003-10-22 II 2 G EEx d ia IIC T6;Type 3730-39 with Type 3770-1 Field Barrier

FM approvalModel index 01 and higher

3018702 2004-02-02 Intrinsically safe; Class I, II, III; Div. 1, Group A, B, C, D, E, F, G;Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6; NEMA Type 4Non incendive, Class I; Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D;Class II, Div. 2, Group F, G; Type 3730-33

CSA approvalModel index 01 and higher

1508990 2004-03-05 Ex ia IIC T6; Cl. I, Zone 0Intrinsically safe, Class I, Group A, B, C, D; Type 4 EnclosureClass II, Gr. E, F, G;Non-incendive, Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, DClass II, Div. 2, Gr. E, F, G; Type 3730-33

KOSHA 2005-2360-Q1 2005-12-16 Ex ia IIC T6; valid until 2010-12-15; Type 3730-31

SIL 4 acc. to IEC 61508/SIL 3 acc. to IEC 61511

V 60 2007 C4 2008-01-07 Test report by TÜV Rheinland for Series 3730,valid until November 2012

The test certificates are included in the mounting and operating instructions or are available on request.Refer to Data Sheet T 8379 EN for EEx d certificates for the Type 3770 Field Barrier.

Dimensions in mm

70

7028

Schil

d


40

34

210

86

164

2858

M 20x1.5


1480

Direct attachment

42 Data Sheet T 8384-2/3 EN 2009-12

Output A1

Output A2

Supply (9)

A1 Z

A2

50

495979

76

80

130

15164

50

58

150

Connecting plate

Reversing amplifier

5686

13080

166

3086

Ø 101

Output A1

Output A2

Supply (9)

A1 Z

A2

76

15164

50

Mounting unit for rotary actuatorsHeavy-duty version


Reversing amplifier

Connecting plate

70 1558

46

34

NAMUR attachmentPressure gauge bracket or connecting plateG ¼ or ¼ NPT


Attachment to rotary actuatorsVDI/VDE 3865Fixing level 2


Mounting unitCrNiMo steel bracket

Data Sheet T 8384-2/3 EN 2009-12 43

Ordering textType 3730-x... Positioner– Without pneumatic connecting rail (only for direct attachment

to Type 3277 Actuator)– With pneumatic connecting rail ISO 228/1-G ¼– With pneumatic connecting rail ¼-18 NPT– Without/with pressure gauge up to max. 6 bar– Additional cover plate with list of parameters and operating

instructions in English/Spanish or English/French (standardversion in German/English)

– Attachment to Type 3277 Actuator (120 to 700 cm²)– Attachment according to IEC 60534-6-1 (NAMUR)

Travel: ... mm; if applicable, stem diameter: ... mm

– Attachment to Type 3278 Rotary Actuator (160/320 cm²),mounting unit with CrNiMo steel bracket or heavy-duty at-tachment

– Attachment according to rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE3845, mounting unit with CrNiMo steel bracket orheavy-duty attachment

– Pneumatic reversing amplifier for double-acting actuatorswith connection acc. to ISO 228/1 - G ¼ or ¼-18 NPT

– Adapter M20 x 1.5 to ½ NPT– Metal cable gland– Special version with CrNiMo steel housing

Article code

Positioner Type 3730- x x x x x x 0 x x 0 x 0 0 x 0 x x

With LCD and autotune, 4 to 20 mA reference variable2 software limit switches, one fault alarm contact 2

With LCD and autotune, HART® communication, 4 to 20 mA,2 software limit switches, one fault alarm contact 3


Without 0

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 and

II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX 1

CSA/FM intrinsically safe/non incendive 3

II 3 G EEx nA/nL II T6 and II 3D IP 65 T 80 °C 8

Additional equipment


Without 0

Type SJ2-SN 1

Solenoid valve

Without 0

With, 24 V DC 4

Position transmitter

Without 0

With 1 0


Without 0

With 0 1 0

Binary input

Without 0

With 0 2

Diagnostics

EXPERTplus 4

Housing material

Aluminum (standard) 0

Stainless steel 1.4581 0 1

Special application

None 0

Device completely free of paint-impairing substances 1


Special version

None 0 0

IECEx 1 1 2

GOST approval Ex ia 1 1 4

GOST approval Ex nA/nL 8 2 0

44 Data Sheet T 8384-2/3 EN 2009-12

Series 3730

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-4with PROFIBUS-PA communication

ApplicationPositioner for attachment to pneumatic control valvesTravels 3.6 to 200 mm · Opening angle 24 to 100°Smart, bus-powered field unit conforming to PROFIBUS-PAspecification based on IEC 61158-2 transmission technology.

The microprocessor-controlled positioner compares the refer-ence variable cyclically transmitted over the PROFIBUS-PA net-work to the travel or opening angle of the control valve and pro-duces the corresponding output signal pressure.The Type 3730-4 Positioner communicates using PROFIBUS-PAspecification according to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784 to ex-change data with programmable logic controllers, automationsystems and various engineering tools.Other benefits provided by the smart positioner:• Automatic ID adaptation according to PROFIBUS-PA Profile

3.02 to faciliate replacement of positioners with Profile 2.0 or3.0 (e.g. Type 3785)

• DTM file available to integrate the positioner into FDT/DTMin compliance with specification 1.2

• Simple attachment to common linear with SAMSON directattachment interface (Fig. 1), over NAMUR rib (Fig. 2) or tocontrol valves with rod-type yokes according toIEC 60534-6-1 or to rotary actuators according toVDI/VDE 3845 (Fig. 3)

• Any desired mounting position• One-knob, menu-driven operation• Automatic initialization• LCD easy to read in any mounting position due to selectable

reading direction• Integrated EXPERT diagnostics (T 8388 EN)• Classified status alarms• Control parameters can be changed online• Automatic monitoring of zero point• Calibrated travel sensor without gears susceptible to wear• Permanent storage of all parameters in non-volatile EEPROM

(protection against power failure)• Temperature and supply air effects negligible• Adjustable output pressure limitation• Adjustable tight-closing function• Binary input for DC voltage signals• Certified according to IEC 61508/SIL

Additional options– Inductive limit switch with proximity switch– Integrated solenoid valve– Binary input for floating contact

– External position sensor (Fig. 4)– Extended EXPERT+ diagnostics (refer to T 8388 EN)– Stainless steel housing

Fig. 3 · Type 3730-4,attachment according toVDI/VDE 3845

Fig. 2 · Type 3730-4,attachment to NAMUR rib

Fig. 1 · Type 3730-4,direct attachment to Type3277 Pneumatic Actuator

Fig. 4 · Type 3730-4,external position sensor with Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve

Data Sheet T 8384-4 EN 2010-01 45

Principle of operationThe electropneumatic positioner is attached to pneumatic con-trol valves. It is used to assign the valve stem position (controlledvariable x) to the control signal (reference variable w). The inputsignal received from a control system is compared to the travelor angle of rotation of the control valve and an output signalpressure (output variable y) is produced.The positioner consists of an electric travel sensor system (2), ananalog i/p converter with a downstream booster and the elec-tronics unit with microcontroller (5).When a deviation occurs, the actuator is pressurized or vented.If required, the changes in the signal pressure can be sloweddown by a volume restriction. The signal pressure to the actua-tor can be limited by software to 1.4, 2.4 or 3.7 bar.A constant air stream to the atmosphere is created by the flowregulator (9) with a fixed set point. The air stream is used topurge the inside of the case as well as to optimize the air capac-ity booster. The i/p module (6) is supplied with a constant up-stream pressure by the pressure regulator (8) to make it inde-pendent of the supply air pressure.The positioner communicates and is powered using IEC61158-2 transmission technology conforming to PROFIBUS-PAspecifications.As a standard feature, the positioner comes with a binary inputfor DC voltage signals to signalize process information over thePROFIBUS-PA fieldbus.

OperationThe positioner is operated with a user-friendly rotarypushbutton. The parameters are selected by turning the knob,pushing it activates the required setting. In the menu, all param-eters are listed in one level, meaning there is no need to searchin submenus. All parameters can be checked and changed onsite.All values are displayed on the LCD. The reading direction ofthe LCD can be rotated by 180° at the push of a button.The closing direction of the control valve is indicated to thepositioner by the DIP switch "Air to open/Air to close". It as-signs the CLOSED position of the control valve to the 0 % read-ing.The INIT key activates initialization which is started according tothe (pre)set parameters (autotune). After initialization is com-pleted, the positioner immediately starts control operation.

Configuration with TROVIS-VIEW softwareThe SAMSON configuration software, TROVIS-VIEW, can beused to configure the positioner. For this purpose, the positioneris equipped with an additional digital interface to be connectedto the RS-232 interface of a PC. The positioner is adapted to theprocess requirements over TROVIS-VIEW. The process can bechecked while the process is running. The control valve is con-nected to the process over the PROFIBUS-PA fieldbus.

w

x

Q

%S

mm

GG

PD

SerialInterface

16

15 BE2

BE1

112

4

13

20

17 18

19

24V DC

5

3

12

6

7

8

10

1

14

9

xy

1 Control valve2 Travel sensor3 PD controller4 A/D converter5 Microcontroller6 i/p module7 Pneumatic booster8 Pressure regulator9 Flow regulator

10 Volume restriction11* Inductive limit switch12* Solenoid valve13 IEC 61158-2

interface module14 Binary input 1

(voltage input)15* Binary input 2 (for

floating contact)16 LCD17* Solenoid valve control18 Galvanic isolation19 D/A converter20 Serial interface (SSP)* Option

Fig. 5 · Functional diagram ofType 3730-4 Positioner

PROFIBUS-PAIEC 61158-2

46 Data Sheet T 8384-4 EN 2010-01


Type 3730-4 PROFIBUS-PA Positioner

Travel, adjustable Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator 3.6 to 30 mm

Attachment acc. to IEC 60 534-6-1: 3.6 to 200 mm

Attachment to rotary actuators (VDI/VDE 3845) 24 to 100° opening angle

Travel range adjustable Within the initialized travel/angle of rotation; restricted to 1/5 at the maximum

Bus connection Fieldbus interface conforming to IEC 61158-2, bus-poweredField device according to FISCO (Fieldbus Intrinsically Safe COncept)

Communication

Fieldbus Data transmission conforming to PROFIBUS-PA specification acc. to IEC 61158 and IEC 61784

DTM file acc. to specification 1.2, suitable for integrating the positioner into frame applications thatsupport the FDT/DTM concept. Other integrations, e.g. PDM also possible

Local SAMSON SSP interface and serial interface adapter

Software requirements TROVIS-VIEW with database module 3730-4

Permissible operating voltage 9 to 32 V DC · Powered over bus lineThe limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices.

Maximum operating current 15 mA

Additional current in case of fault 0 mA

Supply air Supply pressureAir quality

1.4 to 7 bar (20 to 105 psi)Acc. to ISO 8573-1 (2001):Max. particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil content: Class 3Pressure dew point: Class 3 or at least 10 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected

Signal pressure (output) 0 bar up to the capacity of the supply pressure

Characteristics Linear/equal percentage/reverse equal percentage · User-defined (over operating software andcommunication) · Butterfly valve, rotary plug valve and segmented ball valve: Linear/equal percentageDeviation from terminal-based conformity ≤ 1 %




Air consumption Independent of supply air approx. 110 ln/h

Air outputcapacity

Actuator pressurized At Δp = 6 bar: 8.5 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 3.0 mn3/h · KVmax (20 °C) = 0.09


Permissible ambient temperature –45 to +80 °CThe limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices.


Supply air None



Electrical connections One M20x1.5 cable gland for 6 to 12 mm clamping range · Second M20x1.5 threaded connectionadditionally exists · Screw terminals for 0.2 to 2.5 mm² wire cross-sections


Implementation in safety-related systemsin compliance with IEC 61508/SIL

Probability of failure on demand of safety functions PFD < 2.8 x 10–7 for a confidence level of 95 %.The safe failure fraction (SFF) according to Table A1 in IEC 61508-2 is greater or equal to 0.99.Suitable for implementation in safety-related systems with a hardware fault tolerance of 1 or 2 up toand including SIL 4.

Binary input 1

Input 0 to 30 V DC · Reverse polarity protection · Static destruction limit 40 V/5.8 mACurrent consumption 3.5 mA at 24 V, electrically isolated

Signal Signal “1“ at Ue > 5 V Signal “0“ at Ue < 3 V

Data Sheet T 8384-4 EN 2010-01 47

Type 3730-4 PROFIBUS-PA Positioner

Materials

Housing Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi12 (Fe) (EN AC-44300) acc. to DIN EN 1706Chromated and powder paint coated · Special version in stainless steel 1.4581


Cable gland Nickel-plated brass, M20 x 1.5


Options for Type 3730-4

Binary input 2 for floating contact

Switching input R < 100 Ω · Contact load 100 mA · Static destruction limit 20 V/5.8 mA · Galvanically isolated


Input 24 V DC · Reverse polarity protection · Static destruction limit 40 V


(corresponds to 4.8 mA at 24 V/114 mW)

Signal Signal “0” no pick-up ≤ 15 V Signal “1” safe pick-up > 19 V


Implementation in safety-related systemsin compliance with IEC 61508/SIL Same as positioner pneumatics


SJ-2SN proximity switch For connection to switching amplifier acc. to EN 60947-5-6



Cable 10 m · Flexible and durable · With M12x1 connector · Flame-retardant acc. to VDE 0472Resistant to oils, lubricants and coolants as well as other aggressive media

Permissible ambient temperature –60 to +105 °C · The limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply forexplosion-protected devices.






II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C; Zone 21; Type 3730-41

Statement of Conformity PTB 05 ATEX 2010 X 2005-02-16 II 3 G EEx nA/nL IIC T6; Zone 2


IECEx IECEx PTB 60.0054 2006-11-02 Ex ia IIC T6

FM approval 3023605 2005-10-31 Intrinsically safe; Class I, II, II; Div. 1, Groups A-GClass I, Zone 0, AEx ia IICNon incendive; Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, DClass II, Div. 2, Groups F, G, Type 4XType 3730-43

CSA approval 1675787 2006-01-31 Ex ia IIC T6; Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G;Type 4 EnclosureEx nA IIC T6; Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D;Class II, Groups E, F, G; Type 4 EnclosureType 3730-43

NEPSI approval GYJ06173 2006-01-24 Ex ia IIC T6; valid until 2011-01-23; Type 3730-41

GYJ06174 2006-01-24 Ex nA II T6; Ex nL IIC T6; valid until 2011-01-23Type 3730-48

GOST approval B 02637 2009-02-26 0 Ex ia IIC T6 X

48 Data Sheet T 8384-4 EN 2010-01

Output A1

Output A2

Supply (9)

A1 Z

A2

50

495979

76

80

130

15164

50

58

150

Reversing amplifier

40

34

210

86

164

2858

M 20x1.5


1480

70 1558

46

34



Attachment acc. toIEC 60534 and NAMUR

Direct attachment

Dimensions in mm

Connecting plate



Data Sheet T 8384-4 EN 2010-01 49

Article code

Positioner Type 3730-4 x x x 0 x 0 x x 1 x 0 0 x 0 x x

With LCD and autotune, PROFIBUS-PA


Without 0



II 3 G EEx nA II T6 acc. to ATEX 8



Without 0

1 x Type SJ2-SN 1

Solenoid valve

Without 0

With, 24 V DC 4


Without 0

With 0 0 1 0 0

Binary input

Without 0

Floating contact 0 1

Diagnostics

EXPERT (standard) 1

EXPERT+ (extended diagnostics) 2

Housing material



Special application

Without 0

Device free of any substances that might impair paint adhesion 1

Exhaust air connection with ¼-18 NPT thread 0 0 0 0 2

Special version

None 0 0 0

NEPSI Ex ia 1 0 0 9

NEPSI Ex nL/nA 8 0 1 0

IECEx 1 0 1 2

GOST approval 1 0 1 4

50 Data Sheet T 8384-4 EN 2010-01

Power supply and bus connectionThe Type 3730-4 PROFIBUS-PA Positioner must be connectedto bus segments complying with IEC 61158-2 requirements. Ashielded two-wire line is used for both supply power and datacommunication.

Positioner attachmentThe Type 3730-4 PROFIBUS-PA Positioner can be attached di-rectly to the Type 3277 Actuator over a connection block. In ac-tuators with fail-safe action “Actuator stem extends” andType 3277-5 Actuator (120 cm²), the signal pressure is routedover an internal bore in the actuator yoke to the actuator. In ac-tuators with fail-safe action “Actuator stem retracts” and in ac-tuators with effective diaphragm areas of 240 cm² or larger, thesignal pressure is routed to the actuator over a ready-made ex-ternal piping. Using the appropriate bracket, the positioner canalso be attached according to IEC 60534-6-1 (NAMUR recom-mendation). The positioner can be mounted on any side of thecontrol valve.A pair of universal brackets is used for the attachment toType 3278 Rotary Actuators or other rotary actuators accord-ing to VDI/VDE 3845. The rotary motion of the actuator istransferred over a coupling wheel to the positioner.The characteristic is set in the software.A reversing amplifier is required for double-acting, springlessactuators for the second opposing signal pressure.

Ordering textType 3730-4 PROFIBUS-PA Positioner– SAMSON direct attachment– Attachment according to IEC 60534-6-1 (NAMUR)– Attachment to rotary actuators– Without/with pressure gauge up to max. 6 bar– Explosion protection– Limit switch– Solenoid valve– Binary input for floating contact– Extended EXPERT+ diagnostics


Data Sheet T 8384-4 EN 2010-01 51

Series 3730

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-5with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication

ApplicationPositioner for attachment to pneumatic control valvesTravel: 3.6 to 200 mm · Opening angle: 24° to 100°Smart, bus-powered field unit conforming to FOUNDATION™

fieldbus specification based on IEC 61158-2 transmissiontechnology. Integrated Function Blocks: PID Process Controller, AOAnalog Output, 2 DI Discrete Inputs, and Link Master Capability.

The microprocessor-controlled positioner compares the refer-ence variable cyclically transmitted over the FOUNDATION™

fieldbus network to the travel or opening angle of the control valveand issues a corresponding output signal pressure.The Type 3730-5 Positioner communicates according toFOUNDATION™ fieldbus specification with field devices, pro-grammable logic controllers and process control systems.An integrated PID Function Block allows the control of processvariables required directly in the field. The shift to distributedcontrol reduces the number of control tasks to be performed bythe higher-level automation system. Thanks to the Link MasterCapability, autonomous closed control loops can be set up inthe field.Other benefits provided by the smart positioner:• Easy attachment to common linear actuators over SAMSON

direct attachment interface (Fig. 1), over NAMUR rib (Fig. 2)or to control valves with rod-type yokes according toIEC 60534-6 or to rotary actuators according toVDI/VDE 3845 (Fig. 3)

• Any desired mounting position• Simple one-knob, menu-driven operation• Variable, automatic start-up with four different initialization

modes• LCD easy to read in any mounting position due to selectable

reading direction• Integrated EXPERT diagnostics (see T 8388 EN)• Classified status alarms• Control parameters can be changed online• Configurable at a computer over the SSP serial interface

using TROVIS-VIEW software• Automatic monitoring of zero point• Two DI Blocks to analyze binary input signals• Calibrated travel sensor without gears susceptible to wear• Permanent storage of all parameters in non-volatile EEPROM

(protection against power failure)• Adjustable output pressure limitation• Adjustable tight-closing function• Binary input for DC voltage signals• Certified according to IEC 61508/SIL

Additional options– Inductive limit switch with proximity switch

– Integrated solenoid valve– Binary input for floating contact– External position sensor (Fig. 4)– Integrated EXPERT+ extended diagnostics (T 8388 EN)– Stainless steel housing

Fig. 1 · Type 3730-5,direct attachment toType 3277 PneumaticActuator

Fig. 2 · Type 3730-5,attachment acc. toNAMUR

Fig. 3 · Type 3730-5,attachment acc. toVDI/VDE 3845

Fig. 4 · Type 3730-4,with external position sensor

Data Sheet T 8384-5 EN 2010-01 53

Principle of operationThe electropneumatic positioner is attached to pneumatic con-trol valves. It is used to assign the valve stem position (controlledvariable x) to the control signal (reference variable w). The inputsignal received from a control system is compared to the travelor rotational angle of the control valve, and a pneumatic signalpressure (output variable y) is produced.The positioner consists of a travel sensor system proportional toresistance, an analog i/p converter with a downstream boosterand the electronics unit with microcontroller.When a deviation occurs, the actuator is pressurized or vented.If required, the changes in the signal pressure can be sloweddown by a connectable Q restriction. The signal pressure sup-plied to the actuator can be limited by software or on site to 1.4,2.4 or 3.7 bar.A constant air stream to the atmosphere is created by the flowregulator (9) with a fixed set point. The air stream is used topurge the inside of the case as well as to optimize the air capac-ity booster. The i/p module (6) is supplied with a constant up-stream pressure by the pressure regulator (8) to make it inde-pendent of the supply air pressure.The positioner communicates and is powered usingIEC 61158-2 transmission technology conforming toFOUNDATION™ fieldbus specification.As a standard feature, the positioner comes with a binary inputused to signalize process information over the FOUNDATION™

fieldbus network.

OperationThe positioner is operated with a user-friendly rotarypushbutton. The parameters are selected by turning the knob,pushing it activates the required setting. In the menu, all param-eters are listed in one level, meaning there is no need to searchin submenus. All parameters can be checked and changed onsite.All values are displayed on the LCD. The reading direction ofthe LCD can be rotated by 180° at the push of a button.The closing direction of the control valve is indicated to thepositioner by the DIP switch "Air to open/Air to close". It as-signs the CLOSED position of the control valve to the 0 %reading.The INIT key activates initialization which is started according tothe (pre)set parameters. After initialization is completed, thepositioner immediately starts control operation.

Configuration with TROVIS-VIEWThe SAMSON configuration software, TROVIS-VIEW, can beused to configure the positioner. For this purpose, the positioneris equipped with an additional digital interface to be connectedto the RS-232 interface of a PC. TROVIS-VIEW adapts thepositioner to any process requirements and allows the processto be checked online. The control valve is linked to the processover the FOUNDATION™ fieldbus network.The PID Function Block integrated in the positioner can likewisebe configured using TROVIS-VIEW. The configuration of thenetwork connections for the PID Function Block is made usingthe NI-FBUS Configurator or a corresponding digital processcontrol system.

w

x

Q

%S

mm

GG

PD

SerialInterface

16

15 BE2

BE1

112

4

13

20

17 18

19

24V DC

5

3

12

6

7

8

10

1

14

9

xy

1 Control valve2 Travel sensor3 PD controller4 A/D converter5 Microcontroller6 i/p module7 Pneumatic booster8 Pressure regulator9 Flow regulator

10 Q restriction11* Inductive limit switch12* Solenoid valve13 IEC 61158-2

Interface module14 Binary input 1

(voltage input)15* Binary input 2 (for

floating contact)16 LCD17* Solenoid valve control18 Galvanic isolation for

solenoid valve control19 D/A converter20 Serial interface (SSP)* Option


FOUNDATION™

fieldbus

IEC 61158-2

54 Data Sheet T 8384-5 EN 2010-01

Table 1 · Technical data for Type 3730-5 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus Positioner

Rated travel adjustable Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator 3.6 to 30 mm

Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR) 3.6 to 200 mm



Bus connection Fieldbus interface as per IEC 61158-2, bus-poweredPhysical Layer Class 113 (without explosion protection)

111 (explosion-protected version)Field device acc. to FM 3610 entity, FISCO and FNICO

Communication

Fieldbus Data transmission conforming to FOUNDATION™ fieldbus specification,Communication Profile Class: 31 PS, 32 L;Interoperability tested acc. to Interoperability System IST Rev. 4.6

Software requirements (local) SAMSON SSP interface and serial interface adapter

TROVIS-VIEW with database module 3730-5

Permissible operating voltage 9 to 32 V DC · Power over bus lineThe limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices.


Additional current in case of error 0 mA

Supply air Supply airAir quality

1.4 to 7 bar (20 to 105 psi)Acc. to ISO 8573-1 (2001): Max. particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil content: Class 3Pressure dew point: Class 3 or at least 10 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected

Signal pressure (output) 0 bar up to capacity of the supply pressure

Characteristics Linear/equal percentage/reverse equal percentage · User-defined (over operating software andcommunication) ⋅Butterfly valve linear/equal percentage · Rotary plug valve linear/equal percentage· Segmented ball valve linear/equal percentageDeviation from characteristic ≤ 1 %




Air consumption Independent of supply air <110 ln/h

Air output capacity Actuatorpressurized

At Δp = 6 bar: 8.5 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 3.0 mn

3/h · KVmax(20 °C) = 0.09

Actuatorvented

At Δp = 6 bar: 14.0 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 4.5 mn

3/h · KVmax(20 °C) = 0.15

Perm. ambient temperature –45 to +80 °CThe limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices.


Supply air None


Electrical connections One M20x1.5 cable gland for 6 to 12 mm clamping range · Second M20x1.5 threaded connectionadditionally exists · Screw terminals for 0.2 to 2.5 mm² wire cross-sections

Electromagnetic compatibility Conforming to requirements in EN 61000-6-2, 61000-6-3 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21


Implementation in safety-relevant systemsin compliance with IEC 61508/SIL

Probability of failure on demand of safety functions PFD < 2.8 x 10–7 for a confidence level of 95 %.The safe failure fraction (SFF) according to Table A1 in IEC 61508-2 is greater or equal to 0.99.Suitable for implementation in safety-relevant systems with a hardware fault tolerance of 1 or 2 upto and including SIL 4.

Binary input 1

Input 0 to 30 V DC with reverse polarity protection · Static destruction limit 40 VCurrent consumption 3.5 mA at 24 V, galvanically isolated

Signal Signal “1” at Ue > 5 V Signal “0“ at Ue < 3 V

Materials

Housing Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi12(Fe) (EN AC-44300) acc. to DIN EN 1706Chromated and powder paint coated · Special version in stainless steel 1.4581


Cable gland Nickel-plated brass, M20 x 1.5



Binary input 2 for floating contact

Switching input R < 100 Ω · Contact load 100 mA · Static destruction limit 20 V / 5.8 mA · Galvanically isolated

Data Sheet T 8384-5 EN 2010-01 55

Network and positioner configuration with NI-FBUS™configuratorThe positioner can also be configured over the NI-FBUS™configurator from National Instruments.The NI-FBUS™ configurator can be used to perform the plan-ning of the FOUNDATION™ fieldbus network. It also allows theuse of PID Controller to allow the implementation of an independ-ent control in the field.

Electrical and bus connectionThe Type 3730-5 Positioner with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

communicationmust be connected to bus segments conforming toIEC 61158-2. A shielded two-wire line is used for both supplypower and data communication.

Positioner attachmentThe Type 3730-5 Positioner with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus com-munication can be attached directly to the Type 3277 Actuatorwith a connection block. In actuators with fail-safe action “Actua-tor stem extends” and Type 3277-5 Actuator (120 cm²), the signalpressure is transmitted over an internal bore in the actuatoryoke to the actuator. In actuators with fail-safe action “Actuatorstem retracts” and in actuators with effective diaphragm areasof 240 cm² or larger, the signal pressure is transmitted to the ac-tuator over a ready-made external pipe connection.Using the appropriate bracket, the positioner can also be at-tached according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR recommendation).The positioner can be mounted on any side of the control valve.A pair of universal brackets is used for the attachment toType 3278 Rotary Actuators or other rotary actuators accord-ing to VDI/VDE 3845. The rotary motion of the actuator istransferred over a coupling wheel to the positioner. The charac-teristic is set over the software.A reversing amplifier is necessary for double-acting, springlessactuators for the second opposing signal pressure.


Input 24 V DC · Reverse polarity protection · Static destruction limit 40 V


(corresponding to 4.8 mA at 24 V/114 mW)

Signal Signal “0“ no pick-up ≤ 15 V Signal “1“ safe pick-up > 19 V


Implementation in safety-relevant systemsin compliance with IEC 61508/SIL Same as positioner pneumatics


Type SJ 2SN Proximity Switch For connection to switching amplifiers acc. to EN 60947-5-6



Cable Max. 10 m · Flexible and durable · With M12x1 connector · Flame-retardant acc. VDE 0472 ·Resistant to oils, lubricants, and coolants as well as other aggressive media

Permissible ambient temperature –60 to +105 °C







Statement of Conformity PTB 05 ATEX 2010 X 2005-02-16 II 3 G EEx nA/nL IIC T6; Zone 2


IECEx IECEx PTB 06.0054 2006-11-02 Ex ia IIC T6

FM approval 3023605 2005-10-31 Intrinsically safe; Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Groups A-G;Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6;Non incendive; Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D;Class II, III, Div. 2, Groups F, G;NEMA Type 4X; Type 3730-53

CSA approval 1675804 2006-01-30 Ex ia IIC T6; Class I, Zone 0;Class II, Div. I, Groups E, F, G; Type 4 EnclosureEx nA IIC T6; Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D;Class II, Groups E, F, G;Type 4 Enclosure; Type 3730-53

NEPSI approval GYJ06173 2006-01-24 Ex ia IIC T6; valid until 2011-01-23; Type 3730-51

GYJ06174 2006-01-24 Ex nA II T6; Ex nL IIC T6; valid until 2011-01-23Type 3730-58

GOST approval B02637 2009-02-26 0 Ex ia IIC T6 X; valid until 2012-02-26

56 Data Sheet T 8384-5 EN 2010-01

70 1558

46

34

Output A1

Output A2

Supply (9)

A1 Z

A2

50

495979

76

80

130

15164

50

58

150

Dimensions in mm

40

34

210

86

164

2858

M 20x1.5


1480

Direct attachment

NAMUR attachment


Reversing amplifier

Connecting plate




Data Sheet T 8384-5 EN 2010-01 57

Ordering textFOUNDATION™ fieldbus Positioner Type 3730-5– SAMSON direct attachment– Attachment according to NAMUR– Attachment to rotary actuator– Without/with pressure gauge up to max. 6 bar– Explosion protection– Limit switch– Solenoid valve– Binary input for floating contact– Extended EXPERT+ diagnostics Specifications subject to change without notice.

Article code

Positioner Type 3730- 5 x x x 0 x 0 x x 0 x 0 0 x 0 x x

With LCD and autotune, FOUNDATION™ fieldbus


Without 0


CSA/FM intrinsically safe/non incendive; Ex ia/Ex nA 3

II 3 G EEx nA II T6 / EEx nL IIC T6II 3 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX 8



Without 0

1 x Type SJ2-SN 1

Solenoid valve

Without 0

With, 24 V DC 4


Without 0

With 0 0 1 0 0

Binary input

Without 0

Floating contact 0 1

Diagnostics

EXPERT (standard) 1

EXPERT+ (extended diagnostics) 2

Housing material



Special application

Without 0

Device free of any substances that might impair paint adhesion 1

Exhaust air connection with ¼-18 NPT thread 0 0 0 0 2

Special version

None 0 0 0

NEPSI Ex ia 1 0 0 9

NEPSI Ex nL 8 0 1 0

IECEx 1 0 1 2

58 Data Sheet T 8384-5 EN 2010-01

Series 3731

Electropneumatic Ex d Positioner Type 3731-3with HART® communication

ApplicationSingle-acting or double-acting Ex d positioner for attachment topneumatic control valves. Self-calibrating, automaticadaptation to valve and actuator.Reference variable 4 to 20 mATravels 3.6 to 200 mmOpening angle 24 to 100°

The electropneumatic positioner is used to ensure a preselectedassignment between the valve stem position (controlled vari-able x) and the control signal (reference variable w). In this pro-cess, the output signal from a control device is compared to thetravel/opening angle of a control valve and an output signalpressure (output variable y) is issued.

Special features• Easy attachment to common linear and rotary actuators over

SAMSON direct attachment interface, NAMUR rib, or tocontrol valves with rod-type yokes acc. to IEC 60534-6-1 orto rotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845

• Any desired mounting position of the positioner• Simple one-knob, menu-driven operation also in hazardous

areas• LCD easy to read in any mounting position due to selectable

reading direction• Configurable with a PC over the SSP serial interface using the

TROVIS-VIEW software• Variable, automatic commissioning using four initialization

modes• Preset parameters, only values deviating from the standard

settings must be adjusted• Calibrated travel sensor without gears susceptible to wear• The "Sub" initialization mode (substitution) allows the

positioner to be started up in case of emergency whilst theplant is running without the valve moving through the wholetravel range

• Permanent storage of all parameters in non-volatile EEPROM• Two-wire system with small load of 450 Ω at 20 mA• Adjustable output pressure limitation• Adjustable tight-closing function• Constant monitoring of zero point• Temperature sensor and operating hours counter integrated• Self diagnostics; messages according to NAMUR Recom-

mendation NE 107 or optionally issued using an analog po-sition transmitter

• Integrated EXPERTplus diagnostics (see T 8388 EN), suitablefor valves for throttling and on/off service, with additionalpartial stroke test for valves in safety-related applications

• Certified according to IEC 61508/SILSafety shutdown at 0 mA or 3.85 mA

VersionsElectropneumatic positioner with LCD, operable on site, localcommunication over SSP interface, diagnostic functions– Type 3731-3 EXPERTplus · Positioner, communication us-

ing HART® protocol, diagnostic functions

Additional options– Binary contact, output acc. to NAMUR (EN 60947-5-6) or

directly to PLC, configurable as a limit switch or fault alarmoutput

– Binary input– Analog position transmitter with two-wire transmitter– Forced venting function (solenoid valve function)

Fig. 1 · Type 3731-3 Electropneumatic Ex d Positionerwith HART® communication

Data Sheet T 8387-3 EN 2010-01 59

Principle of operationThe electropneumatic positioner is attached to pneumatic con-trol valves. It is used to assign the valve stem position (controlledvariable x) to the input signal (reference variable w). The inputsignal received from a control system is compared to the travelor rotational angle of the control valve, and a pneumatic signalpressure (output variable y) is produced.The positioner consists of a travel sensor system (2) proportionalto resistance, an analog i/p converter with a downstreambooster and the electronics unit with microcontroller (5).When a deviation occurs, the actuator is pressurized or vented.The signal pressure to the actuator can be limited by software to1.4, 2.4 or 3.7 bar.A constant air stream to the atmosphere is created by the flowregulator (9) with a fixed set point. The air stream is used topurge the inside of the housing as well as to optimize the air ca-pacity booster. The i/p module (6) is supplied with a constantupstream pressure by the pressure regulator (8) to make it inde-pendent of the supply air pressure.

Operation also in hazardous areasThe rotary pushbutton and display are accessible without hav-ing to open the positioner housing. As result, the positioner isstill fully operable under hazardous area conditions.The positioner is operated with a user-friendly rotarypushbutton. The parameters are selected by turning the knob,pushing it activates the required setting. In the menu, all param-eters are listed in one level, meaning there is no need to searchin submenus. All parameters can be checked and changed onsite.All values are displayed on the LCD. The reading direction ofthe LCD can be rotated by 180° at the push of a button.The SAMSON configuration software, TROVIS-VIEW, can beused to configure the positioner. For this purpose, the positioneris equipped with an additional digital interface to be connectedto the RS-232 interface of a PC.All the parameters can be accessed over HART® communica-tion.

%

Smm

%mm

w

x

G

PD

SerialInterface

16

22

20

13

23

2

4

21

17

FSK

5 19

3

6

7

8 1

w

9

xy

Fig. 2 · Functional diagram of Type 3731-3 Ex d Positioner

Legend1 Control valve2 Travel sensor3 PD controller4 A/D converter5 Microcontroller6 i/p module7 Air capacity booster8 Pressure regulator9 Flow regulator

13 Analog position transmitter(optional)

16 LCD17 Control for forced venting

function (optional)19 DA converter20 Interface (SSP)21 HART® connection22 Rotary pushbutton23 Binary output (optional)

Ex d enclosure

60 Data Sheet T 8387-3 EN 2010-01



Rated travel, adjustable Direct attachment to Type 3277: 3.6 to 30 mmAttachment according to IEC 60534-6-1: 3.6 to 200 mmAttachment to rotary actuators: 24 to 100° opening angle


Referencevariable w

Signal range 4 to 20 mA · Two-wire device, polarity insensitive · Minimum span 4 mA

Static destruct. limit 40 V · Internal current limit 60 mA

Use in safety-instrumented systems incompliance with IEC 61508

Suitable for use in safety-relevant applications up to SIL 2 (single device) and SIL 3(with redundant configuration).Type 3731-3xxxxxx0..: Safety shutdown at a reference variable of 0 mAType 3731-3xxxxxx1..: Safety shutdown at a reference variable ≤ 3.85 mA

Minimum current 3.6 mA for LCD · 3.8 mA for operationLoad impedance ≤ 9 V corresponding to 450 Ω at 20 mA

Communication

Local communication SAMSON SSP interface and serial interface adapter


HART® communication HART® Field Communication protocolImpedance in HART® frequency range: Receiving approx. 455 Ω, sending approx. 185 Ω

Softwarerequirements(HART®)

For handheldterminal Device Description for Type 3731-3

For PCDTM file certified according to specification 1.2, suitable for integrating the device into frame applicationsthat support the use of FDT/DTM (e.g. PACTware);Integration into AMS™ Suite possible

Supply air Supply pressure 1.4 to 6 bar (20 to 90 psi)


Max. particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil content: Class 3Pressure dew point: Class 3 or at least 10 K below the lowest expected ambient temperature

Signal pressure (output) 0 bar up to capacity of supply pressure ·Can be limited by software to 1.4 bar/2.4 bar/3.7 bar ± 0.2 bar

Characteristics Linear/equal percentage/reverse equal percentageButterfly valve, rotary plug valve or segmented ball valve: Linear/equal percentageUser-defined: Set in the operating software

Deviation ≤ 1 %



Transit time Supply air and exhaust air adjustable separately over software by up to 240 sec.


Air consumption, steady-state Independent of supply air 110 ln/h

Air outputcapacity

Actuator pressurized At Δp = 6 bar: 8.5 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 3.0 mn3/h · KVmax(20 °C) = 0.09

Actuator vented At Δp = 6 bar: 14.0 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 4.5 mn3/h · KVmax(20 °C) = 0.15

Permissible ambient temperature –40 to +80 °CThe limits specified in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply.


Supply air None



Electrical connections Two threaded connections ½ NPT or optionally M20 x 1.5, screw terminals for 2.5 mm² wirecross-section



ATEX: II 2 G EEx d IIC T6, T5 or T4/ EEx de IIC T6, T5 or T4 / II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °CFM/CSA: XP/I/1/BCD/T4...T6; XP/I/1/IIB + H2/T4...T6; Type 4X/IP 66

Materials

Enclosure Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi10Mg (Fe) (EN AC-43400) acc. to DIN 1706Chromated and powder paint coated

External parts Stainless steel 1.4301/1.4305/1.4310


Data Sheet T 8387-3 EN 2010-01 61

Optional binary output Software limit switch or fault alarm output galvanically isolated,optionally NAMUR EN 60947-5-6 or PLC

Switching state Terminals B-CSwitching output AC/DC (PLC)

Terminals A-B

Conducting / residual voltage < 1.7 V Non-conducting / ≥ 2.1 mA

Non-conducting / high resistance, I < 100 μA Conducting / ≤ 1.2 mA

Operating voltage Switching capacity: 40 V DC / 28 V AC / 0.3 AStatic destruction limit: 45 V DC / 32 V AC / 0.4 A

Only for connection to NAMUR switching amplifiersacc. to EN 60947-5-6

Optional binary input Galvanically isolated · Switching behavior configurable

Active switching behavior

Connection For external switch (floating contact)

Electrical data Open-circuit voltage when contact is open: max. 10 VPulsed DC current reaching peak value of 100 mA

ContactClosed “On” switching state

Open “Off” switching state

Passive switching behavior

Connection For externally applied DC voltage, reverse polarity protection

Electrical data 0 to 24 V, destruction limit 40 V, input resistance 6.5 kΩ

Voltage> 6 V “On” switching state

< 4 V “Off” switching state

Optional forced venting Galvanically isolated

Input 0 to 40 V DC / 0 to 28 V AC, static destruction limit 45 V DC / 32 V AC, input resistance ≥ 7 kΩ

Signal Fail-safe position with input voltage ≤ 3 V Normal operation with input voltage > 5.5 V

Optional analog position transmitter Two-wire transmitter

Auxiliary power 11 to 35 V DC, reverse polarity protection, static destruction limit 45 V DC

Output signal 4 to 20 mA


Working range –1.25 to 103 % of the travel range, corresponding to 3.8 to 20.5 mAoptionally also for fault alarm indication over 2.4 or 21.6 mA acc. to NAMUR Recommendation NE 43

Characteristic Linear

Hysteresis and HF influence Same as the positioner

Other influencing variables Same as the positioner



EC Type ExaminationCertificate

PTB 05 ATEX 1058 2005-07-19 II 2 G EEx d IIC T6II 2 G EEx de IIC T6II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C

IECEx PTB 06.0041 2006-05-10 Ex d IIC T4-T6; II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C; Type 3731-321

FM approval 3024956 2006-01-30 XP/I/1/BCD/T4 Ta=80 °C, T5 Ta=70 °C, Ta=60 °C; Type 4X/IP 66XP/I/1/IIB+H2/T4 Ta=80 °C, T5 Ta=70 °C, T6 Ta=60 °C; Type 4X/IP 66DIP/II, III/1/EFG/T4 Ta=80 °C, T5 Ta=70 °C, T6 Ta=60 °C; Type 4X/IP 66Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, DClass II and III, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F, GClass I, Zone 1, IIB + H2; Type 4X/IP 66

CSA approval 1709815 2005-10-04 Class 2258-02:Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D, T6...T4Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G; Class IIIClass I, Zone 1, Group IIB+H2, T6...T4; Type 4X/IP 66

NEPSI approval GYJ06172 2006-01-24 Ex d IIC T4-T6/Ex de IIC T4-T6; valid until 2011-01-23

GOST approval B02563 2008-12-04 1 Ex d IIC T4/T6

JIS approval TC17747 2006-09-12 Ex d IIC T6; Type 3731-327, valid until Sept. 2012

62 Data Sheet T 8387-3 EN 2010-01

14

122

95

28

Output Supply

58

236

34

53

70

15

46

34

58

A1 Z

A2

5686

13080

166

3086

Ø 101

76

50

¼ NPT

Dimensions in mm

Direct attachment


Pressure gauge or connection platebracket (only for G ¼)¼ NPT or G ¼


Attachment torotary actuators

Output A1 Supply (9)

Reversing Output A2amplifier¼ NPT or G ¼

2 x female thread½ NPT or M20 x 1.5

Data Sheet T 8387-3 EN 2010-01 63

Positioner attachmentThe Type 3731-3 Positioner can be attached directly to theType 3277 Actuator, to control valves with cast yokes orrod-type yokes according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR) or to ro-tary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845.The mounting parts and accessories necessary are listed in theMounting and Operating Instructions EB 8387-3 EN.

Direct attachmentThe positioner can be attached directly to the Type 3277 Actua-tor with a connection block. In actuators with fail-safe action“Actuator stem extends” and Type 3277-5 Actuator (120 cm²),the signal pressure is transmitted over an internal bore in the ac-tuator yoke to the actuator. In actuators with fail-safe action“Actuator stem retracts” and in actuators with effective dia-phragm areas of 240 cm² or larger, the signal pressure is trans-mitted to the actuator over a ready-made external pipe connec-tion.

Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMURUsing the appropriate bracket, the positioner can also be at-tached to the yoke of control valves according to IEC 60534-6(NAMUR recommendation). The positioner can be mounted onany side of the control valve.

Attachment to rotary actuatorsThe positioner is fitted with an adapter housing and spacers toattach it to rotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845.Another common mounting kit suitable for SAMSONType 3278 Rotary Actuator and VETEC Types S160 and R Actu-ators is available.

Ordering textPositioner Type 3731-3...– With pneumatic connecting rail ISO 228/1-G ¼– With/without pressure gauge for signal pressure indication– Attachment to Type 3277 Actuator (120 to 700 cm²)– Attachment according to IEC 60534-6-1 (NAMUR)

travel: ... mm, stem diameter: ... mm, if applicable– Attachment to Type 3278 Rotary Actuator (160 cm²)– Attachment to rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845– Reversing amplifier for double-acting actuators with

connection acc. to ISO 228/1 - G ¼ or ¼-18 NPT


Article code

Positioner Type 3731- 3 x x x x x x x 0 0 x 1 x 0 0 0

4 … 20 mA, HART® communication, LCD, autotune


II 2 G EEx d IIC T6/EEx de IIC T6/II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX 2 1

Ex d acc. to FM/CSA 2 3

Ex d acc. to JIS/Japan 2 7

Options

Without 0 0

Position transmitter 0 1

Binrary input 0 3

Forced venting 0 5

Binary output (NAMUR/PLC) 0 6

Diagnostics

EXPERTplus 4

Electrical threaded connections

2x M20 x 1.5 1

2x ½ NPT 2

Shutdown behavior

Safety shutdown at 0 mA 0

Safety shutdown at 3.85 mA 1

Explosion-protection certificates

Same as specified under Explosion protection 0

NEPSI/China 2 1 1

IECEx 2 1 2

GOST/Russia 2 1 3


None 0

Device compatible with paint (IP 41/NEMA 1) 1

Special version

None 0 0 0

64 Data Sheet T 8387-3 EN 2010-01

Series 3731

Electropneumatic Ex d Positioner Type 3731-5with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication

ApplicationPositioner for attachment to pneumatic control valvesTravel: 3.6 to 200 mm · Opening angle: 24° to 100°Smart, bus-powered field unit conforming to FOUNDATION™

fieldbus specification based on IEC 61158-2 transmissiontechnology. Integrated Function Blocks: PID Process Controller,AO Analog Output, one binary input for DC voltage signals(DI1) or for connection of one floating contact (DI2).

The positioner is used to ensure a preselected assignment be-tween the valve stem position (controlled variable x) and thecontrol signal (reference variable w). It compares the referencevariable cyclically transmitted over the FOUNDATION™

fieldbus network to the travel or opening angle of the controlvalve and produces the corresponding signal pressure output(output variable y).The Type 3731-5 Positioner communicates according toFOUNDATION™ fieldbus specification with field devices, pro-grammable logic controllers and process control systems.An integrated PID Function Block allows the control of requiredprocess variables directly in the field. The shift to distributedcontrol reduces the number of control tasks to be performed bythe higher-level automation system.Other benefits provided by the smart positioner:• Easy attachment to common linear actuators over SAMSON

direct attachment interface, over NAMUR rib or to controlvalves with rod-type yokes according to IEC 60534-6-1 torotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845

• Any desired mounting position• Simple one-knob, menu-driven operation also in hazardous

areas• Variable, automatic commissioning using four initialization

modes• LCD easy to read in any mounting position due to selectable

reading direction• Monitoring and diagnostics functions• Extended diagnostics and partial stroke test in EXPERT+ ver-

sion. Refer to Data Sheet T 8388 EN for more details.• Control parameters can be changed online• Automatic monitoring of zero point• Two DI Blocks for analysis of binary input signals• Calibrated travel sensor without gears susceptible to wear• Permanent storage of all parameters in non-volatile EEPROM

(protection against power failure)• Adjustable output pressure limitation• Adjustable tight-closing function• Configurable with a PC over the SSP serial interface using the

TROVIS-VIEW softwareAdditional optionsThe digital positioner functions can be optionally extended:– Binary input– Forced venting

Fig. 1 · Type 3731-5 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus Positioner

JIS

Data Sheet T 8387-5 EN 2010-01 65

Principle of operationThe electropneumatic positioner is attached to pneumatic con-trol valves. It is used to assign the valve stem position (controlledvariable x) to the input signal (reference variable w). The inputsignal received from a control system is compared to the travelor rotational angle of the control valve, and a pneumatic signalpressure (output variable y) is produced.The positioner consists of a travel sensor system proportional toresistance, an analog i/p converter with a downstream boosterand the electronics unit with microcontroller.When a deviation occurs, the actuator is filled with more air orvented. The signal pressure to the actuator can be limited bysoftware to 1.4, 2.4 or 3.7 bar.A constant air stream to the atmosphere is created by the flowregulator (9) with a fixed set point. The air stream is used topurge the inside of the housing as well as to optimize the air ca-pacity booster. The i/p module (6) is supplied with a constantupstream pressure by the pressure regulator (8) to make it inde-pendent of the supply air pressure.The positioner communicates and is powered via IEC 61158-2transmission technology conforming to FOUNDATION™ fieldbus

specification.

OperationThe positioner is operated with a user-friendly rotarypushbutton. The parameters are selected by turning the knob,pushing it activates the required setting. In the menu, all param-eters are listed in one level, meaning there is no need to searchin submenus. All parameters can be checked and changed onsite.All values are displayed on the LCD. The reading direction ofthe LCD can be rotated by 180° at the push of a button.The closing direction of the control valve is indicated to thepositioner. It assigns the CLOSED position of the control valve tothe 0 % reading.The initialization is started according to the (pre)set parameters.After initialization is completed, the positioner immediatelystarts control operation.

Configuration with TROVIS-VIEWThe SAMSON configuration software, TROVIS-VIEW, can beused to configure the positioner. For this purpose, the positioneris equipped with an additional digital interface to be connectedto the RS-232 serial interface of a PC. TROVIS-VIEW adapts thepositioner to any process requirements and allows the processto be checked online. The control valve is linked to the processover the FOUNDATION™ fieldbus network.The PID Function Block integrated in the positioner can likewisebe configured using TROVIS-VIEW. The Function Blocks arelinked by the NI-FBUS Configurator or a corresponding processcontrol system.

%

Smm

%mm

w

x

G

PD

SerialInterface

16

22

20 23

2

4

17

5 19

3

6

7

8 1

9

x

y

FOUNDATION™

fieldbus

IEC 61158-2Legend1 Control valve2 Travel sensor3 PD controller4 IEC 61158-2

interface module5 Microcontroller6 i/p module7 Air capacity booster8 Pressure regulator9 Flow regulator

16 LCD17 Forced venting function

(optional)19 DA converter20 Serial interface (SSP)22 Rotary pushbutton23 Binary input (optional)


66 Data Sheet T 8387-5 EN 2010-01


Type 3731-5 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus Positioner

Rated travel adjustable Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator 3.6 to 30 mm

Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR) 3.6 to 200 mm


Travel range adjustable Within the initialized travel/angle of rotation · Restricted to 1/5 at the maximum

Bus connection Fieldbus interface as per IEC 61158-2, bus-poweredPhysical Layer Class 113 (without explosion protection)

111 (explosion-protected version)Field device acc. to FM 3610 entity and FISCO

Communication

Local communication SAMSON SSP interface and serial interface adapter


Fieldbus communication Data transmission conforming to FOUNDATION™ fieldbus specification,Communication Profile Class: 31 PS, 32 L;Interoperability tested acc. to Interoperability System IST Rev. 4.6

Permissible operating voltage 9 to 32 V DC · Power over bus lineThe limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices.


Additional current in case of error 0 mA

Supply air Supply airAir quality

1.4 to 6 bar (20 to 90 psi)Acc. to ISO 8573-1: 2004Particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil content: Class 3 · Humidity and water: Class 3Pressure dew point at least 10 K below the lowest expected ambient temperature

Signal pressure (output) 0 bar up to capacity of supply pressure

Characteristics Linear/equal percentage/reverse equal percentage · User-defined (over operating software andcommunication) · Butterfly valve linear/equal percentage · Rotary plug valve linear/equalpercentage · Segmented ball valve linear/equal percentageDeviation from characteristic ≤ 1 %




Air consumption Independent of supply air <110 ln/h

Air outputcapacity

Actuator pressurized At Δp = 6 bar: 8.5 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 3.0 mn3/h · KVmax(20 °C) = 0.09

Actuator vented At Δp = 6 bar:14.0 mn3/h · At Δp = 1.4 bar: 4.5 mn3/h · KVmax(20 °C) = 0.15

Permissible ambient temperature –40 to +80 °CThe limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices.


Supply air None


Electromagnetic compatibility Conforming to requirements in EN 61 000-6-2, 61 000-6-3 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21

Electrical connections Two threaded connections ½ NPT or optionally M20 x 1.5, screw terminals for 2.5 mm² wirecross-section


Materials

Housing Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi10Mg (Fe) (EN AC-43400) acc. to DIN 1706Chromated and powder paint coated

External metal parts Stainless steel 1.4571 and 1.4301


Data Sheet T 8387-5 EN 2010-01 67

Network and positioner configuration with NI-FBUSTM

configuratorThe positioner can also be configured over the NI-FBUSTM

configurator from National Instruments.The NI-FBUSTM configurator can be used to perform the plan-ning of the FOUNDATION™ fieldbus network. It also allows theuse of PID Controller to allow the implementation of an inde-pendent control in the field.

Electrical and bus connectionThe Type 3731-5 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus Positioner must beconnected to bus segments conforming to IEC 61158-2. Ashielded two-wire line is used for both supply power and datacommunication.

Positioner attachmentThe Type 3731-5 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus Positioner can beattached directly to the Type 3277 Actuator with a connectionblock. In actuators with fail-safe action “Actuator stem extends”and Type 3277-5 Actuator (120 cm²), the signal pressure istransmitted over an internal bore in the actuator yoke to the ac-tuator. In actuators with fail-safe action “Actuator stem retracts”and in actuators with effective diaphragm areas of 240 cm² orlarger, the signal pressure is transmitted to the actuator over aready-made external pipe connection.Using the appropriate bracket, the positioner can also be at-tached according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR recommendation).The positioner can be mounted on any side of the control valve.A pair of universal brackets is used for the attachment toType 3278 Rotary Actuators or other rotary actuators accord-ing to VDI/VDE 3845. The rotary motion of the actuator istransferred over a coupling wheel to the positioner. The charac-teristic is set over the software.


Binary input, galvanically isolated

Connection Terminals A-BVoltage input 0 to 30 V DC, reverse polarityprotection

Terminals B-Cfor external floating contact

Input Current consumption: 3.5 mA at 24 V R < 100 Ω; contact load: 100 mA

Static destruction limit: 40 V Static destruction limit: 20 V / 5.8 mA

Signal “1” when Ue > 5 VSignal “0” when Ue < 3 V

Forced venting, galvanically isolated

Input 0 to 40 V DC / 0 to 28 V AC, static destruction level 45 V DC / 32 V AC, input resistance ≥ 7 kΩ

Signal Fail-safe position with an input voltage ≤ 3 V · Normal operation at an input voltage > 5.5 V

Explosion protection certificates


EC Type ExaminationCertificate

PTB 05 ATEX 1058 2005-07-19 II 2 G EEx d IIC T6II 2 G EEx de IIC T6

First Addendum 2006-07-21 II 2 D IP 66 T 80 °C

FM approval 3024956 2006-01-30 XP/I/1/BCD/T4 Ta=80 °C, T5 Ta=70 °C, T6 Ta=60 °C; Type 4X/IP 66XP/I/1/IIB+H2/T4 Ta=80 °C, T5 Ta=70 °C, T6 Ta=60 °C; Type 4X/IP 66DIP/II, III/1/EFG/T4 Ta=80 °C, T5 Ta=70 °C, T6 Ta=60 °C; Type 4X/IP 66Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, DClass II and III, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F, GClass I, Zone 1, IIB+H2; Type 4X/IP 66

CSA approval 1709815 2005-10-04 Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D, T6...T4Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G; Class IIIClass I, Zone 1, Group IIB+H2, T6...T4; Type 4X/IP 66

IECEx approval IECEx PTB 06.0041 2006-05-10 Ex d IIC IP 65 T 80 °C

JIS approval TC17747 2006-09-12 Ex d IIC T6

GOST approval B02637 2009-02-26 1 Ex d IIC T6

68 Data Sheet T 8387-5 EN 2010-01

14

122

95

28

Output Supply

58

236

34

53

2 x female thread½ NPT or M20 x 1.5

¼ NPT

Dimensions in mm

Direct attachment

70

15

46

34

58


Pressure gauge or connection platebracket (only for G¼)¼ NPT or G ¼


A1 Z

A2

5686

13080

166

3086

Ø 101

76

50

Attachment torotary actuators

Output A1 Supply (9)

Reversing Output A2amplifier¼ NPT or G ¼

Data Sheet T 8387-5 EN 2010-01 69

Ordering textFOUNDATION™ fieldbus Positioner Type 3731-5...– With pneumatic connecting rail ISO 228/1-G ¼– With/without pressure gauge for signal pressure indication– Attachment to Type 3277 Actuator (120 to 700 cm²)– Attachment according to IEC 60534-6-1 (NAMUR)

travel: ... mm, stem diameter: ... mm, if applicable– Attachment to Type 3278 Rotary Actuator (160 cm²)– Attachment to rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845– Reversing amplifier for double-acting actuators with

connection acc. to ISO 228/1 - G ¼ or ¼-18 NPT


Article code

Positioner Type 3731- 5 x x x x x x 0 0 0 x 1 x 0 0 0

With LC display, autotune, FOUNDATION™ fieldbus


II 2 G EEx d IIC T6/EEx de IIC T6/II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX 2 1

Ex d acc. to FM/CSA 2 3

Ex d acc. to JIS 2 7

Options

Without 0 0

Binary input 0 3

Forced venting 0 5

Diagnostics

EXPERT 1

EXPERT+ 2

Electrical threaded connections

2x M20 x 1.5 1

2x ½ NPT 2

Explosion protection approvals

As specified in Explosion protection 0

IECEx 2 1 2

GOST approval 2 1 3


Without 0

Positioner compatible with paint (IP 41/NEMA 1) 1

Special version

None 0 0 0

70 Data Sheet T 8387-5 EN 2010-01

Series 3730 and Series 3731

EXPERTplus Valve Diagnostics with Partial Stroke Test (PST)

ApplicationPositioner firmware for early detection of control valve faultsgiving maintenance recommendations. Valid for firmwareversion V 1.51 and higher

The EXPERTplus valve diagnostics can detect faults and providepredictive, status-oriented maintenance of pneumatic controlvalves. The full scope of diagnostic functions is completely inte-grated into the positioner. The numerous diagnostic functionsallow faults to be pinpointed in control and safety-relatedon/off valves at an early stage. Functions include, for example,partial stroke testing and data logging.The TROVIS-VIEW software, which allows the user to access,read and edit the diagnosis, is easy to learn. The integration op-tions including eDD, eEDD, FDT/DTM allow the diagnosticfunctions to be also used in other engineering tools. Classifiedstatus alarms and the condensed state conforming to theNAMUR Recommendation NE 107 can also be read off at theon-site display of the positioner and can be issued over the faultalarm contact*.

TROVIS-VIEW: Operator interface to configure andparameterize various SAMSON devicesFDT: Field device tool for the manufacturer-independentintegration of field devicesDTM: Device type manager to describe the device andcommunication propertiesDD/eDD: Device description/enhanced device description

Special features• Diagnostic tests performed without any additional sensors in

the control valve• Data required for diagnostics are constantly compiled, saved

and analyzed in the positioner. Status alarms are automati-cally generated. Test data and their analysis are saved in thepositioner.

• Cyclical polling of test data, multiplexer-capable• Statistical information (in-service monitoring) and tests

(out-of-service diagnostics) pinpoint critical states beforemalfunctions can affect the process, allowing the user to planpredictive maintenance and service work on control andon/off valves

• Minimum and maximum temperature readings with detailson how long the limits have been exceeded

• Automatic start of diagnostic functions• Display of service and maintenance recommendations• Display of classified status and fault alarms

• Status classification and condensed state based on NAMURRecommendation NE 107

• Status alarms and condensed state can also be read off at thepositioner display or can be issued over the fault alarm con-tact*

• Plotting of y-x signature (valve signature) for fault detection• Diagnostic function to pinpoint changes in friction• Operating hours counter allows data and events to be sorted

by time• Diagnosis data and test analysis saved in the positioner• Integrated partial stroke testing (PST) and full stroke testing

(FST)• Binary input, e.g. to start tests, connect an external solenoid

valve or a leakage sensor, etc.

Fig. 1 · Type 3241-1 Control Valve and Type 3730-3Positioner with HART® communication

Fig. 2 · Flameproof Type 3731 Electropneumatic Positioner

Data Sheet T 8389 EN 2008-08 71

Summary of diagnostic functionsThere are two main groups of diagnostic functions available:

Statistical information (in-service monitoring)Data are compiled, saved and analyzed by the positioner whilethe process is running without disrupting the process. Thepositioner follows the reference variable during this time. Aclassified status alarm or fault alarm is generated if thepositioner detects an event.

Tests (out-of-service diagnostics)Similar to the statistical information function, data are com-piled, saved and analyzed by the positioner. However, in thiscase, the valve position is not determined by the reference vari-able, but the active test. The tests (PST, FST) can only be startedwhen the conditions in the plant allow it (e.g. plant shutdown orservice work in the workshop). For reasons of safety, these tests,except for partial stroke testing, can only be performed in theMAN operating mode.Table 1 shows the individual diagnostic functions with their testanalyses.

Application type: Control valve or on/off valveThe EXPERTplus valve diagnostics is used in combination withpneumatic control valves. The positioner works using the appli-cation types, control valve or on/off valve. Both applicationtypes allow positioner to run in both AUTO or MAN operatingmodes.The table shows the correlation between the application typeand operating mode:

Control valve On/off valve

AUTOmode

The positioner followscontinuously thereference variable.The valve position(current position)appears in % on thedisplay.

Discrete analysis of thereference variable.The valve position(current position) in %and O/C (Open/Close)appear in alternatingsequence on the display.

MANmode

The positioner follows the reference variable givenover local operation or over acyclic communication.

The discrete analysis of the reference variable with the applica-tion type, on/off valve and in AUTO mode allows the valve tobe moved to the fail-safe position or a user-defined fixed value(e.g. 100 %) by entering the corresponding reference variable.In addition, the partial stroke test (PST) can be started byentering the corresponding reference variable w.

Fig. 3 · EXPERTplus valve diagnostics with TROVIS-VIEW3 Operator Interface

72 Data Sheet T 8389 EN 2008-08

Table 1 · Summary of EXPERTplus functions

Test function Seesection Description

Start-updiagnostics

1.1 Positioner self-test,mechanical attachment, valve travelrange, initialization time, opening andclosing times

Current processvariables

Operatingparameters

1.2.1

1.2.2

Process variables:Reference variable w, valve position x,drive signal y, setpoint deviation eOperating hours counter,number of zero calibrations andinitializations, temperature, total valvetravel, self-monitoring of positioner

Status alarms,classification

1.2.33.1

Display and logging ofclassified status alarms and condensedstate

Statistical information (in-service monitoring)

On/off 2.1.1 Breakaway time, transit time, valve endposition

Data logger 2.1.2 Recording and saving of referencevariable w, valve position x, drive sig-nal y, setpoint deviation e with trigger-ing function

Travel histogramx

2.1.3 Trend of the working range, workingrange

Setpointdeviationhistogram

2.1.4 Limit working range, inner leakage,connection positioner-valve, absolutevalue of max. setpoint deviation

Cycle counterhistogram

2.1.5 External leakage, dynamic stress factoracting on packing and metal bellows

Drive signaldiagramsteady-state

2.1.6 Supply pressureleakage in pneumatics

Drive signaldiagramhysteresis

2.1.7 Frictionexternal leakage

Trend of travelend position

2.1.8 Observing end position, zero pointshift

Tests (out-of-service diagnostics)

Drive signaldiagramsteady-state

2.2.1 Supply pressure; leakage inpneumatics; actuator springs

Drive signaldiagramhysteresis

2.2.2 Friction;external leakage

Staticcharacteristic

2.2.3 Dead band of control valve

Partial stroke test 2.3 Analysis of the dynamic control re-sponse: overshooting, dead time, T63,T98, rise time and settling time

Full stroke test 2.4 Overshooting, dead time, T98,rise time and settling time

Status alarms

Display andparameterizationover software

3 Graph display of all collected data andanalysis results

Option

Binary input 4 Logged actions for individual functionsand tests to be performed once

1 EXPERTplus valve diagnostics1.1 Start-up diagnosticsEXPERTplus monitors the control valve during automatic initial-ization to ensure trouble-free start-up. In addition, the openingand closing times are determined.The diagnosis also indicates faults concerning attachment andthe entire valve travel range as well as hardware, data memorydefects and the initialization time.

1.2 Process variables and operating parameters

1.2.1 Current process variablesEXPERTplus provides the key process variables collected by thepositioner (reference variable w, valve position x, drive sig-nal y, setpoint deviation e and temperature t) and analyzes thediagnostic data.

1.2.2 Key operating parameters/status alarmsTo evaluate the current condition of the control valve and sched-ule maintenance routines, EXPERTplus provides the user with astatus summary. The alarms for the operating parameters listedbelow are time-stamped:– Operating hours counter, distinction between positioner

switched on and positioner in closed-loop operation (sincethe first start-up and the last initialization routine)

– Number of zero calibrations performed– Number of initializations performed– Display of the current temperature as well as saving of the

maximum and minimum temperatures, including alarm func-tion when a limit is exceeded

– Total valve travel, including customizable limit

1.2.3 Direct detection of fault sourcesEXPERTplus generates fault alarms and status alarms allowingquick fault detection in case an error has occurred. The last30 alarms are logged in a FIFO (first in, first out) memory to-gether with the operating hour they were generated in.The following category of status alarms are available:– Status– Operational– Hardware– Initialization– Data memory– Temperature– Extended status alarms

Operational errors, for example:– Control loop error (excessive error, e.g. blocked actuator, in-

sufficient supply pressure etc.)– Zero point shift– Hardware– Data memory– Temperature– Initialization

Data Sheet T 8389 EN 2008-08 73

2 Diagnostic functions

2.1 Statistical information (in-servicemonitoring)

By permanently recording raw diagnostic data (w, x, y and e) inthe positioner, the user can gather information about how thecontrol valve behaves under process conditions.Signal logging enables an analysis of the current measuringscope as well as of the positioner’s entire service life.The following statements can be made, for example:

– Valve position range OK– Valve mainly operates in the upper or the lower end position– Dynamic stress factor

As a result, recommendations for predictive maintenance canbe given. In addition, immediately required action is reported.

2.1.1 On/off diagnosisThe on/off diagnosis provides statements on the valve end posi-tion, i.e. the actual travel range and changes in transit time andbreakaway times.The on/off diagnosis runs for on/off valves in AUTO mode inthe background. The monitoring does not need to be activated.While the plant is running, Breakaway time (rising/falling),Transit time (rising/falling) and Valve end position parametersare recorded. The first values recorded are used as a referencefor further tests.If the analysis detects an error, the positioner generates a corre-sponding alarm.

2.1.2 Data loggerThe variables reference variable w, valve position x, setpointdeviation e, drive signal y and the operating hours counter arerecorded and saved in a FIFO memory. The interval betweenthe individual measuring points can be defined by the user.Apart from permanent sampling, the data can also be collectedonline while the process is running, provided a certain triggercondition is met. The trigger condition can be defined by theuser as certain thresholds.

2.1.3 Travel histogramThe valve travel histogram is a statistical analysis of the plottedvalve positions. The histogram provides information aboutwhere the valve mainly spends the majority of its time during itsservice life and whether it shows a recent trend concerningchanges in its operating range.Data are recorded in the background regardless of the operat-ing mode selected. A short-term histogram and a long-term his-togram are plotted.The positioner generates an alarm if the analysis of the travelhistogram detects an error in “Shifting working range” or“Working range“.

2.1.4 Setpoint deviation histogramThe setpoint deviation histogram contains a statistical analysisof any setpoint deviations recorded. This provides a summary ofhow often and to which level a setpoint deviation has occurredduring the valve service life and whether it shows a recent trendconcerning the setpoint deviation. Ideally, the setpoint deviationshould be as small as possible.Data are recorded in the background regardless of the operat-ing mode selected.

Fig. 4 · Data logger

74 Data Sheet T 8389 EN 2008-08

A short-term histogram and a long-term histogram are plotted.The positioner generates an alarm if the histogram detects anerror in “Limiting working range“, “Inner leakage“ or “Connec-tion positioner/valve“.

2.1.5 Cycle counter histogramThe cycle counter histogram provides a statistical analysis of thecycles. As a result, the cycle counter also provides informationon the dynamic stress of a bellows seal and/or packing. A valvecycle starts at the point where the valve stroke changes directionuntil the point where it changes direction again. The valve strokebetween these two changes in direction is the cycle span.Data are recorded in the background regardless of the operat-ing mode selected. A short-term histogram and a long-term his-togram are plotted.If the analysis detects an error, the positioner generates a corre-sponding alarm.

2.1.6 Drive signal diagram steady-stateSteady-state drive signal diagram allows changes in the supplypressure or leakage in the pneumatics to be detected. If the sup-ply pressure is insufficient for the actuator to move through theentire bench range, this pinpoints to a fault in supply pressure orleakage in pneumatics. In this case, the positioner generates analarm.Data are recorded and analyzed in the background regardlessof the operating mode selected when a reference graph exists.A short-term monitoring listing the measured data and along-term monitoring in a graph are possible.If the analysis detects an error, the positioner generates a corre-sponding alarm.

2.1.7 Drive signal diagram - Hysteresis testThe hysteresis test allows changes in friction to be analyzed. Thepositioner generates an alarm when the results of the hysteresistest pinpoint to “Friction” or “External leakage”.If a reference graph exists, the hysteresis test can be started inboth AUTO or MAN operating modes. The test can be per-formed once or cyclically.A short-term monitoring listing measured data and a long-termmonitoring in a graph provide an analysis of the measureddata.If the analysis detects an error, the positioner generates a corre-sponding alarm.

2.1.8 Trend of travel end positionThis test serves to detect wear or dirt on the valve trim and is runautomatically while the process is running. The valve position isrecorded when the lower end position is reached and any chan-ges logged together with the drive signal y and a time stamp.The first measured value is used as a reference.Further measured values showing a greater deviation from thelast recorded value are logged.

Fig. 5 · Drive signal diagram steady-state

Data Sheet T 8389 EN 2008-08 75

2.2 Tests (out-of-service diagnostics)(2.2.1 to 2.2.3)

For reasons of safety, the tests (out-of-service diagnostics) canonly be started when the positioner is in the MAN operatingmode. The control valve moves through its working range aftera test starts. Therefore, it is important to make sure before start-ing a test whether the conditions (in the plant or process) allowthe valve to move.The tests provide a trend showing the current control valve state,any possible existing malfunctions and help to pinpoint faultsand to schedule predictive maintenance work.

2.2.1 Drive signal diagram steady-stateThe drive signal diagram steady-state allows you to check theresults of the steady-state drive signal diagram in Statistical in-formation (in-service monitoring) more closely.After starting the test, the valve moves to various fixed valve po-sitions x distributed over the working range of the valve. Thedrive signal y is measured for each valve position x and com-pared with the reference graph. The statements on the followingfaults can be made:

– Supply pressure– Leakage in the pneumatics– Actuator springs

If the analysis detects an error, the positioner generates a corre-sponding alarm.

2.2.2 Drive signal diagram hysteresisThis test allows you to check the results of the drive signal dia-gram (hysteresis test) in Statistical information (in-service moni-toring) more closely.After starting the test, the valve moves to various fixed valve po-sitions x distributed over the working range of the valve. Aftermoving to the valve position, a ramp movement changing thevalve travel is performed. The change in drive signal y is mea-sured for each valve position x and compared with the refer-ence data.If the analysis of the drive signal detects an error concerning thefriction or external leakage, the positioner generates acorresponding alarm.

2.2.3 Static characteristicThe static performance of the control valve is affected by the fric-tion hysteresis and the elastic processes in the valve stem pack-ing.The positioner specifies the reference variable w in a definedtest range (Start and End) in small steps and records the re-sponse of the valve position x after waiting a defined delaytime.An analysis of the control loop is possible from the recordingand detection of Min. dead band, Max. dead band and Aver-age dead band.

Fig. 6 · Drive signal diagram steady-state

76 Data Sheet T 8389 EN 2008-08

2.3 Partial stroke test (PST)In standard cases of application, a shut-off valve in a safetyloop is fitted with a solenoid valve for emergency shutdown andlimit switches for position feedback. Dedicated shut-off valvestypically remain static for months or years in normal operatingconditions.The use of a positioner with integrated partial stroke testing pro-vides an alternative. The positioner can be mounted on a valveto replace or supplement a solenoid valve.The partial stroke test function prevents the valve from becomingstuck, for example, due to corrosion or material disintegration.Recording the test results additionally allows an analysis of thedynamic control response. For this purpose, the valve is movedfrom a defined start value, e.g. operation point, either as stepresponse or as a ramp function to a defined point and thenmoved back to its original position.As a result, the probability of failure on demand (PFD) can bereduced and it may be possible to extend maintenance inter-vals.

Various cancelation conditions provide additional protectionagainst the valve slamming shut or moving past the end posi-tion:– The test is canceled when the maximum permissible test dura-

tion is exceeded.– x control value: The test is canceled when the value falls be-

low the adjusted valve position.– delta y-monitoring: The test is canceled when the drive signal

y falls below the predetermined comparison value.– The test is canceled as soon as the deviation of the valve posi-

tion exceeds the adjusted PST tolerance band.If a partial stroke test has not been completed, a classified statusalarm is generated directly reporting the partial stroke test at thepositioner display, the engineering tool used and over the faultalarm output*. This allows safety and test functions to bebrought together and partial stroke testing for safety-relatedon/off valves to be performed.

Fig. 7 · Partial stroke test

Data Sheet T 8389 EN 2008-08 77

2.4 Full stroke test (FST)The dynamic valve performance can be evaluated by perform-ing a full stroke test.The valve moves through its entire working range during a fullstroke test. The first step ends in the fail-safe position, meaningthe second step starts from the fail-safe position. The change intravel can be performed either in steps or in a ramp function.For the test in a ramp function, additionally the velocities for therising and falling ramps need to be defined. After being acti-vated, the test does not start until the settling time before test starthas elapsed. This waiting period ensures that the valve hasreached its start position.For reasons of safety, this test can only be started in the MANmode.The dynamic valve performance can be evaluated at the end ofthe full stroke test from the recorded test procedure. Any fullstroke test performed is marked to indicate whether the test wascompleted successfully or not.

3 Visualization and parameterization ofEXPERTplus diagnostics

The TROVIS-VIEW software or the DTM tool generate graphsfrom the data, test results and status alarms collected by the di-agnostic firmware in the positioner.In addition, the diagnostic data can also be made accessible toother engineering tools using the DD (device description) oreDD (enhanced DD), which enables the data to be displayed ina graph, e.g. using Siemens PDM. How the data are displayeddepends on the tool.

3.1 Classification and marking of status alarmsBased on NAMUR recommendation NE 107, the alarms(events) generated EXPERTplus are assigned a status (classi-fied). The following states can be assigned to an alarm (event):Condensed state

Status alarm TROVIS-VIEW3/DTM Positioner display

No message, O.K. green

Function check orangeText, e.g.

tESting, tunE, tESt

Maintenance required/Maintenance demanded blue

Out of specification yellow blinking

Maintenance alarm red

The condensed state is indicated on the positioner display andcan be read over the communication. Additionally, the conden-sed state can be issued over the fault alarm contact*.

3.2 Diagrams in TROVIS-VIEW, DTM, eDD(e.g. Siemens PDM)

The software with trend viewing function allows the variables(w, x, y, e) recorded by the data logger to be plotted over time.Similarly, the raw data and data collected in the various testsare plotted in graphs:

– Current process variables– y-x signature– Hysteresis test– Static characteristic– Step response– Valve end position trending– PST (x, w, e, y of the current test)– FST (x, w, e, y of the current test)

The long-term and short-term histograms described in section2.1.3 to 2.1.5 are displayed as bar graphs.A difference is made between long-term and short-term in they-x signature and the histograms.The plotted graphs visualize changes in control behavior andsupport predictive maintenance.

4 Binary inputThe optional binary input (Type 373x-2 Positioner and higher)allows various actions to be performed which also affect the di-agnostic functions. If an action is started over the binary input,this action is always logged.– Transfer switching state

The switching state of the binary input is logged.– Set local operation write protection

Settings cannot be changed at the positioner while the binaryinput is active.

– Start partial stroke test (PST)The positioner starts a single partial stroke test.

– Go to fail-safe reference valueAn on/off valve moves to the entered fail-safe referencevalue when the positioner is in automatic modeNo action is started when the positioner is in manual mode(MAN) or fail-safe position.No action is started for a control valve.

– Switch between AUTO/MANThe positioner changes from AUTO mode into MAN modeand vice versa.No action is started if the positioner is in the fail-safe position.

– Start data loggerThe data logger is started when the binary input is active.Data are logged according to the settings

– Start data loggerThe data logger is started when the binary input is active.Data are logged according to the settings

– External solenoid valve connectedThe triggering of an external solenoid valve is recognized.

– Leakage sensorThe “External leakage soon to be expected” error is set. Theerror is reset when the edge control is set to OFF. The alarmremains saved in the logging.

* Fault alarm contact of Type 3730-2 and Type 3730-3,option for Type 3731-3.

78 Data Sheet T 8389 EN 2008-08

TROVIS-VIEW provides a uniform user interface that allowsusers to configure and parameterize various SAMSON de-vices using device-specific database modules.Data are transmitted between the TROVIS-VIEW software andthe SAMSON device either directly (e.g. using a connectingcable or infrared adapter; also see Table 1) or indirectly usinga memory pen or memory module.

A direct connection enables both online and offline operation.This means that data can be changed in the device immedi-ately, or they can be saved on the PC first and later down-loaded to the device on site.

The device-specific modules contain a database that providesthe characteristic properties of each device type, such as pa-rameters, data points, user levels etc. The various user levelscan be protected with passwords.

The available modules are being extended constantly.

TROVIS-VIEW Software

TROVIS 6661

ApplicationUniform interface for configuration and operation of varioussmart SAMSON devices

Data Sheet T 6661 EN 2009-07 79

Learning to operate TROVIS-VIEW is easy, as it uses the lookand feel of Windows® Explorer. It includes features such as:• Tree structure• List view• Select• Context-sensitive menus by clicking the right mouse button• Open and save

Hardware requirementsA PC with the following minimum requirements is needed:• Pentium II processor or equivalent

(300 MHz or faster), 500 MHz recommended• RS-232 serial interface or USB/RS-232 adapter (USB Con-

verter 3 for TROVIS 5500 Series) and, depending on theSAMSON device used, the suitable hardware as specified inTable 1

• At least 96 MB RAM, 192 MB RAM recommended• At least. 150 MB of available hard disk space. Additionally,

15 to 20 MB of available hard disk space per SAMSONmodule

• SVGA graphics card (at least. 800 x 600)• CD-ROM drive

Software requirements• Operating system: Windows® 2000 (SP2 or higher),

Windows® XP, Windows® Vista• Microsoft® .NET Framework Version 2.0 or higher (included

on installation CD-ROM)• Web browser: Microsoft® Internet Explorer Version 6 or

higher

Scope of deliveryThe TROVIS-VIEW software and the device-specific modulesare delivered on a CD-ROM together with the associated on-line documentation.

Software updates can be downloaded from the “Support &Downloads” section of our website at http://www.samson.de.

Accessories (Figs. 1 to 3)• USB 1.1 serial adapter Order no. 8812-2001• USB Converter3 Order no. 1400-9377• Hardware package (memory pen, modular adapter,

connecting cable) Order no. 1400-7704• Memory pen Order no. 1400-7697• Memory pen – 64 Order no. 1400-9753• Memory module Order no. 1400-9379• Connecting cable RJ-12/D-Sub, 9-pole Order no. 1400-7699• Infrared adapter Order no. 8864-0900• Fixture for infrared adapter Order no. 1400-9769• USB cable (mini-B, USB type A) Order no. 8801-7301• Serial interface adapter Order no. 1400-7700• Isolated USB interface adapter Order no. 1400-9740• FSK modem– RS-232 EEx ia Order no. 8812-0129– RS-232 (not explosion protected) Order no. 8812-0130– PCMCIA (not explosion protected) Order no. 8812-0131– USB (not explosion protected) Order no. 8812-0132• USB dongle for EXPERT+ diagnostics Order no. 1400-9555

Ordering text

TROVIS-VIEW 6661-1��TROVIS 5431 Heating Controller 0 0 1TROVIS 5432 Heating Controller 0 0 2TROVIS 5433 Heating Controller 0 0 3TROVIS 5573 Heating Controller 0 1 4TROVIS 5575 Heating Controller 0 1 1TROVIS 5576 Heating Controller 0 1 2TROVIS 5579 Heating Controller 0 1 3TROVIS 6493 Compact Controller 0 3 1TROVIS 6495-2 Industrial Controller 0 3 3Type 3730-2 Positioner 0 5 1Type 3730-3 Positioner 0 5 6Type 3730-4 Positioner 0 5 7Type 3730-5 Positioner 0 5 8Type 3731-3 Positioner 0 6 3Type 3731-5 Positioner 0 6 5Type 3780 Positioner 0 5 2Type 3785 Positioner 0 5 3Type 3787 Positioner 0 5 4Type 3738-20 Electronic Limit Switch 0 6 8Type 3374 Electric Actuator with Positioner 0 5 5Type 5824 or 5825 Electric Actuatorwith Positioner

0 5 9

Type 5857 Electric Actuator with Positioner 0 6 1Type 5724 or 5725 Controller withElectric Actuator

0 6 0

Type 5725-7 Controller with Electric Actuator 0 6 7Type 5757 Controller with Electric Actuator 0 6 2Type 5757-7 Controller with Electric Actuator 0 6 6Media 6 (Type 5006) Differential Pressure Meter 0 8 1

USB 1.1 serial adapter (8812-2001)

USB RS-232

USB Converter 3 (1400-9377)

Memory pen (1400-7697) Memory pen – 64(1400-9753)

Fig. 1 · Accessories

80 Data Sheet T 6661 EN 2009-07

1 RJ-12 connector on SAMSON device4 COM port (RS-232) on PC*5 USB port on PC*6 Connecting cable7a Memory pen8 Modular adapter9 Memory module (TROVIS 5500 Series)

* Under Windows® 2000 and Windows® XP, the connectioncan be made either using the computer's COM port, theUSB 1.1 serial adapter or USB Converter 3 (Fig. 1).

84

7a

6

1

4

5

6

9 9

Fig. 2 · Data transmission examples

Type 5757Type 5757-7Type 5857

Media 6(Type 5006)

Type 3374

TROVIS 5433

TROVIS 5431

TROVIS 5575TROVIS 5576TROVIS 5579

Type 5724Type 5725Type 5725-7Type 5824Type 5825 TROVIS 5573

Data Sheet T 6661 EN 2009-07 81

* Under Windows® 2000 and Windows® XP, the connectioncan be made either using the computer's COM port, theUSB 1.1 serial adapter or USB Converter 3 (Fig. 1).

1

2

2

3

FSK

84

7b

6

5

13

5

4

4

4

4

10

11

12

12

14

5

Fig. 3 · Data transmission examples

TROVIS 6495-2

TROVIS 5432

Type 3780

Types 3730-2/-3/-4/-5Types 3731-3/-5Type 3785, Type 3787Type 3738-20

TROVIS 6493

1 RJ-12 connector on SAMSON device2 Infrared interface on SAMSON device3 USB interface on SAMSON device4 COM port (RS-232) on computer*5 USB port on computer*6 Connecting cable7b Memory pen – 648 Modular adapter10 Serial interface adapter11 FSK modem12 Infrared adapter13 USB cable (5-pin mini-B/USB type A)14 Isolated USB interface adapter

82 Data Sheet T 6661 EN 2009-07

Table 1 · Data transmission

Data transmission

Direct Indirect

Con

nect

ing

cabl

e

FSK

mod

em

Seria

lint

erfa

cead

apte

r

Infra

red

adap

ter

Isola

ted

USB

inte

rface

adap

ter

USB

Con

verte

r3

USB

cabl

e

Mem

ory

pen

Mem

ory

pen

–64

Mem

ory

mod

ule

Mod

ular

adap

ter

SAMSON devices Version (or higher)

Heating controllers

TROVIS 5431 1.00 • • • •

TROVIS 5432 1.00 •

TROVIS 5433 1.00 • • • •

TROVIS 5573 1.80 • •

TROVIS 5575 1.13 •* •

TROVIS 5576 1.00 •* •

TROVIS 5579 1.20 •* •

Compact controller

TROVIS 6493 2.03 or 3.03 •

TROVIS 6495-2 Industrial Controller

Without interface board

1.00

•

With interface board RS-232/USB • • • • •

With interface board RS-485/USB • •

Electropneumatic positioners

Type 3730-2 1.10 • •

Type 3730-3 with HART® communication 1.10 • •

Type 3730-4 with PROFIBUS-PA communication R 1.43, K 1.00 • •

Type 3730-5 with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication R 1.40, K 1.20 • •

Electropneumatic Ex d positioners

Type 3731-3 with HART® communication 1.30 • •

Type 3731-5 with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication R 1.45, K 1.00 • •

Positioners

Type 3780 with HART® communication K 2.11 •

Type 3785 with PROFIBUS-PA communicationPA device profile version 2.0PA device profile version 3.0

K 1.60 – K 1.99K 2.00 • •

Type 3787 with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication K 1.10 • •

Type 3738-20 Electronic Limit Switch 1.00 • •

Electric actuators with positioners

Type 3374 1.00 • • • •

Types 5824/5825 1.00 • • • •

Type 5857 1.00 • • • •

Controllers with electric actuators

Type 5757, Types 5724/5725 1.00 • • • •

Type 5757-7, Type 5725-7 1.00 • • • •

Digital transmitter

Media 6 (Type 5006) 2.00 • • • •

* Version 1.41 or higher for TROVIS 5575, 5576, 5579

Data Sheet T 6661 EN 2009-07 83

ApplicationSingle-acting or double-acting positioners for attachment topneumatic control valves. Supplied with a pneumatic inputsignal 0.2 to 1 bar or 3 to 15 psi (Type 3766) or an electricinput signal from 4(0) to 20 mA or 1 to 5 mA (Type 3767).Rated travels from 7.5 to 120 mm or opening angle up to 90°

The positioners ensure a fixed assignment between the valve stemposition (controlled variable x) and the pneumatic or electric in-put signal (reference variable w). They compare the input signalreceived from the control unit with the travel of the control valveand, issue the corresponding output signal pressure pst (outputvariable y). A reversing amplifier for double-acting actuatorsproduces two opposed signal pressures.

Special features• Arbitrary mounting position; suitable for normal or

split-range operation; excellent dynamic response; negligiblysmall influence of supply air; adjustable proportional band(P-band); adjustable air output capacity; low air supply con-sumption; very insensitive to mechanical vibrations;low-maintenance compact design

• Versions for hazardous areas in type of protection "IntrinsicSafety" II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 or II 3 G EEx nA II T6 forZone 2 (see "Summary of approvals")

• Type of protection "Flameproof Enclosure" EEx d withType 3766 Positioner and Type 6116 i/p Converter (Fig. 2)

• Special version with CrNiMo steel housing available• Direct attachment to Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Fig. 4)• Attachment to actuators according to IEC 60534-6 (Fig. 3)• Attachment to rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845 (Fig. 5)

Benefits of integral positioner attachment (Fig. 4)• Tight and exact mechanical connection between actuator and

positioner. No misalignment during shipping• Concealed linkage protected against touch and external in-

fluences to fulfill requirements of accident prevention regula-tions UVV (VBG 5)

• Simple pneumatic connection between actuator and positioner• Presetting of the unit: Actuator with positionerOptional pressure gauge for monitoring the input and outputsignal pressure (dial range from 0 to 6 bar and 0 to 90 psi).Refer to Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details on the selectionand application of positioners, converters, limit switches andsolenoid valves.

Versions– Type 3766 · Pneumatic positioner– Type 3767 · Electropneumatic positionerRefer to article code for details on possible configurations.

Pneumatic Positioner Type 3766

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3767

Fig. 1 · Type 3767 Electropneumatic Positioner

Fig. 5 · Attachment toType 3278 Rotary Actuator

Fig. 4 · Direct attachment toType 3241-7 ControlValve

Fig. 3 · Attachment acc. toIEC 60534(NAMUR)

Fig. 2 · Type 3766 Ex d Positioner withType 6116 i/p Converter

JIS

Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01 85

Principle of operation (Figs. 6 to 8)The only difference between the two positioners is an i/p con-verter unit (E) in the electropneumatic positioner. Bothpositioners function according to the force-balance principle.In the Type 3767 Electropneumatic Positioner, the control signal(i) flows through the plunger coil (E2) in the field of a permanentmagnet (E1). The force, proportional to the DC current i, is bal-anced against the force of the backpressure at the balancebeam (E3) which is created at the flapper plate (E7) by the jetstream leaving the nozzle (E6). Any changes in the signal causea proportional change in the pressure pe supplied to the pneu-matic control system.The pressure pe creates a force at the measuring diaphragm (5)which is compared to the force of the range spring (4). If thecontrol signal causes the pneumatic input pressure (pe) or theposition of the lever (1) to change, the diaphragm lever (3) func-tioning as a flapper plate varies the distance to the nozzle (2.1or 2.2). The position of the internal turnboard for the operatingdirection (7) determines which nozzle is effective.The pneumatic booster (10) and the pressure regulator (9) areprovided with supply air. The controlled supply flows againstthe diaphragm lever (3) over the Xp restriction (8) and the noz-zle (2.1 or 2.2). Any changes in the control signal or the posi-tion of the lever (1) cause a variation of pressure both upstreamand downstream of the booster (10). The output signal pressurepst issued by the booster flows over the volume restriction (11) tothe actuator and positions the valve to match the input signal.The travel is transmitted to the pick-up lever (1) via the pin (1.1)in globe valves. Whereas, in rotary valves (Fig. 8), a camfollower roll (20) is attached to the front end of the pick-up lever(1) which follows the rotary motion of a cam disk (22) on the ac-tuator shaft (21). The force of the range spring (4) is changed bythe linear motion of pick-up lever.The positioner must be fitted with a reversing amplifier for at-tachment to double-acting actuators, which generates two op-posed signal pressures (pst1 and pst2).The adjustable restrictions Xp (8) and Q (11) are used to opti-mize the control loop. Two adjusting screws (6.1 and 6.2) allowthe adaptation of the control valve to the signal pressure. ZEROand SPAN of the reference variable can be adjusted fordifferent operating modes, such as split-range operation.Operating direction: As the reference variable (pe) increases,the output signal pressure (pst) can either be increasing (direct>>) or decreasing (reverse <>). The operating direction is deter-mined by the position of the turnboard (7) and can be changedsubsequently.

2.1

4

2.2

3

5

1.2

6.1

6.2

1

PemAE10

E3E7E6E9E4E5E2E1 E

E8

1.1

V

Q

Xp

7 8 9 10 11 12

ep

Fig. 7 · Functional diagram of Type 3767 Positioner

2.1

4

2.2

3

5

1.2

6.1

6.2

1 1.1

V

Q

Xp

7 8 9 10 11 12

ep

Fig. 6 · Functional diagram of Type 3766 Positioner(deflection of pick-up lever in case of directattachment to Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator)

Travel

Operating direction

Control signal peSupply air

Output signalpressure pst

Fig. 8 · Transmission of rotary motion to the positioner

Legend for Figs. 6 to 81 Lever E i/p converter unit1.1 Pin E1 Permanent magnet1.2 Rotary shaft E2 Plunger coil2.1 Nozzle (>>) E3 Balance beam2.2 Nozzle (<>) E4 Universal joint3 Diaphragm lever (flapper) E5 Spring4 Range spring E6 Nozzle5 Measuring diaphragm E7 Flapper plate6.1 Adusting screw (SPAN) E8 Restriction6.2 Adusting screw (ZERO) E9 Damping7 Turnboard for op. direction E10 Protective diode8 Xp restriction (gain)9 Pressure regulator10 Booster 20 Cam follower roll11 Volume restriction Q 21 Actuator shaft12 Solenoid valve (optional) 22 Cam disk

Travel

Press. reg. Control signal peSupply air

Output signalpressure pst

Operating direction

86 Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01

Table 1 · Technical data · All pressures in bar (gauge)

Type 3766 and Type 3767 Positioners

Travel rangeDirect attachment to Type 3277 Actuator: 7.5 ... 30 mmAttachment acc. to IEC 60534 (NAMUR): 7.5 ... 120 mm

Opening angle 70°, 75° or 90° depending on cam diskReference variablewType 3766

Signal range bar (psi) 0.2 ... 1 bar (3 ... 15 psi)Span bar (psi) 0.4 ... 0.8 bar (6 ... 12 psi)Overloadabe max. 2 bar (29 psi)

Reference variablewType 3767

Signal range Two-wire device, reverse polarity protection4(0) ... 20 mA 1 ... 5 mA

Span 8 ... 20 mA 2 ... 4 mAInternal resistance Ri at 20 °C 200 Ω 880 Ω

Supply air Supply air range 1.4 ... 6 bar (20 ... 90 psi)Air quality acc. toISO 8573-1 (2001-02)

Maximum particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil contents: Class 3; Pressure dew point:Class 3 or at least 10 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected

Output signal pressure pst Can be limited between 0 ... approx. 2.5 and 0 ... 6 bar (0 ... approx. 35 and 0 ... 90 psi)

Characteristic LinearDeviation from terminal-based conformity: ≤ 1 %

Hysteresis ≤ 0.3 %Sensitivity ≤ 0.1 %Operating direction ReversibleProportional band Xp 0.5 ... 2.5 % (proportional-action coefficient Kp: > 200 ... 40)Air consumption With air supply of 1.4 bar With air supply of 6 bar

Type 3766 ≤ 230 In/h ≤ 230 In/h 1)

Type 3767 ≤ 280 In/h ≤ 280 In/h 1)

Air delivery Actuator filled with air 3.0 mn3/h 8.5 mn3/hActuator vented 4.5 mn3/h 14.0 mn3/h

Permissibleambienttemperature 7)

Type 3766 Standard –20...80 °C: Optional limit switches/solenoid valve/position transmitterwith plastic cable gland

–40...80 °C: Optional limit switches/solenoid valve with metal cable glandLow temperature version –50...80 °C: Optional limit switches/solenoid valve with metal cable glandType 3767 Standard –20...80 °C: Optional limit switches/solenoid valve/position transmitter

with plastic cable gland–40...80 °C: Optional limit switches/solenoid valve with metal cable gland

Low temperature version –45...80 °C: Optional limit switches/solenoid valve with metal cable glandInfluence Temperature: ≤ 0.3 %/10 K · Supply air: ≤ 1 % between 1.4 ... 6 barElectromagnetic compatability Requirements specified in EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-3 are metVibrations No influence between 10 und 150 Hz and 4 gExplosion protection 2) Type of protection II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 or II 3 G EEx nA II T6 for Zone 2Degree of protection IP 54 (special version IP 65)Weight Approx. 1 kgAdditional equipmentLimit switches2 inductive proximity switches Type SJ 2-SNControl circuit Specifications corresponding to the connected transistor relayHysteresis at rated travel ≤ 1 %Solenoid valveInput Binary DC voltage signalNominal signal 6 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DCSignal “0” (off) 3) ≤ 1.2 V ≤ 2.4 V ≤ 4.7 VSignal “1” (on) 4) ≥ 5.4 V ≥ 9.6 V ≥ 18.0 VMaximum permissible signal 28 V 25 V 32 VInternal resistance Ri at 20 °C 2909 Ω 5832 Ω 11714 ΩAir consumption in steady state In addition to the positioner “Off” ≤ 60 ln/h · “On” ≤ 10 ln/h 1)

Closing time forrated travel andsignal pressurerange (KVS 0.14)

Type 3277 Actuator 120 cm² 240 cm² 350 cm² 700 cm²0.2 ... 1 bar ≤ 0.5 s ≤ 0.8 s ≤ 1.1 s ≤ 4 s0.4 ... 2 bar ≤ 0.5 s ≤ 2 s ≤ 2.5 s ≤ 8 s0.6 ... 3 bar 6) ≤ 1 s ≤ 1.5 s ≤ 5 s

Analog position transmitterOutput Two-wire device 4 ... 20 mAAuxiliary power Minimum terminal voltage: 12 V

maximum: 45 V

The position transmitter may only beconnected to a certified intrinsically safe

circuit 5)

1) With pressure regulator at minimum setting 2) Refer to Table 2 for explosion-protected version3) DC voltage signal at –25 °C 4) DC voltage signal at +80 °C5) e.g. over SAMSOMATIC 994-0103-KFD2-STC4-Ex1 Loop Isolator 6) Actuator 120 cm² for all signal pressure ranges: ≤ 0.5 s7) The limits specified in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply to explosion-protected devices.

Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01 87

Additional equipmentThe positioners can optionally be equipped with the followingadditional equipment.

Positioner with inductive proximity switches (Fig. 9)This positioner version has a rotary shaft (1.2) with two adjust-able metal tags (33) for inductively actuating the proximityswitches (34). The switches are continuously adjustable and canbe overridden.To operate them, corresponding transistor relays must be con-nected in the output circuit.The proximity switches can also be retrofitted.

Positioner with solenoid valve (Fig. 10)The positioners can be fitted with an intrinsically safe, pi-lot-operated solenoid valve also in combination with the induc-tive limit switches. When the positioner is equipped with this so-lenoid valve, the control valve can be moved to the fail-safe po-sition regardless of the positioner's output signal.The solenoid valve essentially consists of an electropneumaticconverter (12.1) and a 3/2-way solenoid valve (12.2). If a con-trol signal corresponding to the binary signal 0 (off) is appliedto the input, the nozzle (12.3) of the electropneumatic converteris opened, the signal pressure pst is blocked and air is ventedout of the actuator. The force of the compression springs in theactuator move the control valve to its fail-safe position.If a control signal corresponding to binary signal 1 (on) is ap-plied to the input, the relay coil (12.4) is energized, and theflapper plate (12.5) closes the nozzle (12.3). The increasingcascade pressure switches over the 3/2-way valve (12.2). Inthis switching position, the output signal pressure pst is appliedto the actuator. The control valve is in control operation.The solenoid valve can also be retrofitted.

Legend to Figs. 9 and 10

1.2 Rotary shaft 12.5 Flapper plate

12 Solenoid valve 12.6 Restriction

12.1 i/p converter

12.2 3/2-way valve 32 Adjusting screw

12.3 Nozzle 33 Metal tag

12.4 Relay coil 34 Proximity switch

Table 2 · Technical data for Type of Protection EEx ia IIC

i/p converter (Type 3767 only)Maximum values for For connection to certified intrinsically

safe circuitsU0 28 V 25 VI0 85 mA 100 mA 120 mAP 0.7 W 0.7 W 0.7 WInternal inductance and capacitance are negligibly small

Inductive proximity switchesMaximum values for For connection to certified intrinsically

safe circuitsU0 16 VI0 52 mA/25 mAP 169 mW/64 mWInternal inductance Li = 100 μHInternal capacitance Ci = 30 nF

Solenoid valveNominal signal 6 V 12 V 24 VMaximum values for For connection to certified intrinsically

safe circuitsU0 (V) 25 27 28 30 32I0 (mA) 150 125 115 100 90Internal inductance and capacitance are negligibly small

Analog position transmitterMaximum values for For connection to certified intrinsically

safe circuitsU0 28 VI0 115 mAP 1 WCi 5.3 nFInternal inductance negligibly small

Permissible ambient temperaturesSpecifications as stated in the EC Type Examination CertificatePTB 01 ATEX 2167 and the Statement of Conformity PTB 01 ATEX2170 X.

Fig. 9 · Inductive proximity switches

12.5

12.3

12.1

12.4+

–u[V]

12.6

12.2

Fig. 10 · Functional diagram of the solenoid valve

32 1.2 33 34

34

32

1.2

Switch B Switch AMetal tag for switch B

Metal tag forswitch A

Input

Auxiliary power

Venting intopositioner housing

Signal pressure toactuator

Signal pressure frompositioner

88 Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01

Positioner with analog position transmitterDue to the amount of space that the position transmitter re-quires, please note that this option cannot be combined withlimit switches or a solenoid valve!The position transmitter allows the position of the closure mem-ber of the valve (i.e., valve travel or opening angle) to be con-verted into a proportional output signal from 4 to 20 mA. Limitpositions such as “Valve open” or “Valve closed” are indicatedas well as all intermediate positions.

Attachment (Figs. 12 and 13)The positioner can be attached to linear actuators either directly(Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator) or according to IEC 60534(NAMUR) (Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator). Rotary actuatorswith an interface according to VDI/VDE 3845 require an inter-mediate piece to mount the positioner.

Arrangement of the positioner and the actuator (Fig. 11)How the positioner and actuator can be arranged depends onthe operating direction of the input signal (pe) and the outputsignal pressure (pst) as well as the fail-safe action of the actua-tor:“Actuator stem extends”“Actuator stem retracts”

Direct attachment to Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Fig. 4)This method of attachment provides the benefit of being aself-contained, preset actuator and positioner unit. A connec-tion block is required for direct attachment to actuators with240, 350 and 700 cm² effective diaphragm areas (Fig. 11).With an actuator with fail-safe action “Actuator stem extends”,the output signal pressure pst issued by the positioner is routedto the bottom diaphragm case over the connection block and ahole in the actuator yoke. In case the spring chamber needs befilled with the exhaust air from the positioner, the air can beconnected to the connection block using a ready-made pipe.With an actuator with fail-safe action “Actuator stem retracts”the output signal pressure pst issued by the positioner isconnected to the top diaphragm case over a ready-made pipe.The bottom diaphragm chamber (spring chamber) can be filledwith the exhaust air from the positioner without additional mea-sures over an internal hole.The signal pressure connection is located at the back of thepositioner for Type 3277-5 Pneumatic Actuator (120 cm² dia-phragm area), therefore eliminating the need for external pip-ing.

Fig. 11.3 · Operating direction <> Left attachment Fig. 11.4 · Operating direction >> Right attachment

Fig. 11 · Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator

Fig. 11.1 · Operating direction >> Left attachment Fig. 11.2 · Operating direction<> Right attachment

Fail-safe action: Actuator stem retracts

Fail-safe action: Actuator stem extends

Table 3 · Direct attachment: Assignment of travel and rangespring

Actuator size in cm² Travel in mm Range spring

120/240/350 7.5 2

120/240/350 15 1

700 15 2

700 30 1

The positioner is delivered with range spring 1. Range spring 2is included in the accessories.

Signal pressurepiping pst

Connection block

Connection block

Internal signalpressure connection

Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01 89

Attachment according to IEC 60534 (Figs. 3 and 12)The positioners can be attached to actuators with cast yokes(Fig. 3) (e.g. Series 240, 250 and 280) and valves withrod-type yokes (Fig. 12) using an adapter (15). A clampingplate (15.1) is additionally required for valves with rod-typeyokes.By selecting the appropriate lever (1) and link point on the lever(16), the positioners can be matched to different travels rangingfrom 7.5 to 120 mm.There is no prescribed mounting position for the positioner. Theoperating direction is determined by how the positioner and theadapter are arranged and how the internal turnboard is posi-tioned.Select the range spring according to Table 4.

Attachment to rotary actuators (Fig. 13)The positioners can be attached to the Type 3278 Rotary Actua-tor or any rotary actuators with an interface according toVDI/VDE 3845 over an intermediate piece (2). The rotary mo-tion of the actuator is converted into a linear motion required bythe positioner by the cam disk (7). A cam follower roll (3) is at-tached to the lever (5) of the positioner to trace the motion of thecam disk. Various cams disks are available depending on thecontrol valve characteristic required (e.g. linear or equal per-centage).Double-acting, springless actuators require additionally apneumatic reversing amplifier which produces two opposedsignal pressures.

Select the range spring as follows:Reference variable for split-range operation: Range spring 1Reference variable for normal signal range: Range spring 2The positioner is always delivered with range spring 1; rangespring 2 is included in the mounting kit for rotary actuators.

Table 4 · Assignment of travel and range springfor attachment according to IEC 60534

Travel mm Range spring

7.5 ≤ 15 2

> 15 ≤ 60 1

22 ≤ 120 1

The positioner is delivered with range spring 1. Range spring 2is included in the accessories.

Fig. 13 · Attachment to rotary actuators

Fig. 12 · Attachment to valves with rod-type yoke

9

1

25

3

4

11

10

8 67

1

16

15 15.1

Legend for Fig. 13

1 Positioner 8 Actuator shaft

2 Intermediate piece 9 Plate

3 Lever with cam follower roll 10 Mounting bracket

4 Adapter 11 Coupling

5 Feedback lever 15 Adapter

6 Scale 15.1 Plate

7 Cam disk 16 Slide

For SAMSON Type 3278

Acc. to VDI/VDE 3845

90 Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01

+ –

+ – A

+51 –52 +81 –82 +31 –32

(B)A

(A)B

+41 –42

GEi

+11 –12 +41 –42 +51 –52 +81 –82

AEi

+11 –12 +31 –32

AEi G

Ei

+ – Us

+ –

(B)A

(A)B

+ –

Input

Switching amplifieracc. to EN 60947-5-6

Output Aux. power

Fig. 14.1 · Type 3766Marking(A), (B) on rear

UsPower supply unit

Control signal i [mA]Switching amplifier

acc. to EN 60947-5-6

Solenoid valve

Output Aux. power

Control signal i [mA] Power supply unit for optionalposition transmitter

Fig. 14.2 · Type 3767

Materials

Housing

Special version

Die-cast aluminumchromated and plastic coatedCrNiMo steel, 1.4404 (316 L)

External parts Stainless steel 1.45711.4305

Measuring diaphragm Fluorosilicone rubber

Electrical connections

Dimensions in mm

36

N1 = 113N2 = 200

5856

68185

29

164

76

150

50

Attachment acc. toIEC 60534and NAMUR

44

19.5

393568

185

164

29

50

46 7650

150

82

56 66

28.5

28.5

Output 1(A1)

Output 2(A2)

Supply (Z)Attachment to rotary actuators(with pneum. reversing amplifier)

Fulc

rum

28

1429

150

164

19.5

37

68185

76

Supply(9)Output(36)

M20x1.5

Direct attachment toType 3277 Actuator

Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01 91

Summary of explosion protection approvals for Type 3766 PositionerType of approval Certificate number Date Comments

EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 01 ATEX 2171 2001-11-26 II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6, Type 3766-1

Statement of Conformity PTB 01 ATEX 2195 X 2002-03-07 II 3 G EEx nA II T6, Zone 2,Type 3766-8

IECEx approval IECEx TSA 05.0004X 2005-05-24 Ex ia I/IIC T6 IP 65,Ex nl/IIC T6 IP 65,without solenoid valve module with inductive limit switches,Type 3766-6

GOST certificate POCC DE GB05.B02637 2009-02-26 Ex approval; valid until 2012-02-26

CSA approval 1607848 2005-09-16 Ex ia IIC T6; Class I, Zone 0Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C; Class IIISolenoid valve, position transmitter, inductive limit switchesType 3766-3

FM approval 3020228 2005-07-21 Class I, II, III Div. 1; Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, GCl. I, Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6;Cl. I, Div. 2, Gr. A, B, C, DCl. II; Div. 2, Gr. F, G; Cl. III;NEMA 4X; with position feedback, solenoid valve, inductivelimit switchesType 3766-3

Refer to Data Sheet T 6116 EN for EEx d approvals for Type 6116 i/p Converter (Fig. 2)

Summary of explosion protection approvals for Type 3767 Positioner


EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 01 ATEX 2167 2001-11-29 II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6; Type 3767-1

Statement of ConformityFirst Addendum

PTB 01 ATEX 2170 X 2002-03-072003-05-28

II 3 G EEx nA II T6; Zone 2;Type 3767-8

IECEx approval IECEx TSA 05.0004X 2005-05-24 Ex ia I/IIC T6 IP 65, Ex nl/IIC T6 IP 65,without solenoid valve module with inductive limit switches,Type 3767-6

GOST certificate PPC 00 19324 2009-02-26 Ex approval; valid until 2012-02-26

CSA approval 1607848 2005-09-16 Ex ia IIC T6; Class I, Zone 0Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C; Class IIISolenoid valve, position transmitter, inductive limit switchesType 3767-3

FM approval 3020228 2005-07-21 Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1; Gr. A, B, C, D, E, F, GCl. I, Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6;Cl. I, Div. 2; Gr. A, B, C, DCl. II, Div. 2; Gr. F, G; Cl. III; NEMA 4X;with position feedback, solenoid valve, inductive limitswitches;Type 3766-3

JIS approval C-13674 2005-07-09 Ex ia IIC T6; Type 3767-7

KOSHA 2007 2182 Q1 2007-10-31 Ex ia IIC T6; Type 3767-1; valid until 2012-10-30

92 Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01

Article code

Pneumatic Positioner Type 3766- x x x 0 1 x x x x 1 x 0 x 0


Without 0 2


FM/CSA intrinsically safe / non incendive 3

Ex ia / Ex n I/IIC T6 IP 65 IECEx TSA Australia 6



Without 0

Limit switch, inductive, 2x SJ2 SN 2

Analog position transmitter 4 to 20 mA 6 0 0

3/2-way solenoid valve

Without 0

6 V DC 2

12 V DC 3

24 V DC 4

Pneumatic connections

¼-18 NPT 1

ISO 228/1 - G ¼ 2


Without (without additional equipment, without solenoid valve) 0 0 0 0

Cable gland

M20 x 1.5, blue (plastic) 1 0 0

M20 x 1.5, black (plastic) 2 0 0

M20 x 1.5 (nickel-plated brass) 2 1 3

Housing version

Die-cast aluminum 0

Stainless steel (CrNiMo) 2

Temperature range

Standard 0

Low temperature

Tmin ≥ –50 °C; optional limit switches, solenoid valve 2 1 3

Special version

None 0 0 0


Device functioning only as analog position transmitter: 3766-x60 000xxx00 000 0

Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01 93

Article code

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3767- x x x 0 1 x x x x x x 0 x 0


Without 0 2


FM/CSA intrinsically safe/non incendive 3



Without 0

Limit switch, inductive, 2x SJ2 SN 2

Analog position transmitter 4 to 20 mA 6 0

3/2-way solenoid valve

Without 0

6 V DC 2

12 V DC 3

24 V DC 4

Type of mounting

Standard range spring 0 1


¼-18 NPT 1

ISO 228/1 - G ¼ 2


Cable gland

M20 x 1.5, blue (plastic) 1 0

M20 x 1.5, black (plastic) 2 0

M20 x 1.5 (nickel-plated brass) 2 1

Housing version

Die-cast aluminum 1

Stainless steel (CrNiMo) 2

Reference variable

4 … 20 mA 1

0 … 20 mA 2

1 … 5 mA 3

Temperature range

Standard 0

Low temperature

Tmin ≥ –45 °C; optional limit switches, solenoid valve 2 1 2

Special version

None 0 0 0


94 Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01

Ordering textPneumatic Positioner Type 3766orElectropneumatic Positioner Type 3767

Accessories– Adapter NPT for electrical connections– Range spring 2

Additional specifications– Without/with pressure gauge for output signal pressure and

supply airFor mounting to the control valve:– Reference variable presetOperating direction: Increasing/increasing orincreasing/decreasing– Positioner with inductive limit switches:Metal tag outside the pick-up field – Contact closed/Metal tag inside the pick-up field – Contact open– Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator (120 to 700 cm²)– Attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)Travel: ... mm, if applicable, rod diameter: ... mm– Attachment to Type 3278 Rotary Actuator (160 or 320 cm²)– Attachment to rotary actuators acc. to VDI/VDE 3845,

single-acting or double-acting– Linear or equal percentage valve characteristic– Opening angle 70°/75°/90°

Refer to the Mounting and Operating InstructionsEB 8355-1 EN (for Type 3766) or EB 8355-2 EN (forType 3767) concerning the mounting parts required when thepositioner is delivered unattached to a control valve.


Data Sheet T 8355 EN 2010-01 95

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 4763

Pneumatic Positioner Type 4765

ApplicationSingle-acting positioner for attachment to pneumatic controlvalves. Supplied with either an electric input signal from 4(0) to20 mA or 1 to 5 mA (Type 4763) or a pneumatic input signalfrom 0.2 to 1 bar (3 to 15 psi) (Type 4765).Rated travels from 7.5 to 90 mm

The positioners ensure a predetermined assignment of the valvestem position (controlled variable x) to the electric or pneumaticinput signals (reference variable w). They compare the inputsignal issued by the controller with the travel of the control valveand issue the corresponding output signal pressure pst (outputvariable y).

Special features• Compact, low-maintenance design• Any mounting position possible• Insusceptible to mechanical vibrations• Reversible operating direction• Excellent dynamic behavior• Suitable for normal or split-range operation• Adjustable proportional band (P-band)• Adjustable air output capacity• Low air consumption• Special versions for oxygen serviceAttachment to valves with cast yokes or rod-type yokes accord-ing to IEC 60534-6.Optionally available with two pressure gauges to monitor sup-ply air and signal pressure. Stainless steel pressure gaugehousing with connections either nickel-plated or made of stain-less steel.An existing Type 4765 Pneumatic Positioner can be upgradedinto an electropneumatic positioner.

VersionsType 4763-0 (Fig. 1) · Electropneumatic positioner, withoutexplosion protectionType 4763-1 · Electropneumatic positioner for hazardousareas, input circuit II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 according to ATEXType 4763-8 · Electropneumatic positioner in EEx nA“non-sparking”Type 4765/6116 (Fig. 3) · Electropneumatic positioner withtype of protection "Flameproof enclosure" EEx d withType 6116 i/p Converter (Fig. 2; refer to T 6116 EN forapprovals)

Type 4765 (Fig. 1) · Pneumatic positionerreference variable 0.2 to 1 bar (3 to 15 psi)

Fig. 1 · Type 4763/Type 4765 Positioner

Fig. 2 · Type 6116 i/p Converter, opened housing

Fig. 3 · Type 4765/6116 Ex d Positionerattachment to NAMUR rib

Data Sheet T 8359 EN 2010-01 97

Principle of operationThe only difference between the Type 4765 Pneumatic Posi-tioner and the Type 4763 Electropneumatic Positioner is theelectropneumatic (i/p) converter unit in the electropneumaticpositioner to convert the electric signal from the controller into aproportional pneumatic signal.These positioners use a flapper-nozzle system which operatesaccording to the force-balance principle. They can be appliedfor both normal and split-range operation.

Operating directionWhen the reference variable (pe) increases, the output signalpressure pst can be selected to be increasing-increasing (directaction >>) or increasing-decreasing (reverse action <>). Theoperating direction depends on the position of the nozzleassembly that can be turned by 180°. The visible marking (>>or <>) indicates which operating direction is effective. Onchanging the operating direction or the fail-safe position, notethat the positioner must also be mounted in a different position(Figs. 5 to 8).

Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 and NAMURThe various ways in which the positioner can be attached to theactuator meet the requirements of IEC 60534-6 and NAMURrecommendation. Positioners may be attached to valves with ei-ther cast yokes (e.g. SAMSON Series 240) or rod-type yokes.Each type of attachment requires special mounting parts.

Assignment of the positioner and the actuatorFigs. 5 to 8 schematically illustrate the arrangement of the actu-ator, the mounting position of the positioner, the reference vari-able and the operating direction.

Fail-safe actionThe Type 3271 and Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuators are avail-able with the following fail-safe actions:Actuator stem extends (Figs. 5 and 6)Whenever the pressure acting on the diaphragm decreases orupon air supply failure, the compression springs in the actuatorforce the actuator stem to extend.Actuator stem retracts (Figs. 7 and 8)Whenever the pressure acting on the diaphragm decreases orupon air supply failure, the compression springs in the actuatorforce the actuator stem to retract.Refer to Data Sheets T 8310-1 EN and T 8310-2 EN for details.Figs. 5 to 8 illustrate the different operating directions and themounting positions of the positioner. Right and left attachmentapply when looking onto the lever (1) and plate (2).

Fig. 7 · Operating direction >>Right attachment

Fig. 8 · Operating direction <>Left attachment

1

Fig. 5 · Operating direction >>Left attachment

Fig. 6 · Operating direction <>Right attachment

Actuator stem extends

Actuator stem retracts

i/p converter Lever

Fig. 4 · Type 4763 Positioner


Positioner Type 4763 Type 4765

Travel rangewith lever extension

7.5 ... 60 mm7.5 ... 90 mm

Reference variableSpan for split-range operation0 to 50 % and 50 to 100 %

(Ri = Internal resistance at 20 °C)

4 ... 20 mA (only Ex) · Ri ≅ 250 Ω ± 7 %0.2 ... 1 bar(3 ... 15 psi)

4 ... 20 mA (not Ex) · Ri ≅ 200 Ω ± 7 %

0 ... 20 mA · Ri ≅ 200 Ω ± 7 %

Supply air Supply air 1.4 ... 6 bar (20 ... 90 psi)

Air quality acc. toISO 8573-1(2001)

Maximum particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil contents: Class 3Pressure dew point: Class 3 or at least 10 K below the ambient temperature to be expected

Output signal pressure pst Max. 0 ... 6 bar

98 Data Sheet T 8359 EN 2010-01

Positioner Type 4763 Type 4765

Characteristic Linear · Deviation from terminal-based conformity: < 1.5 %

Hysteresis < 0.5 %

Sensitivity < 0.1 %

Operating direction Reversible

Proportional band Xp(at 1.4 bar supply air)

Spring 1 or 2Spring 3

1 ... 3 %1 ... 1.5 %

Air consumption insteady state, Xp = 1 %

Supply air 1.4 bar6 bar

0.19 mn³/h0.5 mn³/h

0.13 mn³/h0.33 mn³/h

Air output capacity at Δp 1.4 bar6 bar

3 mn³/h8.5 mn³/h

Transit time for Type 3271 “Stem extends” 240 cm²: ≤ 1.8 s · 350 cm²: ≤ 2.5 s · 700 cm²: ≤ 10 s

Permissible ambient temperature

The limits specified in the EC TypeExamination Certificate additionallyapply for explosion-protected devices.

With i/p Converter

–35 ... 80 °C;Special version: –50 ... 80 °C

Type 6109 Type 6112

–20 ... 70 °C;With metal cable gland:

–35 ... 70 °C

–20 ... 80 °C;With metal cable

gland: –35 ... 80 °C;Special version:–45 ... 80 °C

Version with oxygen as operating medium up to max. 60 °C

Influence (Xp = 1 %) Temperature < 0.03 %/°C · Supply air < 0.3 %/0.1 bar

Effect of vibration < 2 % between 10 ... 150 Hz and 1.5 g < 2 % between 10 ... 150 Hz and 5 g

Variable position when turned by 180° < 3.5 % –

Degree of protection IP 54 · Special version IP 65

Weight Approx. 1.2 kg 1.1 kg

Materials

Housing Die-cast aluminum


Measuring diaphragm Silicone

Table 3 · Assignment of lever and range spring

Lever Rated travel Travelmin./max.

Reference variable(input signal) Range spring

Lever length L40...127 mm

15 mm 7.5 … 15 mm 100 %50 %

12

30 mm 14 … 32 mm 100 %50 %

23

60 mm 30 … 70 mm 100 % 3

Lever length Lwith extension 40...200 mm

20 mm 7.5 … 26 mm 100 %50 %

12

40 mm 14 … 50 mm 100 %50 %

23

>60 mm 30 … 90 mm 100 % 3

Data Sheet T 8359 EN 2010-01 99

79

69

M20 x 1.5

15 44

2.5

29 114.5157

131.5

Input

Output(38)

Supply(9)

27.7

99

L2815

37

49.5

30.5

Electrical connection and dimensions in mm

+11 –12

Control signal input4(0) to 20 mA

Summary of explosion-protection approvals for Type 4763

Type of approval Certificate number Date Type of protection / Comments


Statement of Conformity PTB 03 ATEX 2183 X 2003-09-30 II 3 G EEx nA II T6, Zone 2; Type 4763-8

GOST approval POCC DE.GB05.B02637 2009-02-26 1 Ex ia IIC T6 X, valid until 2012-02-26; Type 4763-1

CSA approval 1607873 2005-09-16 Ex ia IIC T6; Class I, Zone 0Class I, Div. I, Groups A, B, C, DClass II, Div. I, Groups E, F, G; Class III; Type 4763-3

FM approval 3020228 2005-02-28 Class I, II, III; Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, GClass I; Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6Class I; Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, DClass II; Div. 2, Groups F, G; Class III;NEMA 3R; with Types 6109 and 6112 i/p Module; Type 4763-3

KOSHA 2005-2333-Q-1 2005-11-14 Ex ia IIC T6, valid until 2010-11-13; Type 4763-1

Approval for Type 4763 and Type 4765

AIR LIQUIDE 2003/OL 216 A 2003-07-30 Oxygen as the operating medium with Type 6109 i/p ConverterMax. permissible ambient temperature 60 °C

Refer to Data Sheet T 6116 EN for the EEx d approvals of Type 6116 i/p Converter

100 Data Sheet T 8359 EN 2010-01

Article code

Electropneumatic Positioner Type 4763- x 1 x 0 0 x x x x 0 x 0 x x 0


Without 0 2/7



II 3 G EEx nA II T6 for Zone 2 acc. to ATEX 8 2/7

Range spring

Range spring 1, travel = 15 mm 1

Range spring 2, travel = 30 mm, split-range 15 mm 2



ISO 228/1 G ¼ 1

¼-18 NPT 3

Electrical connection

Cable gland

M20 x 1.5 blue (plastic) 1

M20 x 1.5 black (plastic) 2

M20 x 1.5 (nickel-plated brass) 7 2

i/p module

Type 6109 1

Type 6112 2

Reference variable

4 … 20 mA 0

0 … 20 mA 2 2

1 … 5 mA 2 3

Temperature range

Standard 0

Low temperature down to –45 °C 2 2

Special version

None 0 0 0

For oxygen as the operating medium 0/1 0 1 6

II 3 D IP 54 T 80 °C (with manufacturer’s declaration) 8 2/7 0 1 8

GOST approval 1 2 0 1 0

Data Sheet T 8359 EN 2010-01 101

Ordering textElectropneumatic Positioner Type 4763-x...orPneumatic Positioner Type 4765-01...

Additional specifications– Without/with pressure gauge– CrNiMo steel pressure gauge housing, connection

nickel-plated or completely of CrNiMo steel for mountingonto control valve

– Reference variable adjusted ... or supply pressure ... bar– Operating direction: Increasing-increasing or increasing-

decreasing– Piping: Zinc-plated steel or completely of CrNiMo steel or

natural PE tubing DN 6/10– Attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)

Travel: ... mm, if applicable, rod diameter: …mm– Optionally, special version– Extended temperature range– Special version with oxygen as the operating medium

Refer to the Mounting and Operating InstructionsEB 8359-1 EN (for Type 4765) or EB 8359-2 EN (forType 4763) concerning the mounting parts required when thepositioner is delivered unattached to a control valve.


Article code

Pneumatic Positioner Type 4765- 0 1 x 0 0 x 1 x x x x 0

Range spring

Range spring 1, travel = 15 mm 1




ISO 228/1 - G ¼ 1

¼-18 NPT 3

Temperature range

Standard 0

Low temperature down to –50 °C 1

Special version

None 0 0 0

For oxygen as the operating medium 0 0 1

102 Data Sheet T 8359 EN 2010-01

ApplicationSingle-acting positioners for direct attachment to pneumaticcontrol valves. Supplied with an electric input signal of 4 to20 mA or a pneumatic input signal of 0.2 to 1 bar (3 to 15 psi).For travels from 5 to 15 mm

The positioners ensure a predetermined assignment of the valvestem position (controlled variable x) to the control signal (refer-ence variable w). They compare the control signal issued by acontroller with the travel of the control valve and issue an outputsignal pressure pst (output variable y).The positioners have the following special features: suitable fornormal and split-range operation; reversible operating direc-tion; excellent dynamic response; low supply air consumption,insensitive to mechanical vibration; compact, low-maintenancedesign; optionally available with inductive limit switch and, onrequest, output pressure limiter.A version for hazardous areas with type of protection "Intrinsicsafety" II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 according to ATEX is available forthe proximity switch circuit and for the signal circuit of theelectropneumatic positioner (see summary of explosion protec-tion certificates).Type of protection EEx d with Type 6116 i/p Converter (Fig. 2)Direct attachment to Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuators with effec-tive areas of 120, 240 and 350 cm² (see T 8310-1 EN).Optionally available with a pressure gauge (scale 0 to 6 barand 0 to 90 psi) to monitor the signal pressure. The pressuregauge housing is made of stainless steel; connection optionallynickel-plated or completely of stainless steel.

VersionsType 3760 Electropneumatic Positioner (Fig. 1)Version suitable for non-hazardous areas. Signal pressureranges from 0 to 6 bar (0 to 90 psi); supply air from 1.4 to 6 bar(20 to 90 psi). Reference variable: standard version 4 to20 mA.Type 3760 Electropneumatic Positioner · Same version asabove, except for its use in hazardous areas. Type of protection

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 for the signal circuitType of protection EEx d with Type 6116 i/p Converter (Fig. 2)On request, also available with an intrinsically safe inductivelimit switch.Type 3760 Pneumatic PositionerReference variable 0.2 to 1 bar (3 to 15 psi), signal pressureranges from 0.2 to approx. 6 bar (3 to approx. 90 psi); supplyair from 1.4 to 6 bar (20 to 90 psi).On request, also available with an intrinsically safe inductivelimit switch.

Electropneumatic Positioner andPneumatic PositionerType 3760

Fig. 1 · Type 3760 Positioner

Fig. 2 · Micro-flow valve with EEx d positioner(Type 3760 with Type 6116 i/p Converter)

JIS

Data Sheet T 8385 EN 2010-02 103

Principle of operationThe only difference between the positioners is that the elec-tropneumatic positioner is equipped with an i/p converter (2).Both positioners ensure a predetermined assignment of thevalve stem position to the control signal. The controlled variablex is the valve travel. The reference variable w is either a DC sig-nal (i) for the electropneumatic positioner (i/p) or a pneumaticsignal (pe) for the pneumatic positioner (p/p). The DC signaland the pneumatic signal are both issued by a connected con-troller. The manipulated variable y is the positioner's outputpressure (pst).The Type 3760 Positioners are designed for direct attachment toSAMSON Type 3277 Actuators.In the electropneumatic positioner, the direct current signal i istransmitted from the controller to the i/p converter (2), where itis converted into a proportional air pressure pe of 0.2 to 1 baror 3 to 15 psi. In the pneumatic positioner, the control signal pe

provided as air pressure is directly transmitted to the measuringdiaphragm (3).The pneumatic control signal pe produces a force at the measur-ing diaphragm (3) which is compared to the force of the rangespring (7). The motion of the measuring diaphragm (3) is trans-mitted to the double plug (13) of the force switch (12) via the le-ver (4). As a result, a corresponding signal pressure pst is pro-duced. Any changes in the control signal pe or the valve stemposition causes changes in the signal pressure pst. Thus, the plugstem of the valve moves to the position which corresponds to thereference variable.The positioners can be used for both standard and split-rangeoperation. Note that the signal pressure range (range of theoutput pressure pst) must match the spring range of the actuator.In split-range operation, the output signal of a control station in-tended to control two control valves is divided in such a way thateach actuator passes through its full travel at half the input span.For a span between 0.2 and 1 bar, for example, the first valve isadjusted to the first half (from 0.2 to 0.6 bar), the second is ad-justed to the second half (from to 0.6 to 1 bar).The adjustment screws for zero (5) and span (8) are used to setthe lower and upper range values of the input signal. The rangespring (7) must be chosen to match both the rated travel of thecontrol valve and the nominal span of the reference variable.

Operating directionWhen the pneumatic control signal pe (reference variable) in-creases, the signal pressure pst can be selected to be increasing(direct action >>) or decreasing (reverse action <>). The operat-ing direction is determined by the position of the force switch(12) and can also be changed on site.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

14

13 12 11 10 9 8

14

pst

pe

pst

pe

Fig. 3 · Functional diagram of Type 3760 Positioner

Supply air

Travel

Force switch,Direct action >>

Force switch,Reverse action <>

Legend1 Pressure regulator 8 Adjustment screw (span)2 i/p converter 9 Clamping screw3 Measuring diaphragm 10 Clamp4 Diaphragm lever 11 Axis of rotation5 Adjustment screw 12 Force switch

(zero) 13 Double plug6 Lever 14 Screw7 Range spring

104 Data Sheet T 8385 EN 2010-02


Travel range 5 to 15 mm (see Table 2 for range springs)

Reference variableSpan for split-range operation0 to 50 % or50 to 100 %

Pneumatic 0.2 to 1 bar (3 to 15 psi)

Electric 4 to 20 mA (Ex only) · Ri 250 7 %

4 to 20 mA (non-Ex) · Ri 200 7 %

0 to 20 mA · Ri 200 7 %

(Ri = internal resistance at 20 °C) 1 to 5 mA · Ri 880 7 %

Supply air 1.4 to 6 bar (20 to 90 psi)

Max. particle size and density: Class 2 · Oil content: Class 3 · Pressure dew point:Class 3 or at least 10 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected

Signal pressure pst (output) Max. 0 to 6 bar (0 to 90 psi)

Characteristic Linear, deviation from terminal-based conformity 1.5 %

Hysteresis 0.5 %

Sensitivity < 0.1 %

Operating direction Reversible

Air consumption in steady state At 0.6 bar signal pressure and supply pressure up to 6 bar 100 In/h

Air output capacity At p = 1.4 bar 1600 In/h · At p = 6 bar 5000 In/h

Transit times with Type 3277 Actuator(15 mm travel, 0.2 to 1 bar signal pressure) 120 cm²: 2 s · 240 cm²: 6 s · 350 cm²: 8 s

Permissible ambient temperature –20 to +70 °C

(Note the limits in the EC TypeExamination Certificate)

Down to –30 °C with metal cable glandDown to –40 °C with metal cable gland and Type 6112 i/p ConverterThe limits in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected versions–40 to 70 °C with Type 3760 used as pneumatic positioner without proximity switches

Influences Temperature (zero) 0.03 %/°C

Span 0.03 %/°C

Vibrations Between 5 to 120 Hz and 2 g 0.5 %

Supply air 1 % between 1.4 and 6 bar

Variable position when turned 180° < 3.5 %

Degree of protection IP 54 (IP 65 special version)

Materials Housing: Polyamide · External parts: Stainless steel 1.4571 and 1.4104Measuring diaphragm: Fluorosilicone rubber · Cable gland: Polyamide, M20 x 1.5

Weight 0.6 kg


Inductive limit switch Type SJ2 � SN

Control current circuit Values corresponding to the downstream transistor relay

Hysteresis at rated travel 1 %

Table 2 . Range springs

Rangespring Reference variable (%) Travel (mm)

1 0 to 100Split-range 0 to 50 or 50 to 100

12/156/7.5

2 0 to 100 6/7.5

3 Split-range 0 to 50 12/15

4 Split-range 50 to 100 12/15

5 0 to 100 5

6 0 to 100 20

7 Split-range 0 to 50 or 50 to 100 5

Data Sheet T 8385 EN 2010-02 105

Positioner attachmentThe positioners are designed for direct attachment to Type 3277Actuators with effective areas 350 cm² and smaller. They aresecured directly to the actuator yoke using two screws.No external piping is necessary for actuators with effective are-as of 120 cm². The signal pressure pst from the positioner istransmitted to the desired diaphragm chamber via a switchoverplate and internal air ducts.

Combination of positioner and actuatorFig. 4 illustrates the different types of attachment. The specifica-tions "left attachment" or "right attachment" apply when look-ing onto the switchover plate and the signal pressure connec-tion. Depending on the intended attachment, the positioner is tobe secured on either the right or the left side of the yoke.Subsequent conversion, such as reversing the operating direc-tion of the positioner control loop or modifying the actuator'sfail-safe action, is possible. In this case, note that the positionermust also be attached in a different position.

Fail-safe actionThe Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator has the two fail-safe actionswhich move the valve stem to the predetermined position when-ever the signal pressure decreases or the air supply fails.Actuator stem extends:Whenever the pressure acting on the surface of the diaphragmdecreases or the air supply fails, the force of the compressionsprings in the actuator causes the actuator stem to extend.Actuator stem retracts:Whenever the pressure acting on the surface of the diaphragmdecreases or the air supply fails, the force of the compressionsprings in the actuator causes the actuator stem to retract.Further details can be found in Data Sheet T 8310-1 EN.

Fig. 4 · Attachment position

Actuator stem extends

Actuator stem retracts

Direct >>Left attachment

Reverse <>Right attachment

Reverse <>Left attachment

Direct >>Right attachment

Summary of explosion protection certificates for Type 3760


EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 02 ATEX 2076 2002-07-18 II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6;Inductive limit switches PTB 99 ATEX 2219 X; Type 3760-1


CSA approval LR 54227-23

AddendumLR 54227-32

1996-04-22

2005-09-161999-10-14

Class 1, Div. 1; Groups A, B, C, DNLRC approval also valid in USAClass I, Groups A, B, C, DEncl. 3; Inductive limit switches; Type 3760-3

FM approval 3020228Revision

2005-02-28 Classes I, II, III; Div 1; Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, GClass I, Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6;Class I; Div. 2; Groups A, B, C, DClass II; Div. 2; Groups F, G; Cl. IIINEMA 3RWith inductive limit switch; Type 6109 and Type 6112 i/p Module;Type 3760-3

Refer to Data Sheet T 6116 EN for EEx d certificates for Type 6116 i/p Converter.

106 Data Sheet T 8385 EN 2010-02

110 29

35

Ø40

38

128

121

17

48

36 84

M20 x 1.5

36 output

27 input signal(3760–...00)

9 supply

"A"

Pressuregauge forOutput

Connectoracc. toDIN 43650

View as seen from “A”

+ _

+ _+11 12_

2

3

1

4


Pneumatic version

Output Supply air

Electropneumatic versionWith mA signal Limit switch

Control signal i

Connection with cable socket(DIN 43650)



Output Supply air

Cable socket Terminal

12

+ 11� 12

i/p converter

34

+�

Limit switch

Dimensions in mm

Pneumatic connections G 18 or 1

8 NPT

Limit switch

Data Sheet T 8385 EN 2010-02 107

AccessoriesAdapter ½ NPT for electrical connections

Additional specificationsRange spring 1/ ... 7/Pressure gauge Without/withGauge housing CrNiMo steel,Connection optionally nickel-plated/completely CrNiMo steel


Article code

Positioner Type 3760- x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0


Without 0 2/3

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 acc. to ATEX 1 0

FM/CSA intrinsically safe/non incendive 3 0

II 3 G EEx nA II T6 acc. to ATEX 8 0

Limit switches

Without 0

1 x inductive, SJ2 SN 1

Pneumatic connection

ISO 228/1 - G 18 1

18 - 27 NPT 2


Without 0 0 0

Cable gland M20 x 1.5, blue (plastic) 1

Cable gland M20 x 1.5, black (plastic) 2

Connector DIN 43650-AF3-PG11 3

i/p module

Without 0 0

Type 6109 1 1

Type 6112 2 1/2/3

Reference variable

0.2 ... 1.0 bar / 3 ... 15 psi 0

4 ... 20 mA 1

0 ... 20 mA 2

1 ... 5 mA 3

108 Data Sheet T 8385 EN 2010-02

System 6000

Electropneumatic Converter for Direct Current Signals

i/p Converter Type 6116

ApplicationDevices used to convert a direct-current input signal into apneumatic output signal for measuring and control. Especiallysuitable as intermediate element between electric measuringdevices and pneumatic controllers or between electric controldevices and pneumatic control valves

Type 6116 proportionally converts the electric input signal into apneumatic output signal. The signal converter accepts a load-in-dependent 4 to 20 mA direct-current input signal.Depending on the supply air pressure, the converter supplies apneumatic output signal of 0.2 to 1 bar (3 to 15 psi), 0.4 to 2 bar(6 to 30 psi) or pressure ranges up to 8 bar (120 psi). Dependingon the signal range, Type 6116 is equipped with Type 6109 orType 6112 i/p Converter Modules (see "Technical data").

Special features• Continuous, linear characteristic• High accuracy and excellent dynamic response• Extremely low air consumption• Operation without supply pressure regulator possible (see

“Technical data”)• Switch-off electronic function guarantees venting at zero point

VersionsFor non-hazardous areas: Type 6116-0...For hazardous areas:Type 6116-1... EEx i according to ATEX and GOSTType 6116-2... EEx d according to ATEX and GOSTType 6116-3... Explosion-proof acc. to CSA and FM standardsType 6116-4... Intrinsically safe acc. to CSA and FM standardsType 6116-5... Explosion-proof /Australia / IECType 6116-6... Intrinsically safe /Australia / IECType 6116-7... Ex d according to JIS standard /Japan

Special versions– Type 6116-x2xxxxxxxxx2xxx: Temperatures down to –45 °C– Type 6116-0...

– AS-interface connection with Type 6150 Slave– Voltage input (e.g. 0 to 10 V) with Type 6151 u/i Module

– Electropneumatic converter without booster und switch-offelectronic functionConverters can be combined with SAMSON Type 3760,Type 3766-000 (model index .02 and higher) andType 4765 Pneumatic Positioners– Type 6116-xx010111000xxxx for attachment to p/p

positioners (½ NPT connection)– Type 6116-xx010112000xxxx for attachment to p/p

positioners (M20 x 1.5 connection)

Fig. 1 · Type 6116 i/p Converter

Fig. 2 · Typical application

TROVIS 6493

Type 6116

Type 3241-1

Supply aire

p

Data Sheet T 6116 EN 2006-09 109

Principle of operationThe electropneumatic converter consists of an i/p convertermodule, which operates according to the force-balance princi-ple, and a connected volume booster.When operated, the supplied direct current (4) flows throughthe plunger coil (2) located in the field of a permanent magnet(3). At the balance beam (1), the force of the plunger coil whichis in proportion to the current is balanced against the force ofthe dynamic back-pressure. The back-pressure is produced onthe flapper plate (6) by the air jet leaving the nozzle (7).The nozzle is supplied with air from the pneumatic output (36).With an input signal of 0 mA, an output pressure of approxi-mately 100 mbar already exists due to the offset spring.The air supply (8) flows into the lower diaphragm chamber anda certain amount of air flows to the output. When the current in-creases, the flapper moves closer to the nozzle. The force of thedynamic back-pressure which is produced pushes both the dia-phragm (10) and the sleeve (9) downward, allowing additionalair to enter the lower diaphragm chamber. The passing air vol-ume increases until the forces acting on the diaphragm obtain astate of equilibrium. When the current decreases, this action isreversed. The dynamic back-pressure caused by the nozzle andflapper decreases and the diaphragm is pressed upward. In thisprocess, it releases the sleeve (9), if applicable, and opens thevent (EXHAUST) until the forces on the diaphragm are equalagain.Switch-off electronic function (Fig. 4)Converter modules with an input signal range from 4 to 20 mAhave a slide switch which activates the switch-off electronicfunction. This function causes the pneumatic output to be ventedup to approx. 100 mbar when the input signal falls below4.08 mA tolerance. In this way, the tight shut-off function of avalve can be guaranteed.

Combined with a Type 3760, Type 3766-000 or Type 4765Pneumatic PositionerThe Type 6116-xx01011x000xxxx i/p Converter withoutbooster or switch-off electronic function can be combined withthe above listed positioners to form a version in a flameproofenclosure (Ex d). With Type 3760 and Type 4765 Positioners,the i/p converter is attached to the control valve according toNAMUR and its piping connected to the positioner (as shown inFig. 5). The Type 3766-000 Positioner can be connected directto the i/p converter. The positioner type should be specifiedwhen ordering any accessories.

6

7

8

10

8.2

9

1

2

3

4

i

5

pA

pK

ZERO SPAN

SUPPLY 8

EXHAUST

OUTPUT 36

GAUGE (36)

1 Balance beam2 Plunger coil3 Permanent magnet4 Input5 Slide switch, switch-off

electronic function

6 Flapper plate7 Nozzle8 Supply9 Sleeve

10 Diaphragm

Fig. 3 · Functional principle of Type 6116

Fig. 4 · Switch-off electronic function

Fig. 5 · NAMUR attachment to valve with Type 4765 Positioner Fig. 6 · Direct attachment to Type 3766-000 Positioner

4 8 12 16 20mA

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.81.0

bar

4 8 12 16 20mA

1

23

4

5bar

For output 0.8 to 2.7 barResidual pressure approx. 0.3 bar

For output 0.2 to 1 barResidual pressure approx. 0.1 bar

110 Data Sheet T 6116 EN 2006-09

Table 1 · Technical dataType W/o explosion protection 6116-0

With explosion protection Types 6116-1/-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-7, see summary of explosion protection certificates

Input 6) 4 to 20 mA; other signals on requestMinimum current > 3.6 mA; load ≤ 6 V (corresponds to 300 Ω at 20 mA)

For explosion-protected versions: load 7 V (corresponds to 350 Ω at 20 mA)Devices without switch-off electronic function Ri = 200 Ω ± 7.5 %

Output 6) 0.2 to 1 bar (3 to 15 psi) (Type 6109 i/p Module)0.4 to 2 bar (6 to 30 psi) (Type 6112 i/p Module)

Special ranges for Type 6112, adjustable according to customer specificationOutput range = Initial value + Span Δp corresponds to Module 6112

0.1 to 0.4 bar + 0.75 to 1.0 bar Module A0.1 to 0.4 bar + 1.0 to 1.35 bar Module B0.1 to 0.4 bar + 1.35 to 1.81 bar Module C0.1 to 0.8 bar + 1.81 to 2.44 bar Module D0.1 to 0.8 bar + 2.44 to 3.28 bar Module E0.1 to 0.8 bar + 3.28 to 4.42 bar Module F0.1 to 1.2 bar + 4.42 to 5.94 bar Module G0.1 to 1.2 bar + 5.94 to 8.0 bar Module H 10)

Air output capacity 3) 2.0 m³/h at output 0.6 bar (0.2 to 1.0 bar)2.5 m³/h at output 1.2 bar (0.4 to 2.0 bar)8.5 m³/h at output 5.0 bar (0.1 to 8.0 bar)

Supply air At least 0.4 bar above upper range value, max. 10 bar without supply pressure regulator,max. 6 bar for EEx d version

Air consumption 2) 0.08 mn³/h at 1.4 bar0.1 mn³/h at 2.4 bar

Max. 0.26 mn³/h at 10 bar

Characteristic Output linear to input

Hysteresis ≤ 0.3 % of upper range value; more exact value on request

Deviation from terminal-based conformity ≤ 1 % of upper range value; more exact value on request

Effect in % ofthe upper range value

Supply air: 0.1 %/0.1 bar 2)

Alternating load, supply air failure, interruption of the input current: < 0.3 %

Ambient temperature: lower range value < 0.02 %/°C, span < 0.03 %/°C

Dynamic response 4)

Limiting frequency 5.3 Hz

Phase shift –130°

Effect of variable mounting position Max. 3.5 % depending on attachment: ± 1 % when horizontal (Type 6109)Max. 1 % depending on attachment: ± 0.3 % when horizontal (Type 6112)

Ambient conditions, degree of protection, weight

Storage temperature –45 to +80 °C

Operatingtemperature

With Type 6109 –30 to +70 °C 7); –30 to +60 °C 1)

With Type 6112 –40 to +70 °C 7) 8); –40 to +60 °C 1) 8)

Degree of protection IP 54 5), IP 65 9), NEMA 4


Materials

Housing Die-cast aluminum, chromated, plastic-coated

1) Details (including electric specifications and installation instructions)can be found in the EC Type Examination Certificate

2) Measured at average output pressure3) Measured with 2 m hose, 4 x 14) Measured according to IEC 770

5) Observe recommended mounting position6) See Table 2 when combined with a positioner7) Devices without explosion protection8) Special versions down to –45 °C available on request9) Possible when accessories are used10) Max. output pressure 8 bar

Data Sheet T 6116 EN 2006-09 111

Table 2 · Technical dataType 6116-xx010111000xxxx (½ NPT) 1)

Input 4 to 20 mA, other signals on request,internal resistance approx. 200 Ω at 20 °C

Output 0.2 to 1 bar for positioner

1) Only with Type 6109 i/p Converter,other data same as in Table 1


For connection to intrinsically safe circuits, the specificationsstated in the certificate of conformity apply as well.

InstallationThe converter can be mounted to a wall, pipe or directly to thecontrol valve according to NAMUR.The converter is to be installed horizontally, with the pressuregauge (or screw plug) facing upward. If a different mountingposition is used, the zero point is to be corrected using the ZEROadjuster.With degree of protection IP 54, the vent must always be in-stalled facing downward to the floor.


Summary of explosion protection certificates for Type 6116 i/p Converter

Version Type of approval Certificate number Date Type of protection Comments

6116-1 EC Type ExaminationCertificate

PTB 02 ATEX 2199 2003-03-07 II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 –45 °C ambient temperature

GOST Certificate 2002.C302 2002-12-27 1Ex ia IIC T6 X Valid until 2008-01-01

6116-2 EC Type ExaminationCertificateFirst Addendum

PTB 98 ATEX 1024 X 1998-04-30

2002-01-08

II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 –45 °C ambient temperature

GOST Certificate 2002.C302 2002-12-27 1Ex d IIC T6 X Valid until 2008-01-01

6116-3 CSA Certificate LR 54227-18 1992-11-10 Cl. I, II, Div 1, Gr. B, C, D, E, F + G

LR 54227-24LR 54227-27

1996-05-311997-02-27

With Type 6109 or 6112Encl. NEMA 4

FMRC Certificate J.I.1W5A4.AX 1993-04-01 Cl. I, II, Div 1, Gr. B, C, D

Revision 1996-11-07 With Type 6109 or 6112

6116-4 CSA Certificate LR 54227-16 1992-12-01 Cl. I, Div 1, Gr. A, B, C, DCl. I, Div 2, Gr. A, B, C, D

LR 54227-27LR 54227-28

1997-02-271997-02-27

Encl. NEMA 3 and 4 With Type 6109 or 6112Zero/span electronics

FMRC Certificate J.I.3W2A5.AX

J.I.5YA3.AXJ.I.3Z1A5.AXRevision

1993-02-05

1995-02-011997-04-021998-10-20

Cl. I, II, III; Div 1Gr. A, B, C, D, E, F + G NEMA 3R

Div. 2NEMA 4Zero/span electronics

6116-5 AUS CertificateFirst Extension

Ex 3003 X 1993-09-152001-11-14

EEx d IIC T6 IP 65With Type 6109 or 6112

6116-6 AUS Certificate Ex 1476 X 1993-09-15 EEx ia IIC T6 IP 65 Class I Zone 0

6116-7 JIS Certificate C 13622 1999-05-20 Ex d IIC T6

The test certificates are included in the mounting and operating instructions or, alternatively, can be requested.

11 12

Input 4 to 20 mA

112 Data Sheet T 6116 EN 2006-09

Type 6116 with mounting accessories (dimensions in mm)

40

88

127

75 220

2"

Wall and pipe mounting, order no. 1400-6216

Pressure gauge

M 20 x 1.5 or½-14 NPT forelectricalconnection

30

Rear view, without mounting parts

93

92

129

230

113

200

40 95

117

Ø84 8

120

Type 6116-xx01011x000xxxx for positioner attachment

Attachment according to NAMUR with Type 4765 and Type 3760

Accessories, order no.1400-6223 (Type 4765)Accessories, order no.1400-6224 (Type 3760)

EXHAUSTVent (IP 65)

Pipe mounting

Wall mounting

M6, 10 deepPressure gauge connection

Attachment for double pilllar version(to a valve with rod-type yoke)Order no. 1400-6218

Attachment to a valvewith cast yokeOrder no. 1400-6217

Restriction

EXHAUSTVent (IP 54)

Combined with Type 3766-000 PositionerAccessories, order no. 1400-6227

Data Sheet T 6116 EN 2006-09 113

Article code Type 6116- x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Explosionprotection

WithoutIntrinsically safe II 2G EEx ia IIC T6 acc. to ATEX and GOST 1) 2)

Flameproof II 2G EEx d IIC T6 acc. to ATEX and GOST 3)

Explosion-proof acc. to CSA and FM standards 4) 5)

Intrinsically safe acc. to CSA and FM standards 1) 4)

Explosion-proof Ex d IIC T6 IECEx TSA/AUSEx (Australia) 4) 6)

Intrinsically safe Ex ia / Ex n IIC T6 IECEx TSA (Australia) 1)

Ex d IIC T6 acc. to JIS standard (Japan) 4)

01234567

2

3

2

i/p module Type 6109 4)

Type 611212

0 1 1

Input 4 to 20 mA4 to 12 mA 1)

12 to 20 mA, without switch-off electronic function 1) 7)

0 to 20 mA, without switch-off electronic function 7)

222

0000

1345

Output

Special ranges: 8)

0.2 to 1.0 bar3 to 15 psi0.4 to 2.0 bar6 to 30 psiInitial value 0.1 to 0.4 bar; span 0.75 to 1.00 barInitial value 0.1 to 0.4 bar; span 1.00 to 1.35 barInitial value 0.1 to 0.4 bar; span 1.35 to 1.81 barInitial value 0.1 to 0.8 bar; span 1.81 to 2.44 barInitial value 0.1 to 0.8 bar; span 2.44 to 3.28 barInitial value 0.1 to 0.8 bar; span 3.28 to 4.42 barInitial value 0.1 to 1.2 bar; span 4.42 to 5.94 barInitial value 0.1 to 1.2 bar; span 5.94 to 8.00 bar

2222222222

000011111111

124512345678

Operatingdirection

Increasing/increasingIncreasing/decreasing 1)

12

Electricalconnection

½ - 14 NPTM20 x 1.5

12

Pneumaticconnection

Without (for positioner attachment) 9)

¼ - 18 NPTISO-228/1 - G ¼

0 1 0 1 1 012

0 0

Degree ofprotection

Without (vent for positioner attachment)IP 54IP 65NEMA 4 10)

0 1 0 1 1 0 0123

0

Output pressuregauge

WithoutWith 1)

01

Temperaturerange

Tmin ≥ –25 °C (Type 6109 standard)Tmin ≥ –45 °C (Type 6112 subjected to routine test)Tmin ≥ –40 °C (Type 6112 standard)

122

012

Special version Without 0 0 0

1) Not for positioner attachment2) With degree of protection IP 54/IP 65 only3) Output pressure max. 5.6 bar; supply air 6 bar4) Only with 0.2 to 1 bar/3 to 15 psi5) With ½ NPT electrical connection, degree of protection

NEMA 4 or positioner attachment6) With ½ NPT electrical connection, degree of protection IP 65

or positioner attachment7) Without switch-off electronic function and without potentiometer

for zero point and span correction8) Specify setting range, e.g. set to 0.1 to 4 bar; output pressure

max. 8 bar9) Without explosion protection or with EEx d or explosion proof

according to CSA/FM standards10) Only with explosion proof or intrinsically safe according to

CSA/FM standards

AccessoriesMounting on Order no.– Wall and pipe mounting 1400-6216– Mounting to Type 3766 1400-6227– Mounting to Type 4765 1400-6223– Mounting to Type 3760 1400-6224– Mounting on cast yokes acc. to NAMUR 1400-6217– Mounting on valve with rod-type yokes

acc. to NAMUR 1400-6218

114 Data Sheet T 6116 EN 2006-09

u/i Module Type 6151

ApplicationConversion of a standard voltage signal into a standard currentsignal

The Type 6151 u/i Module converts a DC voltage of 0 or 2 V to10 V into a current signal of 0 or 4 mA to 20 mA. An auxiliarypower of 24 V DC is required.

Type 6151 u/i Module is suitable for attachment to devices withan electrical connection according to DIN EN 175301-803.The standard body connector, as shown in Fig. 1, or a specialdevice connector for different versions can be used.

InstallationFor attachment to devices with a connector in accordance withDIN EN 175301-803, simply plug on the Type 6151u/i Module. Connection is established using a cable socketaccording to DIN EN 175301-803.

The following SAMSON devices without device connector cor-responding to DIN EN 175301-803 can be adapted to the u/imodule:

SAMSON deviceDevice connector for

M 20 x 1.5 Case mounting

Positioner

Type 3730-0/-1/-2 x

Type 3760 x

Type 3761 x

Type 3767 x

Type 4763 x

Control valve V2001

V2001-IP x

i/p Converter

Type 6111 x1)

Type 6116 x

1) Type 6111 i/p Converter in special version

Fig. 1 · Type 6151 u/i Module

Data Sheet T 6151 EN 2006-11 115

Electrical connection Ordering textu/i Module Type 6151

Input 0 to 10 V or 2 to 10 VOutput 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA

Additional versions for input 0 to 10 V and output 4 to 20 mAare available.

On ordering modules for devices without DIN EN 175301-803connectors, also specify the positioner or converter type asgiven overleaf.


27.5

2

40

31

3 1

25.5

28.5

27

52

33.5

Dimensions

1 Device connector (only necessarywith M20x1.5 connection)

2 Type 6151 u/i Module3 Cable socket acc. to

DIN EN 175301-803


Input 0 (2) to 10 V

Maximum values –15 V / +27 V

Static destruction limit –20 V / +32 V (± 32 V for short period)

Input resistance 50 kΩ at Ue = 0 to 10 V · 1 kΩ at Ue < –0.3 V or Ue > 11 V

Output 0 (4) to 20 mA

Maximum load RU V

mAH=

− 1020

· e. g. 700 Ω at power supply of UH = 24 V

Auxiliary power 16 to 30 V DC

Permissible ripple Within the given limits

Static destruction limit ± 32 V DC

Reverse polarity protection Up to –32 V DC

Supply current Max. 22 mA, independent of supply voltage

Characteristic

Characteristic Linear, maximum deviation 0.2 %

Temperature effect Zero: < 0.1 %/10 K · Span: < 0.1 %/10 K

Auxiliary power effect < 0.05 % within the given limits

Operating temperature –25 °C to +85 °C

Degree of protection IP 65 when installed

Electromagnetic compatibility EN 50081 Parts 1 and 2

Body material Polyamide

1

232

12

+

–

+–

+–

24 V DCi

u

0(2)...10 V

0(4)...20 mA

Input

Output

Auxiliary power

116 Data Sheet T 6151 EN 2006-11

Limit switches

Limit switches for linear and rotary actuatorswith inductive, electric and pneumatic contacts

Position transmitters

117

ApplicationLimit switch with inductive, electric or pneumatic limit switchesfor attachment to pneumatic or electric control valves, toType 4763 Electropneumatic Positioners or Type 4765 Pneu-matic PositionersFor rated travels from 7.5 to 150 mm

The limit switches supply a signal when an adjusted limit value isexceeded in either direction. This signal is suitable for initiatingvisual or audible alarms as well as pilot valves or other switch-ing units. Moreover, the limit switches can be connected to cen-tral control or alarm systems.The limit switches are optionally available with:

• Two inductive limit switches• Two electric limit switches or• Two pneumatic limit switches

The limit switches can be overridden. They can optionally beused as normally open or normally closed contacts. The metaltag is outside the inductive field for the NO contact and insidethe inductive field for the NC contact.

Versions for hazardous areas• For use in hazardous areas in type of protection intrinsically

safe II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 orII 3 G EEx nA II T6 for Zone 2

• Conforming to Canadian or US explosion protectionapprovals

Special features• Excellent switching accuracy• No mutual influencing of the incorporated limit switches• Hysteresis (dead band) dependent on effective lever length

Attachment to control valves with cast yokes or rod-type yokesaccording to IEC 60534-6 as well as to Type 4763Electropneumatic Positioners or Type 4765 PneumaticPositioners

VersionsType 4746-x2 (Fig. 1) · Inductive limit switch with non-contactlimit value pick-up using metal tags and proximity switches (ac-cording to EN 60947-5-6)On request with proximity switches with integral output ampli-fier designed as three-wire switch (no transistor relay)Type 4746-x3 · Electric limit switch with electric double-throwswitch with friction snap-action contactsType 4746-04 · Pneumatic limit switch with incorporated pneu-matic switches and downstream pneumatic microswitchesSupply: 1.4 bar (20 psi), output 0 or 1.4 bar (20 psi)

Versions for hazardous areasType 4746-1 · Limit switch with contact circuit in type of protec-tion intrinsically safe II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6Type 4746-8 · Limit switch in type of protection non-sparking

II 3 G EEx nA II T6 for Zone 2Versions with Canadian or US explosion protection certifica-tions are available. Refer to the summary of explosion protec-tion certificates.Refer to Information Sheet T 8350 EN for information on the se-lection and application of positioners and limit switches.

Electric or PneumaticLimit Switch Type 4746

Fig. 1 · Type 4746-x2 Inductive Limit Switch

Data Sheet T 8365 EN 2010-01 119

Principle of operation (Figs. 2 to 4)The valve travel is transmitted either directly by the plate (20)onto the pin (1.1) and the lever (1) of the limit switch or, whenthe limit switch module is attached to a positioner, by a couplingpin. In this case, the linear valve travel is converted into a rotarymotion by the shaft (2).All limit switches have a small hysteresis which depends on thelever length L (see Technical data). Due to this, unnecessary con-tact changeover is avoided and signal processing is facilitatedeven when the valve stem position is within the limit signalrange.

Type 4746-x2 Inductive Limit Switch (Fig. 2)In these switches, the shaft (2) is provided with two switch cases(3) containing adjustable metal tags (4.1) for frictionless opera-tion of the proximity switches (5). The proximity switches as-sume a high resistance when the metal tag is within the inductivefield, whereas they become low-ohmic when the metal tag isoutside the field. The switching function and the limit value aresteplessly adjustable using the adjustment screw (3.1).For operation of the standard inductive limit switches (two-wireaccording to EN 60947-5-6), appropriate transistor relaysmust be connected to the output circuit. The three-wire versioncomprising the Type SB 3,5-E2 proximity switch includes an in-tegrated output amplifier and does not require a transistor re-lay.

Type 4746-x3 Electric Limit Switch (Fig. 3)In these switches, the shaft (2) is provided with two switch cases(3) containing adjustable cam discs (4.2). Each cam disc actu-ates an electric double-throw switch (7) by the roller (6.1)mounted to the switch lever (6). The switching function and thelimit value are continuously adjustable using the adjustmentscrew (3.1).

Type 4746-04 Pneumatic Limit Switch (Fig. 4)In these devices, the shaft (2) is provided with two switch cases(3) containing adjustable cam discs (4.2). Inside the switch (8),each cam disc actuates a nozzle-flapper system whose cascadepressure (pk1 or pk2) is used to reverse the pneumaticmicroswitches (9).When the cam disc (4.2) with its cam operates the switch lever(6) using the roller (6.1), the nozzle in the switch is opened andthe available supply pressure pz is fed from the microswitch tooutput A1 or A2. This means that input 5 is connected to output 3and pa1 = pz or pa2 = pz. As soon as the cam releases the switchlever (6), the nozzle (8.1) in the pneumatic switch (8) is closed.The microswitch changes over and the available air supply isshut off; i.e. pa1 = 0 or pa2 = 0. The switching function and thelimit value are continuously adjustable using the adjustmentscrew (3.1).The limit switch requires different levers (1) depending on thetravel range of the valve used:Lever I (157 mm) for travels up to max. 60 mmLever II (210 mm) for travels exceeding 60 mmWhenever the limit switch is attached to positioners, a speciallever, regardless of the valve travel, needs to be used.

Fig. 2 · Functional diagram of inductive limit switch

Travel

Fig. 3 · Functional diagram of electric limit switch

Travel

4.1 · Functional diagram of mechanical switching mechanism

Travel

1 1

4.2 · Functional diagram of switching function

Fig. 4 · Pneumatic limit switch

Legend for Figs. 2 to 41 Lever for valve travel1.1 Pin2 Shaft3 Switch case3.1 Adjustment screw4.1 Metal tag4.2 Cam disc5 Proximity switch of

control valve6 Switch lever

6.1 Roller6.2 Spring7 Electric switch8 Pneumatic switch8.1 Nozzle (in switch)8.2 Flapper (in switch)9 Pneumatic microswitch20 Plate attached either to

actuator stem or plug stem

120 Data Sheet T 8365 EN 2010-01

Table 1 · Technical data · All pressures stated in bar (gauge)

Inductive Limit Switch Type 4746-x2 Type 4746-0281

Control circuit Switching amplifier acc. to EN 60947-5-6 Three-wire switchOperating voltage 10 to 30 V

Proximity switch SC 3,5-NO 2) SJ 3,5 SN SB 3,5-E2

Permissible ambient temperature 1) –20 to 70 °C –20 to 100 °C –20 to 70 °C

With metal cable gland –40 to 70 °C –50 to 100 °C –25 to 70 °C

Electrical connection One cable gland M20 x 1.5 for 5.5 to 13 mm clamping rangeScrew terminals for 0.2 to 2.5 mm² wire cross-section



Type 4746-x3 Electric Limit Switch

Switching element Electric limit switch: changeover/SPDT (single-pole/double-throw type)

Permissible load AC voltage: 220 V, 6.9 ADC voltage: 220 V, 0.25 A ⋅ 20 V, 6.9 A

Permissible ambient temperature 1) –20 to 85 °C

With metal cable gland –40 to 85 °C

Electrical connection One cable gland M20 x 1.5 for 5.5 to 13 mm clamping rangeScrew terminals for 0.2 to 2.5 mm² wire cross-section



Type 4746-04 Pneumatic Limit Switch

Switching element Pneumatic limit switch with downstream pneumatic microswitch

Supply air 1.4 bar (20 psi), can be briefly overloaded up to 4 bar (60 psi)

Air consumption 0.04 mn3/h

Output 0 or 1.4 bar (20 psi)

Air output capacity One switch closed: 0.7 mn3/hTwo switches closed: 1.0 mn3/h

Permissible ambient temperature –20 to 60 °C



Materials

Case and cover Aluminium, powder-coated

Lever and shaft 1.4571

Cable gland M20 x 1.5 ⋅ Black polyamide

1) Observe the limits concerning permissible ambient temperatures specified in the EC Type Examination Certificate.2) Models manufactured until 2006 with SJ 3,5 N proximity switch.

Table 2 · Technical data for Type 4746-1 with type of protection Ex ia (ATEX)Maximum values for connection to certified intrinsically safe circuits

Limit Switch Type 4746-12 Type 4746-13

Limit switches Inductive Electric

Ui 16 V 16 V 45 V

Ii 52 mA 25 mA –

Pi 169 mW 64 mW 2 W

Ci - Effective internal capacitance 60 nF 50 nFNegligibly small

Li - Effective internal inductance 160 μH 250 μH

Temperature classes Ambient temperature range according to EC Type Examination Certificate(Technical data specified in Table 1 additionally apply)

T4 –45 to 80 °C –45 to 100 °C –45 to 80 °C

T5 –45 to 70 °C –45 to 81 °C –45 to 70 °C

T6 –45 to 60 °C –45 to 66 °C –45 to 60 °C

Data Sheet T 8365 EN 2010-01 121

Table 3 · Hysteresis (dead band)

Type 4746 -x2 -x3 -04

Lever length L Hysteresis

50 mm 0.15 (0.25*) mm 0.6 mm 0.75 mm

120 mm 0.30 (0.55*) mm 1.0 mm 1.5 mm

* Special version

Ordering textLimit Switch Types 4746-x2/-x3/-04Operating as NO/NC contactTo indicate Valve OPEN/Valve CLOSEDOptionally, special versionAccessoriesMounting parts for attachment to

Type 4763/4765 PositionerValve with cast yoke with lever I or IIValve with rod-type yoke with lever I or II

Adapter ½ NPT for electrical connections

Dimensions in mm

The dimensions required for attachment to Type 4765 Pneumatic Positioner and Type 4763 Electropneumatic Positionerscan be found in Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8365 EN.

8315

27.5

94

64

44.5

74M20x1.5

20.6

79

Separate air supply

Type 4746-x2, -x3 ⋅ Air connection for separate air supplytapped hole G 1

8

27.5

7644

.5

1837

18

8315

83

7492

Type 4746-04 ⋅ Air connections, tapped hole G 18

or 18 NPT

Air connections

Output

Supply air

32

148

30

7177

NAMUR rib

Fastening screw M8

77 71

32 30

148

NAMUR rib

Fastening screw M8

122 Data Sheet T 8365 EN 2010-01

41 42 51 52 42 41 43 52 51 53

GW1 GW2

+ _ _+GW1 GW2

41 42L+ L- 51 52

+ _ _+

GW1 GW2

Type 4746-x3Type 4746-x2


Type 4746-0281

Switching amplifier acc.to EN 60947-5-6

Summary of explosion protection certificates for Type 4746

Type of approval Certificate number Date CommentsEC Type Examination Certificate PTB 98 ATEX 2114 1998-09-03 II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6

First Addendum 2003-03-07 Type designations changed:Type 4746-2 and Type 4746-3 intoType 4746-12 and Type 4746-13 respectively

Statement of Conformity PTB 02 ATEX 2012 X 2002-04-05 II 3 G EEx nA II T6, Zone 2;Type 4746-82 and 4746-83

GOST approval B 02637 2009-02-26 0 Ex ia IIC T6 X

CSA approval 1607226(LR 54227-1)

2005-09-16 Intrinsically safe entity

Ex ia IIC T6; Class I, Zone 0

Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D;Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class IIIType 4746-32 and Type 4746-33

FM approval 3020228 2005-02-28 Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G

Class I, Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6; Class I, Div. 2,Groups A, B, C, D

Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G; Cl. III; NEMA 3R,with inductive and electric limit switches; Type 4746-3

NEPSI approval GYJ04220 2004-12-22 Ex ia IIC T4...T6; valid until 2009-12-21; Type 4746-12

GYJ04221X 2004-12-22 Ex nL IIC T4...T6; valid until 2009-12-21; Type 4746-82

The test certificates are included in the Mounting and Operating Instructions and also available on request.

Data Sheet T 8365 EN 2010-01 123


Article code

Electric or Pneumatic Limit Switch Type 4746 x x x x 2 x x 0 x x x 0


Without 0




Type

Inductive 2

Electric 3

Pneumatic 0 4

Contacts

Proximity switch SC 3,5-NO (NAMUR NC contact) 2 0 0 1 0

Proximity switch SJ 3,5-SN (NC contact in safety circuit) 2 1 0 1 0

Proximity switch SJ 3,5-S1N (NAMUR NO contact in safety circuit) 2 1 1 1 0

SAIA - electric microswitch XGK 3 (silver contacts) 3 2 0 1 0

SAIA - electric microswitch XGK3-81 (gold-plated contacts) 3 2 1 1 0

Pneumatic microswitch 0 4 4 0 0

Proximity switch SJ 3,5-E2 (three-wire switch), NO contact 0 2 8 1 1 0


Without 0 4 4 0 0

Cable gland M20 x 1.5 black (plastic) 1 0

Pneumatic connection

Without 0

ISO 228/1 - G18 0 4 4 0 0 1

18-27 NPT 0 4 4 0 0 2

Special versions

None 0 0 0

NEPSI approval Ex ia, Type 4746-12 inductive 1 2 2 0 0 9

NEPSI approval Ex nL, Type 4746-82 inductive 8 2 2 0 1 0

GOST approval, Ex ia, Type 4746-1... 1 2/3 0 1 3

124 Data Sheet T 8365 EN 2010-01

Limit Switch Type 3776With inductive or electric contacts and solenoid valvefor linear actuators or rotary actuators according toVDI/VDE 3845

General

The Type 3776 Limit Switch issues an electrical signal when anadjusted limit value is exceeded or not reached. The signal issuitable for reversing control signals, generating visual and audible alarms, or for connection to central control and alarmsystems. The limit switch can be equipped with a solenoid valvefor controlling the monitored actuator.

Versions

The Type 3776 Limit Switch offers a variety of different contacts,switching functions, connections, and mounting kits for all desiredapplications:

General

● Electrical connection using a cable gland M 20 �1.5 toterminals or using a plug-type connector

● Internal AS-Interface module with bus connection (optional)● Corrosion-resistant, rugged enclosure with degree of protection

IP 54 or IP 65 for applications in aggressive environments● Maximum permissible ambient temperature �45 to �80 °C,

depending on the components and the type of protection● Mounting kits for linear actuators or rotary actuators with

interface according to VDI/VDE 3845

Contacts

● Maximum 3 easily and accurately adjustable contacts● Inductive pick-ups, inductive double proximity switch, or

electric microswitches

Solenoid valve

● Safety Integrity Level SIL 4 according to IEC 61508

● 1 or 2 integral pilot valves for single or double actuationof a booster valve

● e/p binary converter with proven flapper/nozzle assembly● Type of protection II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 or II 3 G EEx nA II T6

(optional)● Nominal signals 6/12/24 V DC or 24/115/230 V AC● Power consumption 6 to 27 mW or 0.04 to 0.46 VA,

depending on the nominal signal● Manual override (optional)● Air supply 2.2 to 6.0 bar

● Flanged booster valve with diaphragm or piston● 3/2, 5/2, or 5/3-way function● Kvs 0.2 to 0.3● Restrictors for adjusting different closing and opening times

(optional)● Threaded connection G 1/4 or 1/4 NPT

● Flanged connection block for actuation of an externalType 3756 Booster Valve G 1/4 or 1/4 NPT

● Threaded connection G 1/4 or 1/4 NPT

Fig. 1 · Type 3776 Limit Switch

Fig. 2 · Type 3776 Limit Switch for linear actuators orrotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845

Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01 125

Type 3776-03203210127100 Limit Switch● Without explosion protection● 2 Type SB3,5-E2 inductive pick-ups● Angle of rotation 0° to 100°● Solenoid valve 24 V DC● Manual override● 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism● Without restrictors● Air connection G 1/4● Electrical plug-type connection● Degree of protection IP 65● Ambient temperature �25 to �70 °C● Without safety function

Mounting kit (order no. 1400-XXXX)

SAMSON Type 3278 Rotary Actuator Rotary actuators according toVDI/VDE 3845 – fixing level 1

Rotary actuators according toVDI/VDE 3845 – fixing level 2

Type 3776-12203210112000 Limit Switch● Type of protection II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6● 2 Type SJ3,5-SN inductive pick-ups● Angle of rotation 0° to 100°● Solenoid valve 24 V DC● Manual override● 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism● Without restrictors● Air connection G 1/4● Electrical terminal connection● Degree of protection IP 54● Ambient temperature �20 to �80 °C● Without safety function


Type 3776-02203210110100 Limit Switch● Without explosion protection● 2 Type SJ3,5-SN inductive pick-ups● Angle of rotation 0° to 100°● Solenoid valve 24 V DC● Manual override● 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism● Without restrictors● Air connection G 1/4● Electrical terminal connection● Degree of protection IP 65● Ambient temperature �20 to �80 °C● Without safety function


Type 3776-12203210112100 Limit Switch● Type of protection II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6● 2 Type SJ3,5-SN inductive pick-ups● Angle of rotation 0° to 100°● Solenoid valve 24 V DC● Manual override● 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism● Without restrictors● Air connection G 1/4● Electrical terminal connection● Degree of protection IP 65● Ambient temperature �20 to �80 °C● Without safety function


SAMSON Type 3241 Control Valve withrib according to DIN EN 60534-6-1

SAMSON Type 3277 Linear Actuator SAMSON Type 3277-5 with internalrouting of the signal pressure

Examples of application

Type 3776-12203290112000 Limit Switch● Type of protection II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6● 2 Type SJ3,5-SN inductive pick-ups● Angle of rotation 0° to 100°● Solenoid valve 24 V DC● Manual override● Connection block, double● Without restrictors● Air connection G 1/4● Electrical terminal connection● Degree of protection IP 54● Ambient temperature �20 to �80 °C● Without safety function

External Type 3756-3025 Booster Valve● 5/2-way function with two locking positions● Kvs 1.4● Air connection G 1/4


Type 3776-01203030150000 Limit Switch● Without explosion protection● 2 Type SC3,5-N0 inductive pick-ups● Angle of rotation 0° to 100°● Solenoid valve 24 V DC● Without manual override● 5/2-way function with two locking positions● Without restrictors● Air connection G 1/4● AS-Interface module with bus connection● Degree of protection IP 54● Ambient temperature �20 to �80 °C● Without safety function


Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5


126 Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01

� Shaft� Metal tag� Inductive double proximity switch� Adjusting screw

Function

Contacts

The limit switch is equipped with a maximum of three inductivepick-ups, one inductive double proximity switch, or three electricmicroswitches.

For most applications, the contacts are adjusted to provide a signal when the actuator has reached one of its end positions. Theswitching point can also be adjusted to any position within therotary range or travel range to signalize an intermediate position(see Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 3776 EN).

The shaft of the limit switch is placed onto the stub of the rotaryactuator or connected to the linear actuator over a couplinglever. The shaft is equipped with a maximum of three metal tagsor cam disks and an indicating cap to indicate the valve positionon the rotary actuator. On linear actuators, there is no indicatingcap because the valve position is indicated on the actuator stem.

The shaft � of the limit switch with inductive pick-ups (Fig. 9) isequipped with a maximum of three adjustable metal tags �.When the metal tag � enters the electromagnetic field of thepick-up �, the initiator becomes attenuated and the output high-resistant (switching function “contact open“). When the metal tag� leaves the electromagnetic field, the pick-up � is unattenuat-ed and the output low-resistant (switching function “contactclosed“). The metal tags � can be adjusted to a switching pointbetween 0° and 180° using the adjusting screws �.

The limit switch with inductive double proximity switch (Fig. 10)is a low-cost version which can be used only on rotary actuators.

The shaft � of the limit switch is equipped with an adjustablemetal tag �. When the metal tag � enters the electromagneticfield of the proximity switch �, the initiator becomes attenuatedand the output high-resistant (switching function “contact open“).When the metal tag � leaves the electromagnetic field of theproximity switch, the initiator � is unattenuated and the outputlow-resistant (switching function “contact closed“). The metal tag� can be adjusted to a switching point of 70° or 90° using theadjusting screw �.

The shaft � of the limit switch with electric microswitches (Fig. 11)is equipped with a maximum of three adjustable cam disks �.The cam disk � actuates an electric microswitch � over theroller mounted on the switch lever �. The cam disks � can beadjusted to a switching point between 0° and 180° using the ad-justing screws �.

� �

� �

Fig. 9

��

� �

Fig. 10

� �

� � �

Fig. 11

Inductive pick-ups

Inductive double proximity switch

Electric microswitches

� Shaft� Metal tag� Inductive pick-up� Adjusting screw

� Shaft� Cam disk� Electric microswitch� Adjusting screw� Switch lever

Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01 127

Fig. 13

Functional diagram of the solenoid valve

��

� �

Fig. 12

Solenoid valve

� e/p binary converter� Pressure reducer

� Manual override (optional)� Booster valve

� e/p binary converter� Outlet nozzle� Flapper� Spring� Solenoid� Pressure reducer� Restrictor

� Manual override (optional)� Booster valve

Function

Solenoid valve

The limit switch can be equipped with an optional solenoid valvefor controlling the monitored actuator. The binary signals issuedby an electric control unit are converted into binary pressure sig-nals, which open or close the control valve (Figs. 12 and 13,symbols see Fig. 14).

The solenoid valve consists of one or two pilot valves and a single-actuated or double-actuated booster valve. The pilot valves areintegrated and the booster valve is flanged to the enclosure. Alternatively, an external Type 3756 Booster Valve G 1/4 or1/4 NPT can be attached to the actuator, which is pneumaticallyactuated by a connection block flanged to the enclosure (see “Examples of application“, Fig. 4).

The limit switch with one pilot valve consists of an e/p binaryconverter � with manual override � and a single-actuated 3/2or 5/2-way booster valve � with return spring. The air is fed tothe binary e/p converter � from connection 9 over the pressurereducer � and the restrictor �.

In normal position, the flapper � is lifted off the outlet nozzle �by the spring �. As a result, a pressure lower than the switch-offpressure of the booster valve � builds up in the pressure deviderthat consists of a restrictor � and an outlet nozzle �. When thesolenoid � is energized by an electrical binary signal, the outletnozzle � is closed by the flapper � against the force of thespring �. As a result, the pressure in the pressure devider risesabove the switch-on pressure of the booster valve �, thus switch-ing it to the operating position. When the electrical binary signalis deactivated and thus the solenoid de-energized, the boostervalve � is switched to the normal position by a return spring.

The limit switch with two pilot valves consists of two e/p binaryconverters � with manual override � and a double-actuated5/2-way booster valve � with two locking positions or spring-centered 5/3-way booster valve �. The air is fed to the e/p binary converters � from the connections 9 over the pressure re-ducers � and the restrictors �.

In normal position, the flapper � is lifted off the outlet nozzle �by the spring �. As a result, a pressure lower than the switch-offpressure of the booster valve � builds up in the pressure deviderthat consists of a restrictor � and an outlet nozzle �. When thesolenoid � is energized by an electrical binary signal, the outletnozzle � is closed by the flapper � against the force of thespring �. As a result, the pressure in the pressure devider risesabove the switch-on pressure of the booster valve �, thus switch-ing it to the operating position. When the electrical binary signalis deactivated and thus the solenoid de-energized, the operatingposition of the booster valve � with locking position will be re-tained until a reverse signal is received. The spring-centeredbooster valve � is switched to mid-position by return springs.

Note for use in safety systems:The solenoid valve of the limit switch is suitable for use in safetysystems with a hardware fault tolerance of 1 or 2 up to SIL 4 ac-cording to IEC 61508 (for detailed results see Report No. V 602004 T1).

128 Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01

Symbols

Fig. 14

9E

81�5

4 2

82� P

9E

81�5

4 2

82� PP

E

83�84�

9E

81�5

4 2

82� PP

E

83�84�

9E

81�5

4 2

82� PP

E

83�84�

9E

81�

14

82� P

9E

81�

14

82� PP

E

83�84�

12

9E

81�3

2 4

82� P

9E

81�5

4 2

82� PP

E

83�84�

9E

81�5

4 2

82� P

9E

81�5

4 2

82� PP

E

83�84�

9E

81�5

4 2

82� PP

E

83�84�

9E

81�5

4 2

82� PP

E

83�84�

9E

81�5

4 2

82� PP

E

83�84�

3776-XXXXXX80 3776-XXXXXX90

3776-XXXXXX12


3776-XXXXXX50 3776-XXXXXX60 3776-XXXXXX70

3776-XXXXXX31

3776-XXXXXX51

3776-XXXXXX41


�

�

�

9E

81�

2 4

82� P

3

3776-XXXXXX10

�

�

Connection block Order no.� Connection block, single 3776-XXXXXX80

Connection block, double 3776-XXXXXX90Booster valve Order no.� 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism 3776-XXXXXX10� 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism, 1 supply air/1 exhaust air restrictor 3776-XXXXXX12� 5/2-way function with spring return mechanism 3776-XXXXXX30

5/2-way function with two locking positions 3776-XXXXXX405/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 closed) 3776-XXXXXX505/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 vented) 3776-XXXXXX605/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 to air supply) 3776-XXXXXX70

� 5/2-way function with spring return mechanism, 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX315/2-way function with two locking positions, 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX415/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 closed), 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX515/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 vented), 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX615/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 to air supply), 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX71

Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01 129

Technical data

General dataType 3776Angle of rotation 0° … 100° or 0° … 180°, adjustable,

70° or 90°, fixedTravel range 7.5 … 120 mm for attachment to linear actuators (e. g. SAMSON Type 327X)Material

Enclosure Polyamide PA6-3-T, blackEnclosure cover Polycarbonate 2807, transparentFollower clamp shaft PolyoxymethyleneFilter Filter made of polyethylene,

Filter check valve made of polyamide or stainless steel 1.4305Screws Stainless steel 1.4301

Degree of protection IP 54 with filter,IP 65 with filter check valve

Mounting position Special mounting position (see Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 3776 EN)Ambient temperature, Without explosion protection Permissible componentsdepending on the �20 … �80 °C All componentscomponents and the Type SB3,5-E2 inductive pick-up (max. �70 °C)type of protection �40 … �80 °C Type SC3,5-N0 inductive pick-up

Type SJ3,5-SN inductive pick-upElectric microswitchPilot valve AC/DCAdapter 1/2 NPT made of aluminumCable gland made of brassMale connector (manufactured by Harting) made of aluminumFilter check valve made of stainless steel 1.4305

�45 … �80 °C Type SJ3,5-SN inductive pick-upPilot valve AC/DCAdapter 1/2 NPT made of aluminumCable gland made of brassMale connector (manufactured by Harting) made of aluminumFilter check valve made of stainless steel 1.4305

Type of protection EEx ia IIC 1) Permissible components�20 … �60 °C (temperature class T6) Type SC3,5-N0 inductive pick-up�20 … �70 °C (temperature class T5) Type SJ3,5 SN inductive pick-up�20 … �80 °C (temperature class T4) Type NCN3-F24R-N4 inductive double proximity switch

Electric microswitchPilot valve DCAll electrical connection optionsAll filter options

�45 … �60 °C (temperature class T6) Type SC3,5-N0 inductive pick-up�45 … �70 °C (temperature class T5) Type SJ3,5 SN inductive pick-up�45 … �80 °C (temperature class T4) Pilot valve DC

Adapter 1/2 NPT made of aluminumCable gland made of brassMale connector (manufactured by Harting) made of aluminumFilter check valve made of stainless steel 1.4305

Type of protection EEx nA II 2) Permissible components�45 … �60 °C (temperature class T6) Type SC3,5-N0 inductive pick-up�45 … �70 °C (temperature class T5) Type SJ3,5 SN inductive pick-up�45 … �80 °C (temperature class T4) Electric microswitch

Pilot valve DCAdapter 1/2 NPT made of aluminumCable gland made of brassMale connector (manufactured by Harting) made of aluminumFilter check valve made of stainless steel 1.4305

Electrical connection Terminal connection, plug-type connection or internal AS-Interface module with bus connection(see “Versions and ordering data“)

Weight approx. 450 g (without connection block/booster valve)

1) II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 according to EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 98 ATEX 20722) II 3 G EEx nA II T6 according to Statement of Conformity PTB 02 ATEX 2007 X

130 Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01

1) II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 according to EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 98 ATEX 20722) II 3 G EEx nA II T6 according to Statement of Conformity PTB 02 ATEX 2007 X3) Permissible maximum values of upstream isolating amplifiers

Technical data

ContactType 3776 -X1 -X2 -03 -07 -X5 -X6Version Inductive pick-up Inductive double Electric

proximity switch microswitchSC3,5-N0 SJ3,5-SN SB3,5-E2 NCN3-F24R-N4 Silver Goldwith LED, yellow with LED, yellow with LED, yellow contact contact

Switching function Break contact Break contact Make contact (PNP) 2 break contacts Switchover contactSwitching hysteresis 0.03 … 0.2 mm � 0.03 mm 0.4 … 0.6 mm 0.3 … 1.2 mm Approx. 0.3 mm

Angle of rotation � 4.0° � 1.1° � 1.7° � 4.0° � 2.0°Travel � 1.8 mm � 0.5 mm � 0.75 mm � 1.8 mm � 0.9 mm

Switching point driftAngle of rotation�50 K � 2.5° � 0.5° � 1.0° � 2.5° � 0.5°Travel�50 K � 1.0 mm � 0.2 mm � 0.4 mm � 1.0 mm � 0.2 mm

Nominal voltage U0 8 V DC 8 V DC 10 … 30 V DC 8 V DC 42 V AC/5.5 A,Operating voltage UB 42 V DC/0.25 A,Loading capacity max. 20 V DC/5.5 ACurrent consumption

Metal tag undetected 3 mA (LED on) 3 mA 3 mA (LED off) 3 mA (LED on)Metal tag detected 1 mA (LED off) 1 mA 1 mA (LED on) 1 mA (LED off)

Ambient temperature �40 … �80 °C �45 … �80 °C �25 … �70 °C �20 … �80 °C �40 … �80 °CContact with type of protection EEx ia IIC 1) for use in hazardous areas (zone 1)Type 3776 -11 -12 -17 -15 -16Permissible maximum values when connected to a certified intrinsically safe circuitInput voltage Ui 16 V 16 V 15 V 45 VInput current Ii 25 mA 52 mA 25 mA 52 mA 25 mA 52 mA –Power dissipation Pi 64 mW 169 mW 64 mW 169 mW 64 mW 169 mW 2 WInternal capacitance Ci 150 nF 30 nF 100 nF � 0Internal inductance Li 150 μH 100 μH 100 μH � 0Ambient temperature in temperature classIi �52 mA 3) T6 �45 … � 45 °C �45 … � 45 °C �45 … � 55 °C

T6 �20 … �60 °CPi �169 mW 3) T5 �45 … � 60 °C �45 … � 60 °C �45 … � 70 °CT4 �45 … � 80 °C �45 … � 80 °C �45 … � 85 °C

T5 �20 … �70 °CIi �25 mA 3) T6 �45 … � 65 °C �45 … � 65 °C �45 … � 70 °CPi �64 mW 3) T5 �45 … � 80 °C �45 … � 80 °C �45 … � 80 °C

T4 �20 … �80 °CT4 �45 … �100 °C �45 … �100 °C �45 … �100 °C

Contact with type of protection EEx nA II 2) for use in hazardous areas (zone 2 or 22)Type 3776 -81 -82 -87 -85 -86Ambient temperature in temperature class

T6 �45 … �60 °C �45 … �60 °C �45 … �60 °C �45 … �60 °CT5 �45 … �70 °C �45 … �70 °C �45 … �70 °C �45 … �70 °CT4 �45 … �80 °C �45 … �80 °C �45 … �80 °C �45 … �80 °C

Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01 131

Pilot valveElectrical dataType 3776 -XXXX1 -XXXX2 -XXXX3 -0XXX8 -0XXX6 -0XXX5Nominal signal UN 6 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 24 V AC 115 V AC 230 V AC

Max. 27 V 1) Max. 25 V 1) Max. 32 V 1) Max. 36 V 1) Max. 130 V 1) Max. 255 V 1)fN 48 … 62 Hz

Switching point U�80 °C 4.8 V 9.6 V 18 V 19 … 36 V 82 … 130 V 183 … 255 V“On“ I �20 °C 1.41 mA 1.52 mA 1.57 mA 1.9 mA 2.2 mA 2.6 mA

P �20 °C 5.47 mW 13.05 mW 26.71 mW 0.04 VA 0.17 VA 0.46 VA“Off“ U�25 °C � 1.0 V � 2.4 V � 4.7 V � 4.5 V � 18 V � 36 V

Impedance R �20 °C 2.6 k 5.5 k 10.7 k Approx. 10 k Approx. 40 k Approx. 80 k

Temperature effect 0.4 %/°C 0.2 %/°C 0.1 %/°C 0.1 %/°C 0.05 %/°C 0.03 %/°CAmbient temperature �45 … �80 °CPilot valve with type of protection EEx ia IIC 2) for use in hazardous areas (zone 1)Type 3776 -1XXX1 -1XXX2 -1XXX3Permissible maximum values for connection to an intrinsically safe circuitOutput voltage 4) Ui 25 V 27 V 28 V 30 V 32 VOutput current 4) Ii 150 mA 125 mA 115 mA 100 mA 85 mAPower dissipation Pi 250 mW No limitationExternal capacitance Ci � 0External inductance Li � 0Ambient temperature in temperature class

T6 �45 … �60 °CT5 �45 … �70 °CT4 �45 … �80 °C

Pilot valve with type of protection EEx nA II 3) for use in hazardous areas (zone 2 or 22)Type 3776 -8XXX1 -8XXX2 -8XXX3Ambient temperature in temperature class

T6 �45 … �60 °CT5 �45 … �70 °CT4 �45 … �80 °C

Pneumatic dataType 3776 -XXXX1 -XXXX2 -XXXX3 -0XXX8 -0XXX6 -0XXX5Kvs

5) 0.01Air supply Medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles

Pressure 2.2 … 6.0 barOutput signal 1.5 … 2.5 barAir consumption “On“ � 10 l/h at 1.4 bar air supply

“Off“ � 60 l/h at 1.4 bar air supplySwitching time � 50 msTemperature effect 0.4 %/°CSwitching cycles 2 �107

1) Permissible maximum value at 100 % continued on-time. For Ex versions, the permissible maximum value Ui applies2) II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 according to EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 98 ATEX 20723) II 3 G EEx nA II T6 according to Statement of Conformity PTB 02 ATEX 2007 X4) The Ui/Ii values apply to nominal signals 6/12/24 V DC5) Air flow at p1 �2.4 bar and p2 �1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q �Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h

Technical data

132 Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01

Technical data

Booster valveType 3776 -XXXXXX10 -XXXXXX12 -XXXXXX3X -XXXXXX4X -XXXXXX5X -XXXXXX6X -XXXXXX7XVersion 3/2-way function 5/2-way function 5/3-way function

with with with with with spring-centered mid-position,spring return spring return spring return two locking connections connections connectionsmechanism mechanism mechanism positions 2 and 4 2 and 4 2 and 4

closed vented to air supplyKvs

1) 0.20 0.30With restrictors 0.01 … 0.18 0.01 … 0.23

Construction Seat valve, Piston valve,soft seating metal-to-metal seating, without overlap

Fail-safe function SIL 4 2)Material

Enclosure GD AlSi12, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019Gaskets Silicone rubber Perbunan, nitrile butadiene rubberFilter PolyethyleneScrews Stainless steel 1.4571

Actuation 3) Single-actuated Double-actuatedOperating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles or nitrogenOperating pressure 2.2 … 6.0 barSwitching cycles 107 2 �107

Ambient temperature �45 … �80 °CConnection G 1/4 or 1/4 NPTWeight approx. 150 g 175 g

Connection blockType 3776 -XXXXXX80 -XXXXXX90Version Single 1) Double 2)Safety function SIL 4 3)Kvs

4) 0.01Material

Enclosure GD AlSi 12, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019Gaskets PerbunanScrews Stainless steel 1.4571

Ambient temperature �45 … �80 °CConnection G 1/4 or 1/4 NPTWeight approx. 150 g

1) For single pneumatic actuation of an external Type 3756 3/2 or 5/2-way Booster Valve G 1/4 or 1/4 NPT2) For double pneumatic actuation of an external Type 3756 5/2 or 5/3-way Booster Valve G 1/4 or 1/4 NPT3) Safety Integrity Level SIL 4 according to IEC 61508 (Report No. V 60 2004 T1)4) Air flow at p1 �2.4 bar and p2 �1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q �Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h

1) Air flow at p1 �2.4 bar and p2 �1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q �Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h2) Safety Integrity Level SIL 4 according to IEC 61508 (Report No. V 60 2004 T1)3) Actuation by one or two pilot valves

Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01 133

Technical data

Type 3776-0XXXXXXX5X AS-Interface ModuleVersion 1) Internal AS-Interface module for use in non-hazardous areas

(see Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 3776 EN)Transmission of power supply and binary signals over a common two-wire cableConnection of maximum two Type SC3,5-N0 or SJ3,5-SN inductive pick-ups/one Type NCN3-F24R-N4 inductive double proximity switch and two pilot valves 24 V DCWatchdog function “On“/“Off“Cable break and short circuit monitoring

Status indicatorsAS-Interface module LED green “Power supply on“,

LED red “Cable break, short circuit, or interruption of communication“Initiators LED yellow “Unattenuated“Pilot valves LED yellow “Actuated“

Power supply 24 V DCAmbient temperature �25 … �80 °CConnection Cable adapter for AS-i flat cable, 2 wires, made of polyamide, black, or

round plug connector M 12 �1, 4 poles, made of brass, nickel-plated 2)

1) Certification Document No. 28001 of the AS-International Association2) The female connector is not included in the scope of delivery (see “Spare parts and accessories“)

134 Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01

Dimensions

Limit switch

Fig. 15 · Dimensions in mm

� Cable gland M 20 �1.5� Plug-type connector according to EN 175301-803� Plug-type connector (manufactured by Harting)� Plug-type connector (manufactured by Binder)� Cable adapter for AS-i flat cable� Round plug connector M 12 �1� Filter check valve Filter Indicating cap (not used on linear actuators)

Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01 135

Connection block Order no.� Connection block, single 3776-XXXXXX80

Connection block, double 3776-XXXXXX90Booster valve Order no.� 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism 3776-XXXXXX10� 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism, 1 supply air/1 exhaust air restrictor 3776-XXXXXX12� 5/2-way function with spring return mechanism 3776-XXXXXX30

5/2-way function with two locking positions 3776-XXXXXX405/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 closed) 3776-XXXXXX505/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 vented) 3776-XXXXXX605/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 to air supply) 3776-XXXXXX70

� 5/2-way function with spring return mechanism, 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX315/2-way function with two locking positions, 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX415/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 closed), 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX515/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 vented), 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX615/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 to air supply), 2 exhaust air restrictors 3776-XXXXXX71

Dimensions

Connection block/booster valve


All connections with tapped holes G 1/4 or 1/4 NPT

136 Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01

Dimensions

Attachment to rotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845 – fixing level 1


X � For electrical connection options see Fig.15XX � Dimension depends on manufacturer


Dimensions

Attachment to rotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845 – fixing level 2

Mounting kit for fixing level 1

Order no. 1400-7041

X � For electrical connection options see Fig.15

Mounting kit for fixing level 2Size 1 2 3 4Order no. 1400-7043 1400-7186 1400-7212 1400-7210Dimension A 80 80 130 130Dimension B 20 30 30 50Dimension C 18 28 28 48Dimension D 55 55 105 105Dimension E 94 94 144 144Dimension F 40 40 48 48Dimension G � (F�1)Dimension H � (D�1)

Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01 137

Type 3776 Limit Switch Order no. 3776- . . . . . . . . . . . . X .Type of protection Without explosion protection 0 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 1) (max. �60/70/80 °C within T6/T5/T4) 1II 3 G EEx nA II T6 2) (max. �60/70/80 °C within T6/T5/T4) 8

Contact Inductive pick-up Type SC3,5-N0 with LED, 2 wires (�40 … �80 °C) 1Versions Type SJ3,5-SN, 2 wires (�45 … �80 °C) 2

Type SB3,5-E2 with LED, 3 wires 3) (without Ex/without AS-i/�25 … �70 °C) 3Inductive double proximity switch Type NCN3-F24R-N4 with LED, 2 �2 wires (�25 … �70 °C) 7 2Electric microswitch, 3 wires 3), with switchover contact made of silver (without AS-i/�40 … �80 °C) 5

with switchover contact made of gold (without AS-i/�40 … �80 °C) 6Quantity 3) 1 contact 1

2 contacts 23 contacts 3

Angle of rotation 0 … 100°, adjustable 00 … 180°, adjustable 10 … 180° with mid-position, adjustable 2

70°, fixed (for Type NCN3-F24R-N4 inductive double proximity switch) 390°, fixed (for Type NCN3-F24R-N4 inductive double proximity switch) 4

Solenoid valve Without solenoid valve 0 0 0 0 0Nominal signal 6 V DC, power consumption 5.47 mW 1

12 V DC, power consumption 13.05 mW 224 V DC, power consumption 26.71 mW 3

230 V AC, power consumption 0.46 VA (without Ex) 5115 V AC, power consumption 0.17 VA (without Ex) 6

24 V AC, power consumption 0.04 VA (without Ex) 8Manual override Without manual override SIL 4 0

Pushbutton underneath enclosure cover SIL 4 1Pushbutton switch underneath enclosure cover 2

Switching function Without switching function (without solenoid valve) 0 0 03/2-way function with spring return mechanism, Kvs 0.20 SIL 4 15/2-way function with spring return mechanism, Kvs 0.30 35/2-way function with two locking positions, Kvs 0.30 45/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 closed), Kvs 0.30 55/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 vented), Kvs 0.30 65/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 to air supply), Kvs 0.30 7Connection block with 1 pilot valve 4) SIL 4 (without restrictors) 8 0Connection block with 2 pilot valves 3 ) 5) (without restrictors) 9 0

Restrictors Without restrictors SIL 4 02 exhaust air restrictors, Kvs 0.01 … 0.23, adjustable (optional for 5/2- or 5/3-way function) 11 supply air/1 exhaust air restrictor, Kvs 0.01 … 0.18, adjustable (optional for 3/2-way function) 2

Air connection Without air connection (without solenoid valve) 0G 1/4 11/4 NPT 2

Electrical connection 1 cable gland made of polyamide, black (min. �20 °C) 1 0Terminal, 12 poles, 2 cable glands made of polyamide, black (min. �20 °C) 1 1threaded connection 1 cable gland made of polyamide, blue (min. �20 °C) 1 2M 20 �1.5 2 cable glands made of polyamide, blue (min. �20 °C) 1 3

1 adapter 1/2 NPT made of aluminum, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019 (min. �45 °C) 1 42 adapter 1/2 NPT made of aluminum, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019 (min. �45 °C) 1 51 EExe cable gland (manufactured by CEAG) made of polyamide, black (min. �20 °C) 1 62 EExe cable glands (manufactured by CEAG) made of polyamide, black (min. �20 °C) 1 71 cable gland made of brass, nickel-plated (min. �45 °C) 1 82 cable glands made of brass, nickel-plated (min. �45 °C) 1 9

Plug-type connection 1 male connector (manufactured by Harting), 8 poles, made of aluminum, silvery gray 6) (min. �40 °C) 2 12 male connectors (manufactured by Harting), 7�7 poles, made of aluminum, silvery gray 6) (min. �40 °C) 2 21 male connector according to EN 175 301-803, 4 poles, made of polyamide, black 6) (min. �20 °C) 2 52 plug-type connectors according to EN 175 301-803, 4�4 poles, made of polyamide, black 7) (min. �20 °C) 2 61 round plug connector (manufactured by Binder), 7 poles, made of polyamide, black 6) (min. �20 °C) 2 72 round plug connectors (manufactured by Binder), 7�6 poles, made of polyamide, black 7) (min. �20 °C) 2 8

AS-Interface module Cable adapter for AS-i flat cable, 2 wires, made of polyamide, black (without Ex/min. �25 °C) 5 0with bus connection 8) Round plug connector M 12 �1, 4 wires, made of brass, nickel-plated 6) (without Ex/min. �25 °C) 5 1

Degree of protection IP 54 with filter made of polyethylene (min. �20 °C) 0IP 65 with filter check valve made of polyamide (min. �20 °C) 1IP 65 with filter check valve made of 1.4305 (min. �45 °C) 2

Ambient temperature 9) The permissible ambient temperature of the limit switch depends on the components, the type of protection, and the temperature class. XSafety function Without safety function 0

SIL 4 10) 1

Versions and ordering data

1) EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 98 ATEX 2072 and GOST Certificate 2002.C312 (1 Ex ia IIC T6 X)2) Statement of Conformity PTB 02 ATEX 2007 X3) With a double actuated solenoid valve, a maximum of two 3-wire contacts can be used4) For pneumatic single actuation of an external Type 3756 3/2 or 5/2-way Booster Valve G 1/4 or 1/4 NPT5) For pneumatic double actuation of an external Type 3756 5/2 or 5/3-way Booster Valve G 1/4 or 1/4 NPT6) The female connector is not included in the scope of delivery (see “Spare parts and accessories“)7) The female connectors are included in the scope of delivery8) According to Certification Document No. 28001 of the AS-International Association9) Safety Integrity Level SIL 4 according to IEC 61508 (Report No.V 60 2004 T1)

138 Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01

Order no. Designation0790-6658 Female connector according to EN 175301-803, type A, made of polyamide, black1400-8298 Female connector (manufactured by Harting), 7 poles, made of aluminum, silvery gray8801-2810 Sensor connecting cable, 2 wires, length 3 m, blue, with angle connector M 12 �1, 4 poles, made of brass, nickel-plated8831-0716 Female connector (manufactured by Binder), 7 poles, made of PBT GV, black8831-0865 Female connector M 12 �1, 4 poles, angle type, made of polyamide, black

1890-4875 Cable gland M 20 �1.5 made of brass, nickel-plated8808-0178 EExe cable gland M 20 �1.5 (manufactured by CEAG) made of polyamide, black8808-1011 Cable gland M 20 �1.5 made of polyamide, black8808-1012 Cable gland M 20 �1.5 made of polyamide, blue

0310-2149 Adapter 1/2 NPT made of aluminum, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019

1089-1159 Enclosure cover made of polycarbonate, transparent, connection G 1/4 for filter/filter check valve

1890-4663 PCB for AS-Interface module

3994-0158 Cable break protection device with enclosure for top hat rail 35, degree of protection IP 20(for Type 3776-XXXX1 with solenoid valve 6 V DC)

1790-7253 Filter check valve made of stainless steel 1.4305, connection G 1/4, degree of protection IP 651790-7408 Filter check valve made of polyamide, connection G 1/4, degree of protection IP 658504-0066 Filter made of polyethylene, connection G 1/4, degree of protection IP 54

Mounting kits

1400-7216 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3278 Rotary Actuators, actuator size 160 cm2

1400-7217 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3278 Rotary Actuators, actuator size 320 cm2

1400-7041 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for rotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845 – fixing level 10469-0017 Follower clamp for mounting kit with fixing level 1

Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for rotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845 – fixing level 21400-7043 Size 1, hole spacing A = 80 mm, shaft stub length B = 20 mm1400-7186 Size 2, hole spacing A = 80 mm, shaft stub length B = 30 mm1400-7212 Size 3, hole spacing A = 130 mm, shaft stub length B = 30 mm1400-7210 Size 4, hole spacing A = 130 mm, shaft stub length B = 50 mm

1400-7220 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3277 Linear Actuators, actuator size 240/350 cm2

1400-7221 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3277 Linear Actuators, actuator size 700 cm2

1400-7219 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3277-5 Linear Actuators (external)

1400-7222 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3277-5 Linear Actuators (internal), connection G 1/41400-7223 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3277-5 Linear Actuators (internal), connection 1/4 NPT0430-1544 Seal hose for attachment to Type 3277-5 Linear Actuators (internal)

1400-7730 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3241 Control Valves, nominal size DN 15 to 100

1400-7735 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3351 Control Valves, nominal size DN 15 to 501400-7736 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3351 Control Valves, nominal size DN 65 to 801400-7737 Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 3351 Control Valves, nominal size DN 100

On request Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for stem valves, nominal size DN 15 to 150

On request Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Series 250 and 280 Control Valves with NAMUR rib,nominal size DN 15 to 400

On request Mounting kit made of stainless steel 1.4301 for Type 324X Control Valves, nominal size DN 200 to 300

Spare parts and accessories

Data Sheet T 3776 EN 2008-01 139

Inductive Limit Switch for Pneumatic Control Valves

Type 3768

ApplicationLimit switch with two incorporated inductive switches andoptionally one 3/2-way solenoid valve for attachment topneumatic control valvesFor rated travels from 7.5 to 120 mm

The limit switch is equipped with two inductive proximityswitches which issue a signal when an adjustable limit is ex-ceeded in either direction.Optionally, the limit switch is also available with an integral3/2-way solenoid valve which registers a binary signal issuedby a control device and converts it into a binary signal pressure.When the solenoid valve is in de-energized state, the actuatormoves the valve to the fail-safe position.– All limit switches can be overridden and can be optionally

used as normally closed or normally open contacts– Versions for use in hazardous areas in type of protection

intrinsically safe EEx ia II C T6 are available (refer to the sum-mary of explosion protection certificates)

– Direct attachment to Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator– Attachment to actuators according to IEC 60534 and

NAMUR recommendations– Attachment to rotary actuators with an interface according to

VDI/VDE 3845

Refer to the Information Sheet T 8350 EN on selection and ap-plication of positioners and limit switches.

Fig. 2 · Type 3768 Limit Switch, opened housing

Fig. 1 · Type 3768 Limit Switch

Data Sheet T 8356 EN 2010-01 141

Principle of operation (Figs. 3 and 4)When the limit switch is attached to the control valve, the valvetravel is transmitted via the pin (1.1) to the lever (1) of the actua-tor. Any change in travel is converted into a rotary motion of theshaft (2). The shaft (2) is fitted with two adjustable metal tags (4)which operate the associated proximity switches (5).For operation of these inductive limit switches, appropriate tran-sistor relays must be connected in the output circuit. The proxim-ity switch assumes high impedance when the metal tag (4) iswithin the inductive field, whereas the sensor assumes low im-pedance when the metal tag is outside the field.When the incorporated solenoid valve is energized, a supplyair pressure is applied to the actuator. The speed of air supply isadjustable at a restriction. When the solenoid valve is de-ener-gized, the actuator is vented and the control valve moves to itsfail-safe position.

Fig. 2 · Functional diagram of the solenoid valve

Table 1 · Technical data · Pressure in bar (gauge)

Travel range Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator: 7.5 … 30 mm

Attachment to IEC 60534 (NAMUR): 7.5 … 120 mm

Inductive proximity switches 2 x Type SJ2 SN

Control circuit Specifications corresponding to connected transistor relay

Hysteresis at rated travel ≤ 1 %

Permissible ambient temperature

–20 °C … 80 °C with plastic cable gland–40 … 80 °C with metal cable gland · Special version down to –45 °C

The limits of the EC Type Examination Certificate apply additionallyfor explosion-protected versions.

Solenoid valve


Input Binary DC voltage signal

Nominal signal 6 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC

Signal “0” (no pick-up) 1) ≤ 1.2 V ≤ 2.4 V ≤ 4.7 V

Signal “1” (safe pick-up) 2) ≥ 5.4 V ≥ 9.6 V ≥ 18.0 V

Internal resistance Ri at 20 °C 2909 Ω 5832 Ω 11714 Ω

KV 0.14 m³/h

Air consumption “Off” ≤ 60 ln/h · “On” ≤ 10 ln/h

Closing time with Type 3277 Actuator 240 cm² 350 cm² 700 cm²

For rated travelwith bench range

0.2 ... 1 bar ≤ 1 s ≤ 1.5 s ≤ 4 s

0.4 … 2 bar ≤ 2 s ≤ 2.5 s ≤ 8 s

0.6 … 3 bar ≤ 1 s ≤ 1.5 s ≤ 5 s

Degree protectionwithout/with solenoid valve

Without IP 65

With IP 54 · IP 65 on request

1) DC voltage signal at –20 °C 2) DC voltage signal at +80 °C

Fig. 3 · Functional diagram

Solenoid coil

Signal pressure

Pressureregulator

Supply air1.4 ... 6 bar

3 Return spring4 Metal tag5 Proximity switch

1 Lever1.1 Coupling pin2 Rotary shaft

142 Data Sheet T 8356 EN 2010-01

Table 2 · Materials

Housing Die-cast aluminumchromated and plastic coated

External parts Stainless steel1.4571 and 1.4104


Ordering textInductive Limit Switch Type 3768- …(refer to article code)

Additional specifications– Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator (120 to 700 cm²)– Attachment according to IEC 60534 (NAMUR)

Travel: ... mm, if applicable, rod diameter: ... mm– Attachment to rotary actuators

Opening angle: …Single-acting or double-acting actuators


Dimensions in mm

A B

+41-42 +51-52 +81-82

_+

Solenoid valve (optional)


28

1429

150

164

19.5

37

68185

76

Supply(9)Output(36)

Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator

Model index .03 or lower: Pg 13.5Model index .04 and higher: M20x1.5

Pneumatic connections 14 NPT or G 1

4

36

N1 = 113N2 = 200

5856

68185

29

164

76

150

50

Attachment acc. to IEC 60534 and NAMUR

44

19.5

393568

185

164

29

50

46 7650

150

82

56 66

28.5

28.5

Output 1(A1)

Output 2(A2)

Supply (Z)

Attachment to rotary actuators(with pneumatic reversing amplifier)

Fulc

rum

Data Sheet T 8356 EN 2010-01 143

Summary of explosion protection approvals




CSA approval LR 54227-14 1992-04-21 Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Type 3 EnclosureType 3768-3

FMRC approval J.I.3020228 2005-02-28 Class I, II, III; Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, GClass I, Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, DClass II, Div. 2, Groups F, G; Class IIINEMA 4X; with inductive limit switches and solenoid valve;Type 3768-3

NEPSI approval GYJ04218X 2004-12-22 Ex ia IIC T4 … T6; valid until 2009-12-21; Type 3768-1

GYJ04219X Ex nL IIC T4 … T6; valid until 2009-12-21; Type 3768-8

Article code

Limit Switch Type 3768 x 2 x 0 0 x x x x 0 x x 0


Without 0 2/7



II 3 G EEx nA II T6 acc. toATEX 8 2/7

Solenoid valve

Without 0

6 V DC 2

12 V DC 3

24 V DC 4


Without 0 0

¼-18 NPT 1

ISO 221/1 - G ¼ 2


Cable gland M20 x 1.5, blue (plastic) 1 0

Cable gland M20 x 1.5, black (plastic) 2 0

Cable gland M20 x 1.5, nickel-plated brass 7 2

Housing version

Aluminum 0

CrNiMo steel 2

Temperature range

Standard 0

–45 … 80 °C 2

Special versions

None 0 0 0

NEPSI approval Ex ia 1 0 0 9

NEPSI approval Ex nL 8 0 1 0


144 Data Sheet T 8356 EN 2010-01

Electric Limit Switchfor hazardous areas

Type 4744

ApplicationLimit switches in type of protection II 2 G EEx ed IIC T6 forattachment to pneumatic control valves according toIEC 60534-6-1For valve travels from 7.5 to 150 mm

The limit switch supplies a limit signal when an adjusted limit isexceeded in either direction, especially when a control valvehas reached a final position. This signal is suitable for reversingcontrol signals, initiating visual or audible alarms and for con-nection to central control or alarm systems.• One or two electric limit switches which can be overridden• High load capacity, for example, alternating current up to

500 V/10 AAttachment to control valves with cast yokes or rod-type yokesaccording to IEC 60534-6-1 and NAMUR recommendation.

Versions– Type 4744 (Figs. 1 and 2) Limit switch with one or two mo-

mentary-contact limit switches designed as a position switchconforming to EN 50041.Each contact is equipped with one NC contact and one NOcontact, acting as snap-action switch, or also switchable as asingle-pole double throw switch (SPDT).

Type of protection "Flameproof Enclosure" II 2 G EEx ed IICT6 according to test certificates PTB 01 ATEX 1053 and II 2 D IP65 T 80 °C according to LCIE ATEX 6308.– Type 4744-2 (Fig. 3) · Limit switch with one momemtary-con-

tact switch for mounting to a rod-type yoke of V2001 SeriesValves

Type of protection "Flameproof Enclosure" II 2 G EEx d IIC T6according to PTB 00 ATEX 1093 X.

Principle of operation of Type 4744 (Fig. 2)When the limit switch is attached to the control valve, the valvetravel is transmitted to the switch lever via the lever. The switchlever actuates the snap-action contact of one of the momen-tary-contact limit switches when the adjusted limit value isreached. This switch can be overridden and is equipped with anoverrange protection. For coarse adjustment (switching point),the momentary-contact limit switch is shifted on the base plate.The adjustment screw is used for fine adjustment. The terminalconnections determine whether the limit switch is used either asan NO contact, an NC contact or a changeover contact (Fig. 4).Refer to Information Sheet T 8350 EN for selection and applica-tion of positioners and limit switches.

Fig. 2 · Type 4744 Electric Limit Switch withtwo momentary-contact switches and protectivecover removed

Fig. 3 · Type 4744-2 Electric Limit Switchpreferably for Series V2001 Valves

24 23 BK BNBU

12 11

Type 4744 Type 4744-2

Fig. 4 · Electrical connection

Fig. 1 · Type 4744 Electric Limit Switchwith protection cover

Data Sheet T 8367 EN 2010-01 145


Limit switch Type 4744 4744-2

Momemtary-contact switch 1 or 2 1

Type of protection Flameproof enclosure,terminal space in increased safety.

II 2 G EEx ed IIC T6 - PTB 02 ATEX 1053II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C - LCIE 03 ATEX 6308

Flameproof enclosure

II 2 G EEx d IIC T6PTB 00 ATEX 1093 X

Permissible load (load capacity) AC voltage

500 V / 10 AUtilization category AC-15 250 V / 5 A

DC voltage

125 V / 10 A250 V / 0.2 A

Utilization category DC-12250 V / 0.4 A

Travel range 7.5 … 100 mmwith extended lever up to max. 150 mm 15 mm

Permissible ambient temperature * –55 … 70 °C –20 … 75 °C

Degree of protection IP 65 IP 66

Weight (approx.) 1.75 kg 0.4 kg

Housing material Glass fiber reinforced polyester Duroplast

* The limits specified in the relevant approval certificate additionally apply for use in hazardous areas.

Summary of approvals


EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 01 ATEX 1053 2001-08-09 II 2 G EEx ed IIC T6; Type 4744

LCIE 03 ATEX 6308 2003-10-10 II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C; Type 4744

DMT 01 ATEX E 178 2001-12-28 II 2 G EEx de IIC T6II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C; Type 4744

PTB 00 ATEX 1093 X 2000-12-07 II 2 G EEx d IIC T6/T5; Type 4744-2

GOST approval B 02637 2009-02-26 2 Ex d IIC T6

23767164.5

117(115-132)

120

60˚

5

8113

7 6330

151

M20x1.5

Dimensions in mm

56

3510

37

68 34

11 53

Ø20

Type 4744-2

Type 4744

146 Data Sheet T 8367 EN 2010-01

Ordering textElectric Limit Switch Type 4744 or

Type 4744-2Momentary-contact switch 1 or 2 functioning as

NO contact or NC contactFor indicating Valve OPEN/Valve CLOSED or

OPEN-CLOSED


Article code

Electric Limit Switch Type 4744- x 0 0 x 1 x 0

Attachment

To NAMUR rib 1 4/5

To rod-type yoke for Type 3372 Actuator 2 1 1

Version

1 double-throw switch 0 0 1 1

2 Series 8070/1-2-S switches 0 0 4

1 Series 8070/1-2-S switch 0 0 5

Special version

None 1

GOST approval (model version -9010) 2

Data Sheet T 8367 EN 2010-01 147

Electronic Limit Switch Type 3738-20

with optional solenoid valvefor on/off rotary actuators

ApplicationElectronic limit switch for on/off applications to indicate the endposition of rotary actuators. Optionally with integrated solenoidvalve.

Special features• Automation of on/off valves• Limit switch and optional integrated solenoid valve united in

a compact housing or with commercially available externalsolenoid valves (Ex ia, Ex e)

• Proven operation concept already used in Series 373xPositioners: Menu-driven, on-site operation using one rotarypushbutton, display easy to read in any mounting position

• Trouble-free integration into existing systemsNAMUR contacts (IEC 60947-5-6)Solenoid valve 24 V DCIntrinsically safe version

• Compact attachment and simple operation• Any mounting position according to VDI/VDE 3845, level 2• Contactless, wear-free magnetoresistive sensor system

No mechanical linkageNo adjustment work necessaryStable measured data and drift-free switching pointsHigh level of accuracy

• Electric power for electronic limit switch supplied over atwo-wire system solely from the NAMUR signal

• Automatic initialization• Easy-to-read LC display with selectable reading direction,

LED for solenoid valve status• Communication connection for convenient parameter set-

tings and documentation• Certified safety, use in safety instrumented systems according

to IEC 61508• Diagnostic functions

Advanced partial stroke test (PST)Rotary motion counterOperating hours counterTransit time measurement

Fig. 1 · Type 3738 Electronic Limit Switchwith open cover

Fig. 2 · Type 3738 mounted on a piston actuator

Data Sheet T 8390 EN 2009-12 149

VersionsType 3738-20-xxx1400xxx000 Electronic Limit Switch withintegrated solenoid valveThe electronic limit switch with integrated solenoid valve form acompact unit together with a suitable rotary actuator, which iseasy to mount. The 3/2-way or 5/2-way function of the sole-noid valve is selected by changing the position of a molded seal.This version can be mounted directly onto a Pfeiffer BR 31b Ro-tary Actuators. The need for additional air connections is elimi-nated.Type 3738-20-xxx1000xxxx00 Electronic Limit Switch for ex-ternal solenoid valveThe electronic limit switch for an external solenoid valve allowsswitching capacities up to max. 18 W at 24 V DC, meaning allcommon solenoid valves, even in the Ex e versions, can be com-bined with the electronic limit switch.

Principle of operationThe electronic limit switch is designed for attachment to rotaryactuators. The angle of rotation is measured without contact us-ing a magnet (on a screw) positioned centrically on the actuatorshaft. The screw with magnet does not need to be adjusted. TheAMR (anisotropic magnetoresistive) sensor located in the devicetogether with the measuring electronics (1) can detect the direc-tional change of the applied magnetic field and, as a result,sense the rotation of the actuator.The rotary actuator is operated by a solenoid valve (7) whichconverts the binary signal issued by electric control equipment(6) into a binary pressure signal.The limit switch for fail-safe position (contact A, 13) and the limitswitch for operating position (contact B, 14) issue a limit signalwhen the valve reaches the corresponding end position. Theswitching points of the contacts can be adjusted within the actua-tor’s range of rotation. Contact C (15) indicates when the PST tar-get range of the advanced partial stroke test has been reached.The fault alarm contact STAT (16) indicates the generation of anystatus and error messages.

Schematic diagrams

SSPinterface

10 9

3

12

B

A

13

C

15

STAT

2

4

6

11 7

81

5 16

14

Signal for solenoidvalve: V1 or V3

PowerSupply

Fig. 3 · Type 3738-20-xxx1400xxx000Version with integrated solenoid valve

SSPinterface

10 9

3

12

B

A

13

C

15

STAT

2

4

6

11

71

5 16

14

Signal for solenoidvalve: V1

V2

PowerSupply

Fig. 4 · Type 3738-20-xxx1000xxxx00Version with external solenoid valve

Legends for Figs. 3 and 41 AMR sensor with measuring

electronics2 A/D converter3 Microcontroller4, 5 Galvanic isolation6 Actuation of solenoid valve

7 Solenoid valve (integrated, external)8 Air capacity booster9 Display10 Rotary pushbutton

(on-site operation)11 LED for solenoid valve12 Internal supply

13 Contact A (limit switch for fail-safe position)14 Contact B (limit switch for operating position)15 Contact C (signal when PST target

range reached)16 Contact STAT (fault alarm contact)

150 Data Sheet T 8390 EN 2009-12

An electronic limit switch version for an external solenoid valveis available for higher air capacities required by large actua-tors.

OperationA rotary pushbutton and LC display are used to operate theelectronic limit switch on site.The functions for start-up, display readings and service func-tions are set over Codes (0 to 28). When a fault occurs, a corre-sponding error code appears on the display.SAMSON’s TROVIS-VIEW can be used to operate the elec-tronic limit switch. An SSP interface on the electronic limit switchis used to connect it to the computer using an adapter cable.

MountingThe Type 3730-20 Electronic Limit Switch is mounted accordingto VDI/VDE 3845, fixing level 2 on rotary actuators using amounting platform.Various mounting parts (accessories) are available dependingon the shaft height of the rotary actuator.

Pneumatic connections:Version with external solenoid valve:The input pressure at the external solenoid valvemust not exceedthe maximum supply pressure (refer to the specifications givenby the solenoid valve manufacturer).

Version with integrated solenoid valve:The supply pressure at the inlet must not exceed 6 bar.

All air pipes and hoses must be thoroughly blown through priorto connecting them. The need for external piping is eliminatedwhen certain pneumatic actuators are used. The air is con-nected over holes in the mounting platform and actuator.

Electrical connectionsThe electronic limit switch is powered by the connection of thelimit switch A. An additional electrical auxiliary power supply isnot required.

Cable entryThe threaded connection for the terminal compartment is de-signed with an M20 x 1.5 thread.The screw terminals are designed for wire cross-sections of1.5 mm². Tighten by at least 0.5 Nm.

Use in safety instrumented systems

Safe indication of end positionsAll switching contacts of the Type 3738-20 Electronic LimitSwitch behave as stipulated in IEC 60947-5-6 and are suitablefor use in safety-related applications up to SIL 2 (single device)and SIL 3 (redundant configuration) according to IEC 61508.

Emergency venting (in preparation)When the optional integrated solenoid valve is used, the elec-tronic limit switch discharges its pneumatic output to the atmo-sphere when the solenoid valve is de-energized. This causes themounted actuator to be vented.


Electronic limit switch Type 3738-20-xxx1400xxx000 3738-20-xxx1000xxxx00

Version With internal solenoid valve For external solenoid valve

Range ofrotation

Minimum 0 to 30°

Maximum 0 to 170°

Commu-nication

Local communication SAMSON SSP interface with serial interface adapter

Software requirements TROVIS-VIEW with database module 3738-20

Supply air Supply pressure 2.4 to 6 bar Same as specifications of the solenoid valvemanufacturer

Air quality Acc. to ISO 8573-1, edition 2004Max. particle size and density: Class 4Oil content: Class 3Moisture and water: Class 3Pressure dew point: At least 10 K beneath thelowest ambient temperature to be expected

Same as specifications of the solenoid valvemanufacturer

Electric power supply Powered over limit switch A

Permissible ambient temperature –25 to 80 °C –40 to 80 °C

The limits specified in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply.

Influences Temperature ± 0.7 %/90° angle over the permissible temperature range

Vibrations ≤ 0.25 % up to 2500 Hz and 4 g according to IEC 770

Electromagnetic compatibility Requirements conforming to EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21

Electrical connections Four M20 x 1.5 cable glands for 6 to 12 mm clamping range, screw terminals for 0.2 to 2.5 mm²wire cross-sections

Explosion protection See certificates in Table 2


Data Sheet T 8390 EN 2009-12 151

Electronic limit switch Type 3738-20-xxx1400xxx000 3738-20-xxx1000xxxx00

Version With internal solenoid valve For external solenoid valve

Safetyapproval

Safe indication of endpositions

– Type 3738-20-xxx1000xxx200:The limit switches are suitable for use in safety-re-lated applications up to SIL 2 (single device) andSIL 3 (redundant configuration) acc. to IEC 61508

Safe venting Being prepared –

Materials Housing Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi12(Fe) (EN AC-44300) acc. to DIN EN 1706, powder paint coated

Housing cover PC

Cover seal PU

Indicating wheel PC

Magnet material Hard ferrite

Weight Approx. 1.2 kg Approx. 1.0 kg

Contacts · Only for connection according to IEC 60947-5-6, reverse polarity protection, galvanic isolation

Switchingcontacts

No response/no fault ≥ 2.1 mA

Response/fault indication ≤ 1.2 mA

Switching function NC contact

Hysteresis 1 %

Contacts Contact ALimit switch for fail-safeposition (solenoid valvede-energized)

PTO (power to open): Responds when the switching point falls below the valuefor lower end position (P5)

PTC (power to close): Responds when the switching point exceeds the value forupper end position (P6)

Contact BLimit switch for operatingposition (solenoid valveenergized)

PTO (power to open): Responds when the switching point exceeds the value forupper end position (P6)

PTC (power to close): Responds when the switching pointfalls below the valuefor lower end position (P5)

Contact B_LB Signal for wire breakage according to IEC 60947-5-6

Contact CSignal when target rangereached during ad-vanced partial stroke test

Responds when the switching point exceeds the MIN value of PST target range (P12)

Contact STATFault alarm contact

Responds when a status message or error message is generated

Integrated solenoid valve (Type 3738-20-xxx1400xxx000)

Version 3/2-way or 5/2-way functionFunction determined by the position of the molded seal

KVS coefficient 0.32

Service life 1,000,000 switching cycles

Temperature range(operation)

–25 to +80 °C

Switching voltage

Nominal voltage 24 V DC, reverse polarity protection, galvanic isolation

Current draw I = 2.7 xU

3650 Ω– 3.325 mA · Corresponding to 14.4 mA at 24 V DC

Signal 0 No response < 15 V DC

Signal 1Min. 18 V DCMin. 32 V DC

Switching capacity 24 V DC, 15.2 mA (0.36 W)

Duty cycle 100 %

Destruction limit 40 V DC

152 Data Sheet T 8390 EN 2009-12


_ +282

Connection acc. to EN 60947-5-6

24 V DC

281_+

8281

24 V DC

V1 V3

PTOPTC

_ +_ +62 6184 83

CSTAT B

+_ _ +414252 51515242 41

A

Fig. 5 · Version with internal solenoid valve (Type 3738-20-xxx1400xxx000)

Connection acc. to EN 60947-5-6

PTOPTC

B_ __ _

4252625242

84+ +++

41515141

6183

ACSTAT

24 V DC,max. 18 W

Acc. to manufacturer´sspecifications

_+_+8281

V1V2

Fig. 6 · Version for external solenoid valve (Type 3738-20-xxx1000xxxx00)

External solenoid valve (Type 3730-20-xxx1000xxxx00)

Read manufacturer’s specifications!

24 V DC, max. 18 W

Table 2 · Explosion protection certificates


EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 08 ATEX 2039 X 2009-03-16 Type 3738-20-110II 2G Ex ia IIC/IIB T6, II 2D Ex iaD A21 IP 66 T80°C

First Addendum 2009-10-20 Type 3738-20-310II 2G Ex e [ia] IIC T4, II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 66 T80°C

Data Sheet T 8390 EN 2009-12 153

Article code

Electronic Limit Switch Type 3738-20 x x x 1 x 0 0 x x x x 0 x

With LC display


Without 0 0 0

II 2G Ex ia IIC/IIB T6, II 2D Ex iaD A21 IP 66 T 80 °C, ATEX 1 1 0

II 2G Ex e [ia] IIC T4, II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 66 T 80 °C 3 1 0 0

Solenoid valve

External 0

Integrated 4 0

Company version

SAMSON 0

AIR TORQUE 1

Housing

Standard aluminum, black structured, RAL 9005 1

Cover

Gray-beige 0

Black 1

Silver-gray 3

Safety approval

None 0

TÜV/IEC 61508 (for safe indication of end positions) 0 2


None 0

231

20

17

97

130185

84

42

10

3040

Fig. 7 · Dimensional drawing for Type 3738-20 Electronic Limit Switch

Dimensions

154 Data Sheet T 8390 EN 2009-12

Ordering textElectronic Limit Switch Type 3738-20Explosion protection Without/withSolenoid valve Integrated or externalCompany version SAMSON/

AIR TORQUEHousing cover version See article codeSafety approval Without/withSpecial applicationsAccessories for mountingTROVIS-VIEW

Table 2 · Accessories Order no.

Attachment to rotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845,fixing level 2

Attachment (20 mm shaft height) 1400-9859



Mounting platform (black) G ¼ 1380-1266

Mounting platform (black) ¼ NPT 1380-1268

TROVIS-VIEW Configuration and Operator Interface software

TROVIS-VIEW with device module 3738-20

Serial interface adapter (SAMSON SSP inter-face – RS-232 port of computer)

1400-7700

Isolated USB interface adapter (SAMSONSSP interface – USB port of computer)

1400-9740

Data Sheet T 8390 EN 2009-12 155

Analog Position Transmitter Type 4748

ApplicationAnalog position transmitter for attachment to control valves aswell as Type 4763 Electropneumatic Positioner or Type 4765Pneumatic Positioner to convert the valve travel into acontinuous output signal between 4 to 20 mAValve travels from 7 to 120 mm

The position transmitter picks up the travel of pneumatic or elec-tric control valves and converts it into a continuous output signalbetween 4 and 20 mA. If this signal is, for example, supplied toan indicating unit, the current valve stem position can be moni-tored.Attachment to actuators with cast yokes (NAMUR) or rod-typeyokes according to IEC 60534 as well as Type 4763Electropneumatic Positioner or Type 4765 PneumaticPositioners.

Special features• Extensive travel range• Reversible operating direction• Any mounting position possible• Extremely insensitive to vibrations• Small hysteresis• Two-wire circuit connectionVersions in type of protection "Intrinsic safety" EEx ia IIC T6 arealso available for hazardous areas.

Versions and article code


Fig. 1 · Type 4748 Position Transmitter

Position Transmitter Type 4748- x 0 x


Without 0 0


II 3 G EEx nA II T6 for Zone 2 acc. to ATEX 8 0


M20 x 1.5 cable gland, black (plastic) 0

M20 x 1.5 cable gland, blue (plastic) 1

Data Sheet T 8363 EN 2009-03 157

Principle of operation (Fig. 2)The travel of the control valve is either transmitted directly to thepin (1.1) and the lever (1) over the plate (20) or, when attachedto the positioner, via a coupling pin. The lever (1) moves in a ro-tary motion which is transmitted to the solenoid system (2). Thiscauses a change in the magnetic field as well as the voltage inthe sensor (2.1) operating according to the Hall effect. The con-nected electronics unit converts the voltage into a load-inde-pendent 4 to 20 mA DC current signal.Depending on the travel range of the control valve, two differentlevers (1) are provided for the position transmitter:Lever I for a travel between 7 and 60 mmLever II for a travel between 60 and 103 mmA special lever is always used to attach the transmitter to apositioner, regardless of the travel.

Adjusting the position transmitter (Fig. 3)The operating direction of the output signal is selecteddepending on the location of a 7-pole connector. The symbolsdirect action >> or reverse action <> indicate the operating di-rection.With direct operating direction (>>), the travel corresponds tozero at a signal of 4 mA and corresponds to the rated travel at20 mA. Whereas, with the reverse operating direction (<>), thetravel corresponds to zero at a signal of 20 mA and to the ratedtravel at 4 mA.ZERO is set with switches 3 and 4, and can be finely adjustedusing the ZERO potentiometer. It is always based on the 4 mAsignal.SPAN and the upper range value are set with switches 1 and 2,and are finely adjusted using the SPAN potentiometer. Thissetting is always based on the 20 mA signal.

2 2.1

1 1.1

20

2.1 3 4 5 6

8 7

_+

24 V

828131

32

Fig. 2 · Functional diagram

Fig. 3 · Adjusters

Travel

Travel

Test terminals

4...2

0m

A

Legend for Fig. 21 Lever for valve travel1.1 Coupling pin2 Solenoid system2.1 Sensor with temperature

resistor3 Measuring amplifier4 Switches and potentiometer

for coarse and fine ZEROadjustment

5 Switches and potentiometerfor coarse and fine SPANadjustment

6 Output stage7 Constant-voltage source8 Constant-current source20 Plate for attachment to actuator

or to plug stem of valve

Connector foroper. direction

Coarse adjustmentSPANZERO

Fine adjustmentZEROSPAN

158 Data Sheet T 8363 EN 2009-03


Type 4748-0 4748-1

Output Two-wire circuit 4 to 20 mA

Permissible load R =U – 12 V

20 mAB

S

Output circuit – Intrinsically safe

Auxiliary power Two-wire network 24 V

Voltage range12 to 45 V

For connection to intrinsically safecircuits with maximum values

Uo = 25 V, IK = 100 mA, P = 0.8 W(effective internal inductance and capacitance

are negligibly small) 1)

Characteristic Characteristic: Output linear to inputDeviation from terminal-based conformity: ≤ 1 % 2)

Hysteresis ≤ 0.6 % 3)

Response ≤ 0.1 %

Influence on auxiliary power ≤ 0.1 % on span changes within the specified limits

HF effect ≤ 1 %, f = 150 MHz, 1 Watt transmission power, 0.5 m distance

Effect of vibration No effect between 10 and 150 Hz and 4 g

Load influence ≤ 0.1 %

Permissible ambient temperature –20 to +70 °C · The limits specified in the EC Type Examination Certificateadditionally apply for explosion-protected devices.

Effect of ambient temperature ≤ 0.3 %/10 K on lower measuring range value and span 2)

Ripple of the output signal ≤ 0.3 %

Travel ranges min./max. 1 Attachment to Type 4763/4765 Posistioners: 7 … 60 mm2 Lever I: 7 … 60 mm

Lever II: > 60 … 103 mm (up to 120 mm on request)Materials Housing: Die-cast aluminum, plastic coated

External parts: 1.4571, black anodized aluminum


Degree of protection With direct attachment: IP 65When attached to a positioner: IP 54 (IP 65 on request), refer to EB 8363 EN

1) e.g. SAMSOMATIC Type 994-0103-KFD2-STC4-Ex1 Loop Isolator2) At max. travel 100 % = 32° lever angle3) At max. travel 100 % = 8° lever angle

Summary of explosion-protection approvalsThe test certificates are included in the Mounting and Operating Instructions or are available on request




Data Sheet T 8363 EN 2009-03 159


Test connection at terminals 81 and 82:After removing the jumpers, an ammeter can be connected.

Ordering textPosition Transmitter Type 4748-x 0 x– Without explosion protection, intrinsically safe or

non-sparking for Zone 2 (see article code)– Not attached

For attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)– With lever I (148 mm) or lever II (201 mm)– For attachment to positioner– Optionally, special version/accessories

Dimensions in mm


81 82 31 32

+ _ + _Jumpers

Ammeter Power supply unit

8315

27.5

94

64

44.5

74M20x1.5

20.6

79

Fastening screw M8

Air connection forseparate air supply

Dim

ensi

ons

for

leve

rII:

201

mm

32

148

30

7177

160 Data Sheet T 8363 EN 2009-03

Field barrier Solenoid valvesSupply pressure regulator Service unit modelPneumatic remote adjuster Pneumatic lock-up valveReversing amplifierPneumatic volume booster

Solenoid Valves and Accessories

161

ApplicationField barrier with flameproof enclosure serving as an interfacebetween intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits inhazardous areas.

The field barrier is suitable for operating positioners, smartpositioners with HART® communication, i/p converters, sole-noid valves or limit switches.Devices with HART® communication need an adaptation, whichis available e.g. with Type 3730-3 and Type 3730-6Positioners.Upstream connection and direct attachment to intrinsically safefield devices enable the intrinsically safe circuits of these devicesto be connected with the circuits of upstream input and outputunits that are not intrinsically safe. In this way, the advantagesof intrinsic safety, such as commissioning and operation whenconnected to a voltage source, are still in effect within the haz-ardous area.The connecting cable of the non-intrinsically safe circuit is intro-duced in the housing of the field barrier either via pipeline sys-tems or via design-certified cable or conduit entries.The field barrier transmits the analog reference variable to i/pconverters and positioners. The use of HART protocol is alsopossible.The field barriers must be connected to the equipotential bond-ing system either via the negative conductor (non-floating) orvia the line between the positive and the negative conductor(floating). The selection of the appropriate version (withgrounding via negative conductor or via connecting line) mustcorrespond to the grounding method of the analog output of thecontroller or control system.The version with three channels allows the connection of twolimit switches according to EN 60947-5-6 or one intrinsicallysafe solenoid valve and one limit switch.An M20 x 1.5 adapter allows for a direct connection throughthe cable entry of the field devices.

Principle of operationChannel 1 of the field barrier is especially designed for trans-mitting analog signals in the range of 4 to 20 mA, but it alsotransmits the HART protocol.Channels 2 and 3 are intended for controlling limit switches ac-cording to EN 60947-5-6 or Ex i solenoid valves (e.g.Type 3767 Positioner with a solenoid valve coil for 6 V).

AttachmentThe field barrier possesses a connecting adapter with an M20 x1.5 male thread, allowing direct mounting on an intrinsicallysafe field device, such as a Type 3730-3 Positioner. If the wiringmethod is used, the cable ends must be connected to an Ex ijunction box.The input is fitted with a ½” female thread or an M20 x 1.5female thread connection.

Fig. 1 · Type 3770 Field Barrier, attached to positioner

Field Barrier Ex d/Ex i

Type 3770

II 2 G EEx d [ia] IIC T6

Data Sheet T 8379 EN 2010-02 163

Electrical connectionsThe individual current circuits of the Type 3770 Ex d/Ex i FieldBarrier are electrically connected with internal and externalequipotential bonding terminals.For safety reasons, the intrinsically safe circuits must be con-nected to the equipotential bonding system. The connection be-tween the equipotential bonding terminal and the equipotentialbonding system must be as short as possible.

The selection of the grounding method of the barrier must corre-spond to the grounding method of the analog output of the con-troller or control system, i.e. either the connecting line betweenthe negative and the positive conductor of Channel 1 (Fig. 2) orthe negative conductor of Channel 1 (Fig. 3) has to be con-nected to the equipotential bonding system.


Type of protection EEx d [ia] IIC T6

Connection Channel 1: Ch 1 +/– Channels 2 and 3: Ch 2 +/– and Ch 3 +/–

Operational values (0) 4 ... 20 mA or UN ... 15 V orlimit switches acc. to EN 60947-5-6

not suitable for transmitter supply

(0) 4 ... 20 mA or UN ... 10 V orlimit switches acc. to EN 60947-5-6

not suitable for transmitter supply

Input Um = 250 V

Fuse rating IN = 80 mA (slow-acting)

Output circuit EEx ia IIC

Max. valuesacc. to EC Type ExaminationCertificate

U0I0P0C0L0

≤ 17.2 V≤ 110 mA≤ 473 mW

360 nF/IIC · 2.1 μF/IIB3 mH/IIC · 12 mH/IIB

≤ 12.6 V≤ 49 mA

≤ 154 mW1.15 μF/IIC · 7.4 μF/IIB15 mH/IIC · 56 mH/IIB

Series resistance RLmax 190 Ω 285 Ω

Load impedance 3.8 V at 20 mA 5.7 V at 20 mA

Permissible ambient temperature –45 °C ≤ ta ≤ 60 °C T6

Enclosure material Die-cast aluminum, painted or stainless steel (AISI 316)

Degree of protection IP 65 according to IEC 529

CH1

CH2

+

_

+

_

+

_

2

1

4

3

6

5

CH3

Ex ia

Ex ia

Ex ia

CH1

CH2

+

_

+

_

+

_

2

1

4

3

6

5

CH3

Ex ia

Ex ia

Ex ia

Fig. 2 · Circuit diagram for Type 3770-1310Channel 1 floating

Fig. 3 · Circuit diagram for Type 3770-1410Channel 1 non-floating

Equipotentialbonding terminal


164 Data Sheet T 8379 EN 2010-02

Dimensions in mm Electrical connections

M20 x 1.5

Explosion protection certificates for Type 3770 Field Barrier


EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 98 ATEX 1025X 1998-06-08 II 2 G EEx d [ia] IIC T6

First Addendum 2000-10-10 Channel 1 non-floating

GOST approval B 02637 2009-02-26 1 Ex d [ia] IIC T6

Circuitry

Fig. 4 · Field barrier (one channel interconnected) with

Hazardous area

Safe area Ex d installation Ex i field device

Analog control signal

Equipotentialbondingterminal

Hazardous area

Safe area Ex d installation Ex i field device

Analog control signal

Binary signal

Binary signal

Fig. 5 · Field barrier (three channels interconnected) withpositioner, solenoid valve and limit switch mounted ona pneumatic control valve


PACh1 Ch2 Ch3

EiA/gn/ge1 2 3 4 5 6

TerminalcompartmentEx d

(0)4 to 20 mA Isolating amplifiercontrol signal acc. to EN 60947-5-6 foror isolating limit switches oramplifier acc. to solenoid valve up to 10 VEN 60947-5-6 or or (0)4 to 20 mAsolenoid valveup to 15 V

Output withmarkedcable ends Ex i

Green/yellow

Data Sheet T 8379 EN 2010-02 165

Article code

Field barrier acc. to ATEX Type 3770- 1 x x x 0 x x x

Three channels4 to 20 mA, floatingand two 2 circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6

3

Three channels4 to 20 mA, non-floatingand two 2 circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6

4


Female thread ½ NPT 1

Female thread M20 x 1.5 3

Housing material

Die-cast aluminum 0

Stainless steel AISI 316 1

Special version

None 0 0 0

GOST approval 0 0 1

166 Data Sheet T 8379 EN 2010-02

Type 3701 Solenoid Valve

ApplicationSolenoid valve for controlling pneumatic linear actuators withNAMUR rib according to IEC 60534 or pneumatic rotaryactuators with NAMUR interface acc. to VDI/VDE 3845

Low power binary signals issued by automation equipment orfieldbus systems can be used for controlling purposes. Intrin-sically safe versions can also be implemented.

Features• High level of operational reliability owing to the flapper/

nozzle assembly and booster valve with a diaphragm actua-tor

• Standard version for nominal signals 6, 12, 24 V DC, 24,48, 115 or 230 V AC

• Type of protection ”Intrinsic safety” II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6,“non-sparking“ II 3 G EEx nA II T6 according to ATEX,CSA and FM, for nominal signals of 6, 12 or 24 V DC

• 6 to 27 mW or 0.04 to 0.46 VA power consumption, de-pending on nominal signal

• Electrical connection over M20 x 1.5 cable gland or option-ally with plug connector

• Corrosion-resistant housing in degree of protection IP 54 orIP 65

• Versions compatible with paint/free of silicone on request• Air supply 1.4 to 6 bar• Service life: More than 20 million switching cycles• Ambient temperature –45 to 80 °C, depending on type of

protection, temperature class and seals• Typetesting performed by TÜV Rheinland for safety-related

applications according to DIN 3393 Part 1, DIN EN 161,DIN 32 725 and optionally according to DIN 32 730

• Suitable for safety shut-off valves up to SIL 4 according toIEC 61508 (optional)

• Cable breakage protection available

Versions– 3/2-way or 5/2-way solenoid valve with Kvs = 0.25– Special switching functions on request– The actuator can be vented or alternatively filled with air in

the neutral position of the 3/2-way solenoid valve– Attachment to linear actuators with NAMUR rib or rod-type

yoke as well as to rotary actuators with NAMUR interface– Interfaces for special attachment available on request

Fig. 1 · Type 3701 Solenoid Valve

E

P

E

P

E

P

9 481+82-

81+82-

1.3 2.3

9 481+82-

1.3

9 4

1.3

3/2-way* 5/2-way

Type 3701-xx0 Type 3701-xx2Neutral position “Actuator vented”

Type 3701-xx1Neutral position “Actuator filled with air”

* Versions for rotary actuatorscontain an internal exhaust air feedback

Fig. 2 · Switching symbols for 3/2-way and 5/2-waysolenoid valves

Data Sheet T 3701 EN 2006-06 167

Table 1 · Technical data for Type 3701 Solenoid Valve

General data

Construction Solenoid with flapper/nozzle assembly and diaphragm switching elements

Degree of protection IP 54 with filter · IP 65 with filter check valve

Material Enclosure Al Mg, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019

NAMUR adapter plate Al Mg, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019

Screws 1.4571

Springs 1.4310

Seals Silicone rubber, Perbunan

Diaphragm Chloroprene rubber 57 Cr 868 (–20 ... +80 °C) · Silicone rubber (–45 ... +80 °C)

Ambient temperature See “Electrical data”

Mounting position Any position

Weight Approx. 450 g

Electrical data

Nominal signal UnUmax

6 V DC27 V

12 V DC25 V

24 V DC32 V

24 V AC36 V

48 V AC80 V

115 V AC130 V

230 V AC255 V

f − 48 ... 62 Hz

Switchingpoint

On U80 °C ≥ 4.8 V ≥ 9.6 V ≥ 18 V ≥ 19...36 V ≥ 42...80 V ≥ 82...130 V ≥ 183...255 V

I20 °C ≥ 1.41 mA ≥ 1.52 mA ≥ 1.57 mA ≥ 1.9 mA ≥ 1.9 mA ≥ 2.2 mA ≥ 2.6 mA

P20 °C ≥ 5.47 mW ≥ 13.05 mW ≥ 26.71 mW ≥ 0.04 VA ≥ 0.07 VA ≥ 0.17 VA ≥ 0.46 VA

Off–25 °C U ≤ 1.0 V ≤ 2.4 V ≤ 4.7 V ≤ 4.5 V ≤ 9 V ≤ 18 V ≤ 36 V

Input impedance R 2.6 kΩ 5.5 kΩ 10.7 kΩ Appr. 10 kΩ Appr. 24 kΩ Appr. 40 kΩ Appr. 80 kΩTemperature effect 0.4 %/°C 0.2 %/°C 0.1 %/°C 0.1 %/°C 0.1 %/°C 0.05 %/°C 0.03 %/°C

Type of protection 1) “Intrinsic safety” II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6“Non-sparking” II 3 G EEx nA II T6

Without explosion protection

Output voltage 2) Ui [V] 25 · 27 · 28 · 30 · 32 −Output current 2) Ii [mA] 150 · 125 · 115 · 100 · 85 −Power dissipation Pi 250 mW No limitation −External inductance 2) Li Negligible −External capacitance 2) Ci Negligible −Ambient temperature 7) –20 ... +60 °C (temperature class T6)

–20 ... +70 °C (temperature class T5)–20 ... +80 °C (temperature class T4)

–45 ... +80 °C

Connection See “Article code”

Pneumatic data

Type 3701 -xx0 / -xx1 -xx2

Safety function TÜV 3) · SIL 4 4)

Version 3/2-way function 5/2-way function

Kvs 4) 0.25 0.25

Air supply Medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles and nitrogen

Pressure 1.4 ... 6 bar

Operating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles 5) · Air containing oil, nitrogen, non-corrosive gases 6)

Operating pressure Max. 6 bar

Output signal Operating pressure

Air consumption ≤ 80 ln/h at 1.4 bar, supply air in neutral position≤ 10 ln/h at 1.4 bar, supply air in operating position

Switching time 7) ≤ 65 ms

Service life ≥ 2 x 107 switching cycles (at –20 ... +80 °C)≥ 2 x 106 switching cycles (at –45 ... +80 °C)

Connection G ¼ (¼ NPT)

1) EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 01 ATEX 2178 and Statement of Conformity PTB 02 ATEX 2014 X2) Permissible maximum specifications when connected to a certified intrinisically safe circuits3) Report No. S 63/00 (mounted on control valves as per DIN 3394 Part 1, DIN EN 161, DIN 32725, DIN EN 264 and DIN 32730);

Report No. V 64/2004, part 1 (SIL 4 according to IEC 61508).4) Air flow at p1 = 2.4 bar and p2 = 1.0 bar can be calculated according to the equation: Q = Kvs x 36.22 in m3/h.5) With internal air supply (delivered status).6) With external air supply (see mounting and operating instructions).7) Permissible ambient temperature –45 °C with diaphragm and seals made of silicone rubber and metal cable gland.

168 Data Sheet T 3701 EN 2006-06

7422

9(8)

92

1.3

4

2.3

94

19

24

M20x1,5

19

2921

9(8)

14

66

11

24

4

1.3/2.3

M8

9(8)

14

194

1.3

2.329

21

M8

66

Ø5

10 11

12

5

86

Attachment and dimensions (in mm) of the Type 3701 Solenoid Valve

Attachment acc. NAMUR, e.g. to Series 240, 250 valves Attachment with clamping plate to valves with rod-type yoke(10, 11 - Support with clamping plate, order no. 1400-5742)

Attachment to valves in DN 15 to 80 with attached positioner (12 - Distance piece, order no. 1400-5905)

Dimensions for attachment according to NAMUR Dimensions for attachment to adapter plate

M20 x 1.5

Adapter plate withNAMUR interface 1400-5235

Data Sheet T 3701 EN 2006-06 169

Table 2 · Article code

Solenoid valve Type 3701- x x x x x x x x x x

Type of protection

Without explosion protection 0

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6, Zone 1 acc. to ATEX 1

CSA/FM EEx ia 3

II 3 G EEx nA II T6, Zone 2 acc. to ATEX 8

Nominal signal

6 V DC 1

12 V DC 2

24 V DC 3

230 V AC (without explosion protection) 5




Switching function

3/2-way, NC, KVS = 0.25, (circuit 1) 0

3/2-way, NO, KVS = 0.25, (circuit 2) 1

5/2-way, KVS = 0.25 2

Attachment

NAMUR interface for rotary actuators (incl. adapter plate 1400-5235) 0

NAMUR rib for linear actuators 1

For rotary actuators additionally requiring a NAMUR adapter plate 1400-5235 2

Threaded connection

G ¼ 0

¼ NPT 1


Without cable gland, fitted with blanking cap 0 0

Black cable gland M20 x 1.5 0 1

Blue cable gland M20 x 1.5 1 1

Adapter M20 x 1.5 to ½ NPT 1 2

Black CEAG cable gland, M20 x 1.5 1 3

Cable gland M20 x 1.5, brass 1 4

Harting connector, without cable socket 2 1

Connector M12 x 1, nickel-plated brass, without cable socket 2 2

Connector Form A acc. to DIN EN 175 301-803, without cable socket 2 3

Binder connector, without cable socket 2 4

Degree of protection

IP 54 0

IP 65, with filter check valve made of polyamide 1

IP 65, with filter check valve made of 1.4571 2

IP 20 3

Ambient temperature

–20 … 80 °C 0

–45 … 80 °C 2

Safety approval

None 0

SIL 4 (only for 3/2-way function) 1

TÜV (only for 3/2-way function) 2

170 Data Sheet T 3701 EN 2006-06

List of approvals

Type of approval Certificate number Date Type of connection / Comment



TÜV approval St 1947 1987-04-15 Without explosion protection, DC and AC voltage;Type 3701-1

GOST approval 2002.C303 2002-12-26 Valid until 2008-01-01; Type 3701-1

FM approval J.I. 3020228 2005-02-28 Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A, B, C, D, E, F, GCl. I, Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6Cl. I, Div. 2, Gr. A, B, C, DCl. II, Div. 2, Gr. F, G; Cl. III; NEMA 3R; Type 3701-3

CSA approval LR 54227-3LR 54227-33

1988-10-251998-10-15

Cl. I, Div. 1, Gr. A, B, C, D; Type 3 EnclosureCl. I, Div. 2, Gr. A, B, C, D; coil 1079-22;Type 3701-3

TÜV S63/00 2000-09-06 Mounted on control valves acc. to DIN 3394-1,DIN EN 161, DIN 32 725, DIN EN 264 andDIN 32 730

SIL 4 V 60 2004 T1 2004-07-05 Safety integrity level according to IEC 60508

AccessoriesOrder no. Description1400-5235 Adapter plate for rotary actuators with NAMUR interface as per VDI/VDE 38451400-5342 Mounting parts for valves with rod-type yokes as per NAMUR1400-5905 Mounting parts for Series 240 in DN 15 to 80, in case positioner and/or limit switch is to be mounted as well0790-6658 Cable socket according to EN 175301-803, Form A, made of polyamide, black, degree of protection IP 651400-8298 Cable socket (Harting), 7-pole, made of aluminium, silver, degree of protection IP 658831-0716 Cable socket (Binder), 7-pole, made of PBT GF, black, degree of protection IP 678831-0865 Cable socket M12 x 1, 4-pole, angled design, made of polyamide, black, degree of protection IP 678801-2810 Sensor connecting lead, two-wire, 3 m in length, blue, with angle connector M12 x 1, 4-pole8504-0066 Polyethylene filter, connection G ¼, degree of protection IP 54

Filter check valve made of polyamide or 1.4571, degree of protection IP 65 or NEMA 4. Refer to Data Sheet Z 900-7

Data Sheet T 3701 EN 2006-06 171

Solenoid Valve Type 3963

Fig. 1

5/2-way solenoid valve,single actuated with spring return mechanism,Kvs 0.16, connection G 1/4

3/2-way solenoid valve,single actuated with spring return mechanism,Kvs 4.3, connection G 1/4

5/2-way solenoid valve,double actuated with two locking positions,Kvs 1.4, connection G 1/4/NAMUR

General notes

The Type 3963 Solenoid Valves ensure a high level of operationalreliability and fast response times for controlling pneumatic actuators in hazardous areas.

Intrinsically safe, low-power binary signals issued by automationor fieldbus systems can be used for controlling purposes.

The Type 3963 Solenoid Valves offer a variety of switching functions, flow rates and connections for all desired applications(Fig. 1).

Special features of the Type 3963 Solenoid Valves include:

General

● Safety Integrity Level SIL 4 according to IEC 61508 (optional)● Safety function for use on control valves (optional)● Corrosion-resistant enclosure with degree of protection IP 54

or IP 65 for applications in humid, aggressive environments● Versions compatible with paint (on request)● Service life more than 20 millions switching cycles● Ambient temperature range �20 to �80 °C or �45 to �80 °C● Rail mounting, wall mounting or mounting with pipe fittings● Attachment to linear actuators with NAMUR rib according to

IEC 60534-6-1 or to rotary actuators with NAMUR interface according to VDI/VDE 3845

Pilot valve

● E/P binary converter with flapper/nozzle assembly● Nominal signal 6/12/24 V DC or 24/48/115/230 V AC● Type of protection II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 or II 3 G EEx nA II T6

according to ATEX, additional certifications according to CSA, FM, GOST and NEPSI

● Power consumption 6 to 27 mW or 0.04 to 0.46 VA, depending on the nominal signal

● Manual override as pushbutton or pushbutton switch (optional)

● Air supply 1.4 to 6 bar● Electrical connection using a cable gland M 20 �1.5 to

terminals or using a plug-type connector● Cable break protection device (accessory)

Booster valve

● Diaphragm with return spring or piston, single or double actuated

● 3/2, 5/2, 5/3 or 6/2-way function● Exhaust air return (optional)● Kvs 0.16 to 4.3● Supply air/exhaust air restrictors for adjusting different

closing and opening times in a ratio of 1:15 (optional)● Threaded connection G (NPT) 1/4 or 1/2● NAMUR interface 1/4“ or 1/2“

Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 173

Versions with threaded connection

Type 3963 Solenoid Valves for continuous and on-off actuators

81�82�

EP

1.54

1.3

9 2.5

2.3

Type 3963-XXX1011XXXXXX0Solenoid Valve● 5/2-way function● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Rail mounting or wall mounting

1.41.5

1.39

81�82�

EP

2.42.5

2.3

Type 3963-XXX8011XXXXXX0Solenoid Valve● 6/2-way function● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Rail mounting or wall mounting

9

3

81�82�

EP

Type 3963-XXX0011X0XXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Rail mounting, wall mounting or

mounting with pipe fittings to on-off linear actuators, e. g. SAMSON’s Type 3271 or 3277

9

3

81�82�

EP

Type 3963-XXX0111X0XXXX0Solenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Adjustable exhaust air restrictor● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Rail mounting, wall mounting or

mounting with pipe fittings to on-off linear actuators, e. g. SAMSON’s Types 3271 or 3277

81�82�

EP

45

3

9

Type 3963-XXX0022XXXXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Kvs 0.32● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Safety function SIL 4/TÜV● Attachment to linear actuators with

NAMUR rib, e. g. SAMSON’s Type 3271 (see Fig. 3)

81�82�

EP

Type 3963-XXX013141XXXX0Solenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Adjustable exhaust air restrictor● Kvs 0.16● Attachment via a connection block to

SAMSON’s Type 3277 Linear Actuator with SAMSON’s Type 3730, 3766, 3767 or 378X Positioner (see Fig. 2)

81�82�

EP

Type 3963-XXX003240XXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Kvs 0.32● Safety function SIL 4/TÜV● Attachment via a connection block to

SAMSON’s Type 3277 Linear Actuator with SAMSON’s Type 3730, 3766, 3767 or 378X Positioner (see Fig. 2)

81�82�

EP

45

3

9

Type 3963-XXX0012XXXXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Kvs 0.32● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Safety function SIL 4/TÜV● Rail mounting, wall mounting or

mounting with pipe fittings to linear actuators, e. g. SAMSON’s Type 3271 or 3277

Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5

174 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE

Type 3963-XXX2013XXXXXXXSolenoid Valve● 5/2-way function

with two locking positions● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Safety function TÜV● Wall mounting or mounting with pipe

fittings

81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE

Type 3963-XXX3013XXXXXX0Solenoid Valve● 5/3-way function

with spring-centered mid-position(connections 2 and 4 closed)

● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Wall mounting or mounting with pipe

fittings

81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE

Solenoid ValveType 3963-XXX5013XXXXXXX● 5/3-way function

with spring-centered mid-position(connections 2 and 4 vented)

● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Safety function TÜV● Wall mounting or mounting with pipe

fittings

9 981� 81�82� 82�

EP

35

4

1

2

PE

Type 3963-XXX4013XXXXXX0Solenoid Valves● 5/3-way function

with spring-centered mid-position(connections 2 and 4 to air supply)

● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Wall mounting or mounting with pipe

fittings

81�82�

EP

39 5

4

1

2

Type 3963-XXX1013XXXXXX0Solenoid Valve● 5/2-way function● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Wall mounting or mounting with pipe

fittings to linear actuators, e. g. SAMSON’s Type 3271 or 3277

81�82�

EP

39

4

1

2

Type 3963-XXX0013XXXXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Exhaust air return● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4● Safety function TÜV● Wall mounting or mounting with pipe


81�82�

EP

1.41.5

1.3

9 2.52.4

2.3


fittings

81�82�

EP

45

3

9

Type 3963-XXX0014XXXXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Kvs 4.3● Connection G (NPT) 1/2● Safety function SIL 4/TÜV● Wall mounting or mounting with pipe


81�82�

EP

1.41.5

1.3

9 2.42.5

2.3


fittings

Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Fig. 9

Versions with threaded connection


Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 175

Versions with NAMUR interface


4

1.3

81�82�

EP

2.3

2.39

Type 3963-XXX0301XXXXXX0Solenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Adjustable supply air/exhaust air

restrictors● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Mounting to on-off rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface or with adapter plate (order no. 1400-6751) to linear actuators with NAMUR rib, e. g. SAMSON’s Type 3241-1 (see Fig. 12)

81�82�

EP

4 2.3

1.3

9

2.3

Type 3963-XXX0002XXXXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Exhaust air return● Kvs 0.32● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Safety function SIL 4/TÜV● Mounting to rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface, optionally with apositioner (see Fig. 10)

4

1.3

81�82�

EP

2.3

Type 3963-XXX1001XXXXXX0Solenoid Valve● 5/2-way function● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Mounting to on-off rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface (see Fig. 10)

1.41.5

1.39

81�82�

EP

2.42.5

2.3

Type 3963-XXX8001XXXXXX0Solenoid Valve● 6/2-way function● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Mounting to rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface

4

1.3

81�82�

EP

2.3

Type 3963-XXX0001X0XXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Exhaust air return● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Safety function SIL 4/TÜV● Mounting to on-off rotary actuators with


4

1.3

81�82�

EP

2.3

Type 3963-XXX0101X0XXXX0Solenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Exhaust air return● Adjustable exhaust air restrictor● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Mounting to on-off rotary actuators with


4

1.3

81�82�

EP

2.3

Type 3963-XXX1201X0XXXX0Solenoid Valve● 5/2-way function● Two adjustable exhaust air restrictors● Kvs 0.16● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Mounting to on-off rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface (see Fig. 10)

Fig. 12Fig. 11Fig. 10

81�82�

EP

4 5

3

9

5

Type 3963-XXX0007XXXXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Exhaust air return● Kvs 2.0● Connection G (NPT) 1/4, 1/2/NAMUR 1/4“● Safety function SIL 4/TÜV● Mounting to on-off rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface 1/8“ or 1/4“or with adapter plate (order no. 1400-6751) to linear actuators with NAMUR rib

Fig. 13

176 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with two locking positions● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Safety function TÜV● Mounting to rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface

81�82�

EP

39 5

4

1

2

Type 3963-XXX1003XXXXXX0Solenoid Valve● 5/2-way function● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Mounting to rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface or with adapter plate (order no. 1400-6751) to linear actuators with NAMUR rib

81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with spring-centered mid-position(connections 2 and 4 closed)

● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Mounting to rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface

81�82�

EP

39

4

1

2

Type 3963-XXX0003XXXXXXXSolenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Exhaust air return● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Safety function TÜV● Mounting to rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface or with adapter plate (order no. 1400-6751) to linear actuators with NAMUR rib

81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with spring-centered mid-position(connections 2 and 4 vented)

● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Safety function TÜV● Mounting to rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface

9 981� 81�82� 82�

EP

35

4

1

2

PE


with spring-centered mid-position(connections 2 and 4 to air supply)

● Kvs 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR● Mounting to rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface

Fig. 15 Fig. 16

Versions with NAMUR interface


81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with two locking positions● Kvs 2.9● Connection G (NPT) 1/2/NAMUR 1/2“● Mounting to rotary actuators with

NAMUR interface 3/8“ or 1/2“

Fig. 18

Fig. 17

81�82�

EP

39 5

4

1

2

Type 3963-XXX1006XXXXXX0Solenoid Valve● 5/2-way function● Kvs 2.9● Connection G (NPT) 1/2/NAMUR 1/2“● Mounting to rotary actuators with


81�82�

EP

4 5

3

9

5

Type 3963-XXX0004XXXXXXX Solenoid Valve● 3/2-way function● Exhaust air return● Kvs 4.3● Connection G (NPT) 1/2/NAMUR 1/2“● Safety function SIL 4/TÜV● Mounting to on-off rotary actuators with


Fig. 14

Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 177

�81

�82

Nominalsignal

� �

�

� ��

�

�

�

�

9Change-overto externalair supply

5

3

4

Functional diagramFunction

Solenoid valves with single actuation

The solenoid valves consist of an E/P binary converter � withmanual override � (optional) and a single actuated boostervalve � with return spring (Fig. 18).

The booster valve � supplies the E/P binary converter � inter-nally with the supply air (delivery state). Rotating a flat gasket al-lows the E/P binary converter � to be supplied with external airsupply via connection 9.

The pressure reducer � reduces the air supply pressure to 1.4 bar.

In the normal position the flapper � is lifted off the outlet nozzle� by the spring �. As a result, a pressure lower than the switch-off pressure of the booster valve � builds up in the pressure divider that consists of the restriction � and the outlet nozzle �.

When the solenoid � is energized by an electrical binary signal,the outlet nozzle � is closed by the flapper � against the forceof the spring �. As a result, the pressure in the pressure dividerrises above the switch-on pressure of the booster valve �, thusswitching it to the operating position.

After de-energizing the electrical binary signal, the booster valve� will be switched to the normal position by a return spring.

Solenoid valves with double actuation

The solenoid valves consist of two E/P binary converters � withmanual override � (optional) and a double-actuated boostervalve � with two locking positions or spring-centered mid-posi-tion.

The booster valve � supplies the E/P binary converters � inter-nally with the supply air (delivery state). Rotating two flat gasketsallows the E/P binary converters � to be supplied with externalair supply via connections 9.

The pressure reducer � reduces the air supply pressure to 1.4 bar.

In the normal position, the flapper � is lifted off the outlet nozzle� by the spring �. As a result, a pressure lower than the switch-off pressure of the booster valve � builds up in the pressure divider that consists of a restriction � and an outlet nozzle �.

When the solenoid is energized by an electrical binary signal,the outlet nozzle � is closed by the flapper � against the forceof the spring �. As a result, the pressure in the pressure dividerrises above the switch-on pressure of the booster valve �, thusswitching it to the operating position.

After de-energizing the electrical binary signal, the operatingposition of the detented booster valve � will be retained until areverse signal is received. After de-energizing the electrical binary signal the spring-centered booster valve � will beswitched to the mid-position by a return spring.

Energizing both E/P binary converters � at the same time mustbe prevented by appropriate electrical control.

Fig. 19 · Solenoid valve with diaphragm element asbooster valve (Kvs 0.16)

178 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

1) Permissible maximum value at continuous duty. For Ex versions, the permissible maximum value Ui applies2) II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 according to EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 01 ATEX 20853) II 3 G EEx nA II T6 according to Statement of Conformity PTB 01 ATEX 2086 X4) The Ui/Ii values apply to nominal signals 6/12/24 V DC

Technical data

General data of the solenoid valvesConstruction Solenoid with flapper/nozzle assembly and booster valveDegree of protection IP 54 with filter,

IP 65 with filter check valveMaterial Enclosure Polyamide PA 6-3-T-GF35, black

Connection plate Al Mg, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019,Stainless steel 1.4404 (special versions see “Versions and ordering data“),Polyamide PA 6-3-T-GF35, black

Screws Stainless steel 1.4571Springs Stainless steel 1.4310Gaskets Silicone rubber, PerbunanDiaphragms Chloroprene 57 Cr 868 (�20 to �80 °C),

Silicone rubber (�45 to �80 °C)Air supply Medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, or nitrogen

Pressure 1.4 to 6 barAir consumption � 80 l/h at 1.4 bar air supply in normal position,

� 10 l/h at 1.4 bar air supply in operating positionSwitching time � 65 msSwitching cycles 2 �107 (at �20 to �80 °C),

2 �106 (at �45 to �80 °C)Ambient temperature see „Electrical data“Mounting position As desired (see Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 3963 EN)

Electrical data of the solenoid valvesType 3963 -X1 -X2 -X3 -08 -07 -06 -05Nominal signal UN 6 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC 24 V AC 48 V AC 115 V AC 230 V AC

Max. 27 V 1) Max. 25 V 1) Max. 32 V 1) Max. 36 V 1) Max. 80 V 1) Max. 130 V 1) Max. 255 V 1)fN 48 … 62 Hz

Switching point U�80 °C 4.8 V 9.6 V 18 V 19 … 36 V 42 … 80 V 82 … 130 V 183 … 255 V“On“ I �20 °C 1.41 mA 1.52 mA 1.57 mA 1.9 mA 1.9 mA 2.2 mA 2.6 mA

P �20 °C 5.47 mW 13.05 mW 26.71 mW 0.04 VA 0.07 VA 0.17 VA 0.46 VA“Off“ U�25 °C � 1.0 V � 2.4 V � 4.7 V � 4.5 V � 9 V � 18 V � 36 V

Impedance R �20 °C 2.6 k 5.5 k 10.7 k Approx. 10 k Approx. 24 k Approx. 40 k Approx.80k

Temperature effect 0.4 %/°C 0.2 %/°C 0.1 %/°C 0.1 %/°C 0.1 %/°C 0.05 %/°C 0.03 %/°CType of protection EEx ia IIC 2) for use in hazardous areas (zone 1)Type 3963 -11 -12 -13Permissible maximum values for connection to a certified intrinsically safe circuitOutput voltage 4) Ui 25 V 27 V 28 V 30 V 32 VOutput current 4) Ii 150 mA 125 mA 115 mA 100 mA 85 mAPower dissipation Pi 250 mW No LimitationExternal capacitance Ci � 0External inductance Li � 0Ambient temperature in temperature class

T6 �45 … �60 °CT5 �45 … �70 °CT4 �45 … �80 °C

Type of protection EEx nA II 3) for use in hazardous areas (zone 2 or 22)Type 3963 -81 -82 -83Ambient temperature in temperature class

T6 �45 … �60 °CT5 �45 … �70 °CT4 �45 … �80 °C

Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 179

Technical data

Solenoid valves with single actuation, Kvs 0.16 or 0.32Switching function 3/2-way function 3/2-way function 5/2-way function 6/2-way functionKvs

1) 0.16 0.32 0.16 0.16Safety function SIL 4 3), TÜV 4) SIL 4 3), TÜV 4) TÜV 4) –Construction Diaphragm element, soft-seated type, with return springOperating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles 4), oil-containing air or noncorrosive gases 5)Operating pressure max. 6 barOutput signal Operating pressureAmbient temperature 2) �45 to �80 °CConnection G (NPT) 1/4

Weight approx. 570 g (standard version)

Solenoid valves with single actuation, Kvs 4.3, threaded connectionSwitching function 3/2-way function 3/2-way function 5/2-way function 6/2-way functionKvs

1) 1.9 (4→3), 1.5 (3→4) 1.9 (4→3), 1.5 (3→4) 1.9 (4→3), 1.5 (3→4) 1.9 (4→3), 1.5 (3→4)(in direction of flow) 4.3 (3→5), 4.7 (5→3) 4.3 (3→5), 4.7 (5→3) 4.3 (3→5), 4.7 (5→3) 4.3 (3→5), 4.7 (5→3)Ambient temperature 2) �20 to �80 °C �45 to �80 °C �20 to �80 °C �20 to �80 °CSafety function SIL 4 3), TÜV 4) TÜV 4) – –Construction Seat valve, soft-seated type, with return springMaterial Enclosure GD AlSi 12, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019,

stainless steel 1.4404 (special versions see “Versions and ordering data“)Diaphragm Chloroprene Silicone rubber Chloroprene ChloropreneGaskets Chloroprene Silicone rubber Chloroprene ChloropreneScrews Stainless steel 1.4571

Actuation Single actuated by one pilot valve, Kvs 0.16Operating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, or nitrogen 5),

instrument air, free of corrosive particles, oil-containing air or noncorrosive gases 6)Operating pressure max. 10 bar (4→3, 3→5) 10 bar (4→3, 3→5) 10 bar (as desired) 10 bar (as desired)(in direction of flow) 2 bar (as desired) 2 bar (as desired) 2 bar (as desired) 2 bar (as desired)Switching cycles 107 ( 6 bar) 106 ( 6 bar) 107 ( 6 bar) 107 ( 6 bar)(operating pressure) 106 (10 bar) 105 (10 bar) 106 (10 bar) 106 (10 bar)Connection G (NPT) 1/2

Weight approx. 585 g (standard version) 1 100 g (standard version)

1) Air flow at p1 = 2.4 bar and p2 = 1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q = Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h2) The permissible maximum temperature of the solenoid valve depends on the permissible ambient temperature of the components, the

type of protection and the temperature class3) Safety Integrity Level SIL 4 according to IEC 61508 (Report No. V 60 2004 T1)4) Safety function for use on control valves according to DIN 3394 Part 1, DIN EN 161, DIN 32725, DIN EN 264 and DIN 32730

(Report No. S 284 2007 E1)5) With internal air supply6) With external air supply7) NAMUR interface according to VDI/VDE 3845

Solenoid valves with single actuation, Kvs 2.0 or 4.3, with NAMUR interfaceSwitching function 3/2 way function with exhaust air returnKvs

1) 1.1 (4→3) 1.1 (4→3) 1.9 (4→3) 1.9 (4→3)(in direction of flow) 2.0 (3→5) 2.0 (3→5) 4.3 (3→5) 4.3 (3→5)Ambient temperature 2) �20 to �80 °C �45 to �80 °C �20 to �80 °C �45 to �80 °CSafety function SIL 4 3), TÜV 4) TÜV 4) SIL 4 3), TÜV 4) TÜV 4)Construction Seat valve, soft-seated type, with return springMaterial Enclosure GD AlSi 12, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019,

stainless steel 1.4404 (special versions see “Versions and ordering data“)Diaphragm Chloroprene Silicone rubber Chloroprene Silicone rubberGaskets Chloroprene Silicone rubber Chloroprene Silicone rubberScrews Stainless steel 1.4571

Actuation Single actuated by one pilot valve, Kvs 0.16Operating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, or nitrogen 5),

Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, oil containing air or noncorrosive gases 6)Operating pressure max. 10 bar 10 bar 10 bar 10 barSwitching cycles 107 ( 6 bar) 106 ( 6 bar) 107 ( 6 bar) 106 ( 6 bar)(operating pressure) 106 (10 bar) 105 (10 bar) 106 (10 bar) 105 (10 bar)Connection air supply G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR interface 1/4“ 7), G 3/8 G (NPT) 1/2/NAMUR interface 1/2“ 7)

exhaust air G (NPT) 1/2/NAMUR interface 1/4“ 7), G 3/8 G (NPT) 1/2/NAMUR interface 1/2“ 7)Weight approx. 1 380 g (standard version) 1 500 g (standard version)

180 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

Technical data

Solenoid valves with single actuation, Kvs 1.4 or 2.9Switching function 3/2-way function 5/2-way function

with exhaust air returnKvs

1) 1.4 or 2.9Safety function TÜV 2) (for Kvs 1.4) –Construction Piston valve, metal-to-metal seating, without overlap, with return springMaterial Enclosure GD AlSi 12, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019,

stainless steel 1.4404 (special versions see “Versions and ordering data“)Gaskets SiliconeFilter PolyethyleneScrews Stainless steel 1.4571

Actuation Single actuated by one pilot valve, Kvs 0.01 (at 1.4) or Kvs 0.16 (at 2.9)Operating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, or nitrogen 3),

instrument air, free of corrosive particles, oil-containing air or noncorrosive gases 4)Operating pressure max. 6 bar 3) or 10 bar 4)Ambient temperature 5) �45 to �80 °CSwitching cycles 2 �107

Connection Kvs 1.4 G (NPT) 1/4 or NAMUR interface 6 )Kvs 2.9 G (NPT) 1/2 or NAMUR interface 6 )

Weight approx. Kvs 1.4 485 g (standard version)Kvs 2.9 1 760 g (standard version)

Solenoid valves with double actuation, Kvs 1.4 or 2.9Switching function 5/2-way function 5/3-way function 5/3-way function 5/3-way function

with two locking with spring-centered with spring-centered with spring-centeredpositions mid-position, connections mid-position, connections mid-position, connections

2 and 4 closed 2 and 4 vented 2 and 4 to air supplyKvs

1) 1.4 or 2.9 1.4 (2.9 on request) 1.4 (2.9 on request) 1.4 (2.9 on request)Safety function TÜV 2) (for Kvs 1.4) – TÜV 2) (for Kvs 1.4) –Construction Piston valve, metal-to-metal seating, without overlapMaterial Enclosure GD AlSi 12, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019,

stainless steel 1.4404 (special versions see “Versions and ordering data“)Gaskets SiliconeFilter PolyethyleneScrews Stainless steel 1.4571

Actuation Double actuated by two pilot valves, Kvs 0.01 (at 1.4) or Kvs 0.16 (at 2.9)Operating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, or nitrogen 3),

instrument air, free of corrosive particles, oil-containing air or noncorrosive gases 4)Operating pressure max. 6 bar 3) or 10 bar 4)Ambient temperature 5) �45 to �80 °CSwitching cycles 2 �107

Connection Kvs 1.4 G (NPT) 1/4 or NAMUR interface 6)Kvs 2.9 G (NPT) 1/2 or NAMUR interface 6)

Weight approx. Kvs 1.4 685 g (standard version)Kvs 2.9 2 180 g (standard version)

1) Air flow at p1 = 2.4 bar and p2 = 1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q = Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h2) Safety function for use on control valves according to DIN 3394 Part 1, DIN EN 161, DIN 32725, DIN EN 264 and DIN 32730

(Report No. S 284 2007 E1)3) With internal air supply4) With external air supply5) The permissible maximum temperature of the solenoid valve depends on the permissible ambient temperature of the components, the

type of protection and the temperature class6) NAMUR interface according to VDI/VDE 3845

Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 181

CableglandM 20�1.5

ThreadedplugM 20�1.5

61

� 62

31 38

80

� 62

31



61

63

31 38 31

� 62 � 62


Pilot valve, Kvs 0.16

Pilot valve, Kvs 0.01

Dimensions of devices without threaded connection


182 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

1919

3 959(4)

Connection 9 on Type 3963-XXX0X11X0XXXXXConnection 4 on Type 3963-XXX0X12XXXXXXX

Connections 5 and 9 only on Type 3963-XXX0X12XXXXXXX



31

109

61 31 38

10

29

10

� 62

40 40

� 62

28 38 48

123

321

1

2

3

M 4 / 7 mm depthM 3 / 6 mm depth 3 mm / 3.5 mm depth

Underneath view of connection plate

2.5 1.594

1.3 2.3



� 62

25

10

31

124

61 31

10

2538

40 40

28 38 48

123

1

2

3




Dimensions of devices with threaded connection

5/2-way solenoid valve, single actuated, Kvs 0.16

3/2-way solenoid valve, single actuated, Kvs 0.16 or 0.32


Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 183


1.4 2.4

1.3 2.32.5 1.5

9


31

129

61 31 38

34

10

49

� 62

39

24

25

42

40

� 62

28 38 48

123

1

1

2

3




3/2-way solenoid valve, single actuated, Kvs 0.16 or 0.32, for attachment with connection block to linear actuators




24

22.5

22.512

* Attachment to connection block with 2 hexagon socket head screws M 5�60 DIN 912

60

61 31 38 31

108.

5

16

12

16 60

*

*



184 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

Plug G 1/4

64

53

1/2" 21 21

29

35

65

7

1/2"

1/2"

193

31

5053

34

94.5

38

62

31

9

4

5

3

99

Int






Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 185

43

64

38

100

135 11

22

34

53 35

194

65

21 21

53

94.5

531

50

64 29



Plug G 1/4

G 1/2

G 1/2

G 1/2

M 6




186 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02


M 6

22

38

100

135 11

6465

Plug G 1/4

G 1/2


G 1/2

G 1/2

64 29

21 21

53 35

194

94.5

50

31 34

53

43

5




Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 187

61 31

4.3

32

50.8

22 2214

32


Plug G 1/4


1/4"

14 13

56

44.4

47

122

Int

9

47

Connection 5 is closed on 3/2-way valve


Plug G 1/4


61 31

32

50.8

4.3

14

4

2

12

3

1

5

14 56

17

1/4"

122

4747

44.4

Int

9 9

9

9 Int

122

22 22


3/2 or 5/2-way solenoid valve, single actuated, Kvs 1.4

5/2 or 5/3-way solenoid valve, double actuated, Kvs 1.4



188 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

67

42

12 12

10

5.3

603418

8.5

25

1.3

2.3

G 1/4

6

11

30

3016.8

60°

1.32.3

32 12

Underneath view of connection plate70 12

8.4

62

801419

40

62

3

4

G 1 / 4



61 31

109

236

60°

16.8

38 31

40

10

19

9

5


Dimensions of devices with threaded connection for linear actuators with NAMUR rib

Adapter plate NAMUR rib/NAMUR interface (order no. 1400-6751)



Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 189

1.3 2.3

4

12.525

6232

61

62

88

63

31

69

25

96

24

36

38 31



NAMUR fixing level

4

2.3

1.3 2.3

9

61

13

62

114

62

17

38

3424

31 31

36

69

25

32 62

96

5

22.2

18.5



NAMUR fixing level


Dimensions for devices with NAMUR interface for rotary actuators




190 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

1.4 2.4

9

2.5 1.5

1.3 2.3

32

61

102

31

25

10

2524

4939

25

24

67

25

16

56

36

38 31

62

10

NAMURfixing level



61 31

5.3

22

12

32

50.8

5

4

2

3



Connection 5 is closed on 3/2-way valve

7234 38

31

16

2936

4747

44.4

122

99

Int.

1/4"



Dimensions of devices with NAMUR interface for rotary actuators



Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 191

3/2-way solenoid valve, single actuated, Kvs 4,3





192 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02


64

ø 6

ø 6

45

661

24

49

71

79

169.

5

77,2

5

G 1/4

1

5

3



1/2"

1/2"1/2"

1/2"

1/2" 1

9.

int.

ext.

61 31

20

NAMURinterface

1/4"Plug



5

1

3

4

2

9 9

Int

9

9 Int

5.3

122

122

72

61 31 3834

12 44.4

4747

31



1/4"


5/2 or 5/3-way solenoid valve, double-actuated, Kvs 1.4

Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 193


1/4"Plug

1/2"1/2"

1/2"

1/2"

1/4"Plug

61 31

ø 6

ø 6

66

1

5

3

64

20

5/2-way solenoid valve, double-actuated, Kvs 2.9



170

1

32

71

ext.

int.

9.

ext.

int.

9.

1


1/4G

1/2"

NAMURinterface

77.2

5

194 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

Type 3963 Solenoid Valve Order no. 3963- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Type of protection Without explosion protection 0 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 (ATEX/GOST) 1) (max.�60/70/80 °C in T6/T5/T4) 1Ex ia IIC (CSA) and AEx ia IIC (FM) (max.�60/70/80 °C in T6/T5/T4) 3II 3 G EEx nA II T6 (ATEX) 2) (max.�60/70/80 °C in T6/T5/T4) 8

Nominal signal 6 V DC, power consumption 5.47 mW 112 V DC, power consumption 13.05 mW 224 V DC, power consumption 26.71 mW 3

230 V AC, power consumption 0.46 VA (without explosion protection) 5115 V AC, power consumption 0.17 VA (without explosion protection) 6

48 V AC, power consumption 0.07 VA (without explosion protection) 724 V AC, power consumption 0.04 VA (without explosion protection) 8

Manual override Without manual override SIL 4/TÜV 0Pushbutton underneath enclosure cover SIL 4/TÜV 1Pushbutton, pin-actuated, accessible from outside 2Pushbutton switch, screwdriver-actuated, accessible from outside 3

Switching function 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism SIL 4/TÜV (for all Kvs) 05/2-way function with spring return mechanism (Kvs 0.16/1.4/2.9/4.3) 15/2-way function with two locking positions TÜV (Kvs 1.4/2.9) 25/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 closed) (Kvs 1.4) 35/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 to air supply) (Kvs 1.4) 45/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (connections 2 and 4 vented) TÜV (Kvs 1.4) 56/2-way function with spring return mechanism (Kvs 0.16/4.3) 8

Restrictors Without restrictors SIL 4/TÜV (for all Kvs) 01 exhaust air restrictor (3/2-way function/NAMUR interface or connection block/Kvs 0.16) 12 exhaust air restrictors (5/2-way function/NAMUR interface/Kvs 0.16) 21 supply air/1 exhaust air restrictor (3/2-way function/NAMUR interface/Kvs 0.16) 3

Attachment NAMUR interface according to VDI/VDE 3845 SIL 4/TÜV (for all Kvs) 0Threaded connection SIL 4/TÜV (Kvs 0.16/0.32/1.4/2.9/4.3) 1NAMUR rib according to IEC 60534-6-1 SIL 4/TÜV (Kvs 0.32) 2Connection block for SAMSON Type 3277 Linear Actuator SIL 4/TÜV (Kvs 0.16/0.32) 3Flange Type 3963, only as spare part (Kvs 0.01/0.16) 4

Kvs value 3) 0.16 SIL 4/TÜV 10.32 SIL 4/TÜV 21.4 TÜV 34.3 SIL 4/TÜV 40.01, only as spare part 52.9 (NAMUR interface) 62.0 SIL 4/TÜV (NAMUR interface) 7

Air connection G 1/4 (Kvs 0.16/0.32/1.4) 01/4 NPT (Kvs 0.16/0.32/1.4) 1G 1/2 (Kvs 2.9/4.3) 21/2 NPT (Kvs 2.9/4.3) 3None (Pilot valve as spare part/connection block for SAMSON Type 3277 Linear Actuator) 4

Connection of Internal connection for on-off actuators 0air supply External connection for continuous actuators 1Electrical connection Cable gland made of polyamide, black (min. �20 °C) 0 1

Terminal, 2 poles, Cable gland made of polyamide, blue (min. �20 °C) 1 1threaded connection Adapter 1/2 NPT made of aluminum, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019 (min. �45 °C) 1 2M 20 �1.5 EExe cable gland (manufactured by CEAG) made of polyamide, black (min. �20 °C) 1 3

Cable gland made of brass, nickel-plated (min. �45 °C) 1 4Cable gland made of brass, nickel-plated, blue (min. �45 °C) 1 5

Plug-type connection Male connector (manufactured by Harting), 8 poles, made of aluminum, silvery gray 4) (min. �20 °C) 2 1Round plug connector M 12 �1, 4 poles, made of brass, nickel-plated 4) (min. �45 °C) 2 2Male connector according to EN 175301-803, 4 poles, made of polyamide, black 4) (min. �20 °C) 2 3

Degree of protection IP 54 with filter made of polyethylene (min. �20 °C) 0IP 65 with filter check valve made of polyamide (min. �20 °C) 1IP 65 with filter check valve made of stainless steel 1.4305 (min. �45 °C) 2

Ambient temperature 5) �20 to �80 °C 0�45 to �80 °C 2

Safety function Without safety function 0SIL 4 6) 1TÜV 7) 2

Special version Without special version 0 0 0Material Connection plate/booster valve enclosure made of stainless steel 1.4404 for the following versions:

3/2-way function with spring return mechanism, Kvs value 0.32, with NAMUR interface or for NAMUR rib3/2-way function with spring return mechanism, Kvs value 1.4, with NAMUR interface or threaded connection 0 0 15/2-way function with spring return mechanism, Kvs value 1.4, with NAMUR interface or threaded connection5/2-way function with two locking positions, Kvs value 1.4, with NAMUR interface or threaded connection

Explosion protection NEPSI Ex ia 0 0 9NEPSI Ex nL 0 1 0


1) According to EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 01 ATEX 20852) According to Statement of Conformity PTB 01 ATEX 2086 X3) Air flow at p1 = 2.4 bar and p2 = 1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q �Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h4) The female connector is not included in the delivery (see “Spare parts and accessories“)5) The maximum permissible ambient temperature of the solenoid valve depends on the permissible ambient temperature of the components, the type of protection and the

temperature class6) Safety Integrity Level SIL 4 according to IEC 61508 (Report No. V 60 2004 T1)7) Safety function for use on control valves according to DIN 3394 Part 1, DIN EN 161, DIN 32725, DIN EN 264 and DIN 32730 (Report No. S 284 2007 E1)

Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 195

Spare parts for Type 3963 Solenoid ValvesOrder no. Designation0430-2287 Flat gasket made of silicone rubber, �45 to �80 °C (for connection plate)8502-1091 Molded gasket (for air supply on booster valve with Kvs 1.4)

0520-0620 Diaphragm made of chloroprene, �20 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)0520-0622 Diaphragm made of chloroprene, �20 to �80 °C (for all booster valves, except with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)0520-1097 Diaphragm made of silicone rubber, �45 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)0520-1128 Diaphragm made of silicone rubber, �45 to �80 °C (for all booster valves, except with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)

1180-8311 Actuating element insert, �20 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)1180-8553 Actuating element insert, �45 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)

8421-0021 O-ring 2 �1 (for connection plate)8421-0308 O-ring 11 �4.5 (for booster valves with NAMUR interface)8421-9002 O-ring 16 �2 (for booster valves with NAMUR interface)8421-0085 O-ring 26 �2, �20 … �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)8421-0418 O-ring 26 �2, �45 … �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)8421-0102 O-ring 36 �2, �20 … �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)8421-0101 O-ring 36 �2, �45 … �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs 2.0 or 4.3)

Enclosure cover without filter (for pilot valve)1099-0673 without manual override1099-0674 with pushbutton switch, screwdriver-actuated, accessible from outside1099-0675 with pushbutton, pin-actuated, accessible from outside1099-1194 with lever switch, accessible from outside

0070-0799 Plug G 1/4 made of stainless steel 1.4571 (for connection 9 on the pilot valve)8421-0070 O-ring 14 �1.5 made of NBR (for plug G 1/4)

Accessories for Type 3963 Solenoid ValvesOrder no. Designation0790-6658 Female connector according to EN 175301-803, type A, made of polyamide, black, IP 651400-8298 Female connector (manufactured by Harting), 7 poles, made of aluminum, silvery gray, IP 658801-2810 Sensor connecting cable, 2 wires, length 3 m, blue, with angle connector M 12 �1, 4 poles, IP 688831-0716 Female connector (manufactured by Binder), 7 poles, made of PBT GV, black, IP 678831-0865 Female connector M 12 �1, 4 poles, angle type, made of polyamide, black, IP 67

3994-0158 Cable break protection device with enclosure for top hat rail 35, IP 20 (for Type 3963-X1 with 6 V DC solenoid)

1400-5268 Filter made of polyethylene, connection G 1/G 1/2, IP 54 (required for actuator size � 1 400 cm2!)8504-0066 Filter made of polyethylene, connection G 1/4, IP 548504-0068 Filter made of polyethylene, connection G 1/2, IP 54

1790-7408 Filter check valve with screw-in case G 1/4, made of polyamide, IP 651790-7253 Filter check valve with screw-in case G 1/4, made of stainless steel 1.4571, IP 651790-9645 Filter check valve with screw-in case G 1/4, made of polyamide, NEMA 41790-9646 Filter check valve with screw-in case G 1/4, made of stainless steel 1.4571, NEMA 4

1400-5930 Mounting base for G profile 32 according to EN 50035 (2 pieces are required!)1400-5931 Mounting base for top hat rail 35 according to EN 50022 (2 pieces are required!)1400-6726 Mounting plate for wall mounting

Connection blocks and accessories for attaching solenoid valves to Type 3277 Linear ActuatorsOrder no. Designation

Connection block for Type 3277 Linear Actuators with integral Type 3766/3767/3780/3730 Positioner attachment1400-8813 Connection G 1/41400-8814 Connection 1/4 NPT

1400-6950 Pressure gauge build-on block, 1 �“Output“ and 1 �“Supply“, made of stainless steel/brass (for connection block)

Piping kit for “Stem retracts“1400-6444 Actuator size 240 cm2, made of steel, galvanised1400-6445 Actuator size 240 cm2, made of stainless steel1400-6446 Actuator size 350 cm2, made of steel, galvanised1400-6447 Actuator size 350 cm2, made of stainless steel1400-6448 Actuator size 700 cm2, made of steel, galvanised1400-6449 Actuator size 700 cm2, made of stainless steel


196 Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02

Mounting kits for Type 3963 Solenoid Valves with threaded connectionOrder no. Designation1400-6759 Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 80/240 cm2, connection G 1/4)

with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of stainless steel

Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 350/700 cm2, connection G 3/8)1400-6735 with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/2/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6761 with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel

1400-6736 Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 1 400 cm2, connection G 3/4)with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/2/G 3/4, made of stainless steel

1400-6737 Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 2 800 cm2, connection G 1)with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/2/G 1, made of stainless steel

Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 80/240 cm2, connection G 1/4)with angle bracket made of stainless steel

1400-6749 and screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of steel, galvanised1400-6750 and screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of stainless steel

Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 350/700 cm2, connection G 3/8)with angle bracket made of stainless steel

1400-6738 and screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanised1400-6739 and screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6743 and screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6744 and screwed joints for pipe 10 �1, connection G 1/2/G 3/8, made of polyamide1400-6745 and screwed joints for pipe 10 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of polyamide

Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 700 cm2, connection G 3/8)with angle bracket made of stainless steel

1400-6740 and screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/2/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanised1400-6741 and screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanised1400-6742 and screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/2/G 3/8, made of stainless steel


Mounting kits for Type 3963 Solenoid Valves with NAMUR interfaceOrder no. Designation

Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 350/700 cm2, connection G 3/8) with NAMUR ribvia adapter plate NAMUR rib/NAMUR interface (order no. 1400-6751)

1400-6746 with screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanised1400-6747 with screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6748 with screwed joints for pipe 10 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of polyamide


1400-6752 with screwed joints for pipe 6 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of steel, galvanised1400-6753 with screwed joints for pipe 6 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of stainless steel1400-6756 with screwed joints for hose 10 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of polyamide


1400-6754 with screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanised1400-6755 with screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6757 with screwed joints for pipe 10 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of polyamide

1400-6759 Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 80/240 cm2, connection G 1/4)with screwed pipe connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of stainless steel

1400-3001 Mounting kit for Type 3353 Angle Seat Valvewith adapter plate for NAMUR interface made of stainless steel 1.4301

Accessories for mounting kitsOrder no. Designation0320-1416 Bracket for NAMUR rib

(required when a positioner or a limit switch is to be mounted to linear actuators with nominal size � DN 50 at the same time)

8320-0131 Hexagon socket head screw M 8 �60 – A 4 DIN 931

1400-6751 Adapter plate NAMUR rib/NAMUR interface, connection G 1/41400-9924 Adapter plate NAMUR rib/NAMUR interface, connection 1/4 NPT

Data Sheet T 3963 EN 2010-02 197

General

The Type 3967 Solenoid Valve is used to control rotary actuatorswith NAMUR interface or linear actuators with NAMUR rib.

Intrinsically safe, low-power binary signals issued by automationor fieldbus systems can be used for controlling purposes.

Different nominal signals and connection types allow the solenoidvalve to be tailor-made to the specific task. Special features ofthe Type 3963 Solenoid Valve include:

General features

● Safety Integrity Level SIL according to IEC 61508(Report No. V 177 2009 T1)

● Service life with over 20 million switching cycles● Ambient temperature �45 to �80 °C● Corrosion-resistant enclosure with degree of protection IP 65

for humid and aggressive environments ● NAMUR interface 1/4" according to VDI/VDE 3845 for rotary

actuators or connection block with positioner for SAMSON Type 3277 Linear Actuators

● Adapter plate for linear actuators with NAMUR rib according to IEC 60534-6-1, panel, wall or rail mounting

Electric features

● E/P binary converter with flapper/nozzle assembly● Type of protection (ATEX):

II 2 G Ex ia IIC T6 (gases in zone 1), II 3 G Ex nA II T6/II 3 G Ex nL II T6 (gases in zone 2), II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 80 °C (dusts in zone 21), II 3 D Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 80 °C (dusts in zone 22)

● Nominal signal 6/12/24 V DC● Power consumption 6 to 27 mW● Manual override● Connection to terminals with cable gland M 16 �1.5

Pneumatic features

● Plug/seat valve with return spring● 3 /2-way function● KVS value 0.32● Air supply 1.4 to 10.0 bar● Operating pressure max. 10.0 bar● Threaded connection G (NPT) 1/4● Restrictor plate (accessories)

Fig. 1 · Type 3967 Solenoid Valve

Solenoid Valve Type 3967for the control of pneumatic actuators

Version with NAMUR interface 1/4"

Version with restrictor plate

Version with adapter plate

Versions

Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01 199

Function

The solenoid valve consists of an E/P binary converter � withmanual override � and a single actuated booster valve � withreturn spring (Fig. 2).

The air supply for the E/P binary converter � is connected inter-nally over connection 1 or externally over connection 9. Rotatinga flat gasket allows the connection to external air supply (seeMounting and Instruction Manual EB 3967 EN).

The pressure reducer � reduces the air supply pressure to 1.4bar.

In the normal position the flapper � is lifted off the outlet nozzle� by the spring �. As a result, a pressure lower than the switch-off pressure of the booster valve � builds up in the pressure divider that consists of the restriction � and the outlet nozzle �.

When the solenoid � is energized by an electrical binary signal,the outlet nozzle � is closed by the flapper � against the forceof the spring �. As a result, the pressure in the pressure dividerrises above the switch-on pressure of the booster valve �, thusswitching it to the operating position.

After de-energizing the electrical binary signal, the boostervalve � is switched to the normal position by a return spring.

�

�

� �

�

� ��

�

�

�

9

�

External air supply

Nominal signal

Fig. 2

Function diagram

� E/P binary converter� Outlet nozzle� Flapper� Spring� Solenoid� Pressure reducer� Restrictor

� Manual override� Booster valve

200 Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01

Technical Data

General dataConstruction Solenoid with flapper/nozzle assembly and booster valveMaterial Enclosure Polyamide PA 6-3-T-GF35, black

Connection plate AlMgSiPb, powder-coated, blackBlind plate AlMgSiPb, powder-coated, blackAdapter plate AlMgSiPb, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019, or stainless steel 1.4404Screws Stainless steel A2-70Springs Stainless steel 1.4310Gaskets Silicone rubber

Air connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR interface 1/4"Electrical connection Screw terminal, 2-poles, with cable gland M 16 �1.5Degree of protection IP 65Ambient temperature 1) �20 … �80 °C,

�45 … �80 °CWeight approx. 450 g,

800 g with adapter plate

1) The permissible maximum ambient temperature depends on the permissible ambient temperature of the cable gland, the type of protection and the temperature class

Electrical dataType 3967 -XXX1 -XXX2 -XXX3Nominal signal UN 6 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC

max. 27 V 1) max. 40 V 1) max. 60 V 1)Switching point “On“ U�80 °C 4.8 V 9.6 V 18 V

P �20 °C 5.47 mW 13.05 mW 26.71 mW“Off“ U�25 °C � 1.0 V � 2.3 V � 4.6 V

Impedance R �20 °C 2.6 k 5.3 k 10.5 k

Temperature effect to R 0.4 %/°C 0.2 %/°C 0.1 %/°CType of protection Ex ia IIC 2) for use in hazardous areas (zone 1 or 21)Type 3967 -1101 -1102 -1103Permissible maximum values for connection to a certified intrinsically safe circuitOutput voltage Ui The following values Ui/Ii apply for nominal signals 6/12/24 V DC:

25 V/150 mA, 27 V/125 mA, 28 V/115 mA, 30 V/100 mA, 32 V/85 mAOutput current IiPower dissipation 3) Pi 250 mW No limitationsExternal capacitance Ci � 0External inductance Li � 0Ambient temperature in temperature class

T6 �45 to �60 °CT5 �45 to �70 °CT4 �45 to �80 °C

Type of protection Ex nA II/Ex nL IIC 4) for use in hazardous areas (zone 2 or 22)Type 3967 -8101 -8102 -8103Permissible maximum values for connection to a certified energy-limited circuitOutput voltage Ui 32 VOutput current Ii 132 mAPower dissipation Pi No limitationExternal capacitance Ci � 0External inductance Li � 0Ambient temperature in temperature class

T6 �45 to �60 °CT5 �45 to �70 °CT4 �45 to �80 °C

1) Permissible maximum values during 100 % duty. For Ex versions the permissible maximum value Ui is relevant.2) II 2 G Ex ia IIC T6 (gases in zone 1),

II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 80 °C (dusts in zone 21)according to EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 06 ATEX 2027

3) The permissible maximum power dissipation at 6 V DC and a rectangular characteristic is 250 mW. With a linear characteristicthere are no limitations.

4) II 3 G Ex nA II T6/II 3 G Ex nL IIC T6 (gases in zone 2),II 3 D Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 80 °C (dusts in zone 22)according to Certificate of Conformity PTB 06 ATEX 2028 X

Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01 201

Technical data

Pneumatic dataSwitching function 3/2-way function with spring return mechanismKVS value 1) 0.32Safety function SIL 2)Construction Plug/seat valve with return springAir supply Medium Instrument air, free of corossive particles, or nitrogen

Pressure 1.4 … 10.0 bar 3),1.4 … 6.0 bar (at 0 … 6.0 bar operating pressure) 4),1.9 … 10.0 bar (at 0 … 10.0 bar operating pressure) 4)

Operating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, or nitrogen 3),Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, oil containing air or noncorrosive gases 4)

Operating pressure 1.4 … 10.0 bar 3),0 … 10.0 bar 4)

Output signal Operating pressureAir consumption � 25 l/h (actuated),at 1.4 bar air supply � 80 l/h (unactuated)Switching time � 65 msSwitching cycles 2 �107

1) Air flow at p1� 2.4 bar and p2 �1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q � KVS �36.22, expressed in m3/h2) Safety Integrity Level SIL according to IEC 61508 (Report No. V 177 2009 T1)3) With interneral air supply4) With external air supply

202 Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01

61.6

24

32

91

61.6

25

1

23

NAMUR interface 1/4" according to VDI/VDE 3845

G (NPT) 1/4

9

16

16

�24

243258

.4

88.6

��

�

� �

�

�

Version with NAMUR interface 1/4" according to VDI/VDE 3845


Dimensions

� 3 � Self-tapping screw DIN 7964 – M 5 �20� 2 � Filter 1/4"� 4 � Screw ISO 3506-1 – M 4 �18� 2 � Hexagon socket head screw ISO 4762 – M 5 �80� 2 � Split washer DIN 127 – form B 5� 1 � Blanking plug M 16 �1.5� 1 � Cable gland M 16 �1.5 2 � O-ring 14 �1.5

Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01 203

24

32

91

61.6

25

1

23


G (NPT) 1/4

9

16

61.6

32 24

78.4

108.

6

��

�

� �

�

�

20

16

�24

Version with NAMUR interface 1/4" according to VDI/VDE 3845 and restrictor plate


Dimensions

� 3 � Self-tapping screw DIN 7964 – M 5 �20� 2 � Filter 1/4"� 4 � Screw ISO 3506-1 – M 4 �18� 2 � Hexagon socket head screw ISO 4762 – M 5 �80� 2 � Split washer DIN 127 – form B 5� 1 � Blanking plug M 16 �1.5� 1 � Cable gland M 16 �1.5 2 � O-ring 14 �1.5

204 Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01

61.6

24

32

91

61.6

1

23


9

16

�24

243258

.4

88.6

�

�

� �

�

�

�

�

Version with NAMUR interface 1/4" according to VDI/VDE 3845 for connection block with positioner


Dimensions

� 3 � Self-tapping screw DIN 7964 – M 5 �20� 4 � Screw ISO 3506-1 – M 4 �18� 2 � Hexagon socket head screw ISO 4762 – M 5 �80� 2 � Split washer DIN 127 – form B 5� 1 � Blanking plug M 16 �1.5� 1 � Cable gland M 16 �1.5� 2 � O-ring 14 �1.5

Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01 205

61.6

�82

.4

113.

4

100

14.2

111

G (NPT) 1/4

13

24

37.213.8

3 9

G (NPT) 1/440.410.6

2

30.8

91

M 4 for panel mounting

M 3 for wall or rail mounting

50

8.5 for NAMUR rib according to IEC 60534-6-1

48 38

�

�

��

�

�

60°16.8

Version with adapter plate for linear actuators with NAMUR rib according to IEC 60534-6-1, panel, wall or rail mounting


Dimensions

� 3 � Screw DIN 7964 – M 5 �20� 4 � Filter 1/4"� 4 � Screw ISO 3506-1 – M 4 �18� 2 � Hexagon socket head screw ISO 4762 – M 5 �80� 2 � Split washer DIN 127 – form B 5� 1 � Blanking plug M 16 �1.5� 1 � Cable gland M 16 �1.5 2 � O-ring 14 �1.5

206 Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01

Type 3967 Solenoid Valve Order nr. 3967- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Type of protection Without explosion protection 0 0 0 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

II 2 G Ex ia IIC T6/II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 80 °C 1) 1 1 0Ex ia IIC T6/Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 80 °C 2) 1 1 2II 3 G Ex nA II T6/II 3 G Ex nL IIC T6/II 3 D Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 80 °C 3) 8 1 0Ex nA II T6/Ex nL IIC T6/Ex tD A22 IP 65 T 80 °C 4) 8 1 2

Nominal signal 6 V DC, power consumption 5.47 mW 112 V DC, power consumption 13.05 mW 224 V DC, power consumption 26.71 mW 3

Manual override Pushbutton underneath the enclosure cover 0Pushbutton on the enclosure cover 1Pushbutton switch on the enclosure cover 2

Switching function 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism 0 0Mounting NAMUR interface 1/4" according to VDI/VDE 3845 for rotary actuators 0

NAMUR rib according to IEC 60534-6-1 for linear actuators, panel, wall or rail mounting 2For connection block with positioner for SAMSON Type 3277 Linear Actuators 3

KVS value 5) 0.32 0Material Polyamide/aluminum, powder-coated 1

Polyamide/stainless steel 1.4404 2Air connection Blind plate without threaded connections (connection at the adapter plate or at the connection block with positioner) 0

G 1/4 11/4 NPT 2

Connection at the Blind plate without threaded connections (connection at the adapter plate or at the connection block with positioner) 0pilot valve 1 �G (NPT) 1/4 (with internal air supply) 1

2 �G (NPT) 1/4 (with external air supply) 2Air supply Internal air supply over connection 1 (for on-off valves 0

External air supply over connection 9 (for control valves or connection block with positioner) 1Electrical connection Without cable gland 0 0

Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of polyamide, black (min.�20 °C) 0 1Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of polyamide, blue (min.�20 °C) 1 1Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of polyamide, black (EEx e, manufactured by CEAG) (min.�20 °C) 1 3Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of brass, nickel-plated (min.�45 °C) 1 4Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of brass, blue (min.�45 °C) 1 5

Degree of protection IP 65 0Ambient temperature 6) �20 to �80 °C 0

�45 to �80 °C 1Safety function None 0

SIL 7) 1


1) According to EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 06 ATEX 20272) According to IECEx Examination Certificate IECEx PTB 08.00363) According to Statement of Conformity PTB 06 ATEX 2028 X4) According to IECEx Statement of Conformity IECEx PTB 08.0038 X5) Air flow at p1= 2.4 bar and p2 =1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q � KVS �36.22, expressed in m3/h6) The maximum permissible ambient temperature depends on the permissible ambient temperature of the cable gland, the type of protection and the temperature class7) Safety Integrity Level SIL according to IEC 61508 (Report No. V 177 2009 T1)

Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01 207

Spare partsOrder no. Designation1089-1527 Enclosure cover complete, with pushbutton1089-1528 Enclosure cover complete, with pushbutton switch1099-6236 Enclosure cover complete0430-1941 Gasket (for enclosure cover)8320-1163 Screw ISO 3506-1 – M 4 �18 (for enclosure cover)

0070-0808 Venting plug0520-1370 Diaphragm (for venting plug)8336-0769 Cross head srew ISO 3506 – 3 �10 (for venting plug)

0070-0799 Blanking plug G 1/4 made of stainless steel 1.4571 (for connection 9)8421-0070 O-ring 14 �1.5 made of nitrile butadiene rubber (for blanking plug G 1/4)

0550-0213 Filter 1/4" (for threaded connections)

0430-1884 Reversible gasket (for connection plate and blind plate)8336-9013 Screw DIN 7964 – M 5 �20 (for connection plate and blind plate)

0430-1883 Molded gasket (for NAMUR interface 1/4")

8333-1318 Hexagon socket head screw ISO 4762 – M 5 �80 (for mounting the device)0270-2758 Split washer DIN 127 – B 5 (for locking the hexagon socket head screw)

AccessoriesOrder no. Designation8808-1010 Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of polyamide, black, cable 5 … 10 mm8808-2007 Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of polyamide, black, cable 5.5 … 10 mm (EEx e, manufactured by CEAG)8808-2008 Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of polyamide, blue, cable 4 … 8 mm8808-2009 Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of brass, nickel-plated, cable 4 … 8 mm1991-6471 Cable gland M 16 �1.5 made of brass, blue, cable 4 … 8 mm

8808-2011 Enlargement gland M 16 �1.5 to M 20 made of polyamide, blue (�20 … �70 °C)

8808-1024 Plug M 16 �1. 5 made of polyamide, black (for cable entry)

8421-0070 O-ring 14 �1.5 made of nitrile butadiene rubber (for cable gland and blanking plug)

Adapter plate for NAMUR rib according to IEC 60534-6-1, panel, wall or rail mounting,with hexagon socket head screw ISO 4762 – M 8 �35 and split washer DIN 127 – form B 8,

1400-9598 made of AlMgSiPb, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019, connection G 1/41400-9599 made of AlMgSiPb, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019, connection 1/4 NPT1400-9600 made of stainless steel 1.4404, connection G 1/41400-9601 made of stainless steel 1.4404, connection 1/4 NPT

Mounting base according to EN 60715 with slotted cheese head screw ISO 1207 – M 3 �81400-5930 for G profile G 32 (2 pcs. required!)1400-5931 for top hat rail TH 35 (2 pcs. required!)

1400-6726 Mounting plate for wall mounting with 2 hexagon socket head screws ISO 4762 – M 3 �8

Restrictor plate made of AlMgSiPb, powder-coated, grayish beige RAL 1019, with two threaded bolts M 5,1400-9602 with exhaust air restrictor, KVS value 0.23 … 0.32, adjustable1400-9603 with supply air restrictor, KVS value 0.23 … 0.32, adjustable

3994-0158 Cable break protection device with enclosure for top hat rail TH 35 according to EN 60715, IP 20 (for Type 3967-XXX1)


208 Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01

Connection blocks and accessories for SAMSON Type 3277 Linear ActuatorsOrder no. Designation

Connection block for SAMSON Type 3277 Linear Actuators,1400-8813 connection G 1/41400-8814 connection 1/4 NPT

1400-6950 Pressure gauge build-on block, 1 �“Output“ and 1 �“Supply“, made of stainless steel/brass (for connection block)

Piping kit for actuator “Stem retracts“,1400-6444 actuator size 240 cm2, made of steel, zinc-coated1400-6445 actuator size 240 cm2, made of stainless steel1400-6446 actuator size 350 cm2, made of steel, zinc-coated1400-6447 actuator size 350 cm2, made of stainless steel1400-6448 actuator size 700 cm2, made of steel, zinc-coated1400-6449 actuator size 700 cm2, made of stainless steel

Data Sheet T 3967 EN 2010-01 209

Solenoid Valve Type 3962without explosion protection, EEx em, EEx dfor controlling pneumatic actuators

General

The Type 3962 Solenoid Valve ensures a high level of operationalreliability for controlling pneumatic actuators in hazardous areas.

They offer different types of protection, switching functions, flowrates and connections for all desired applications.

Special features of the Type 3962 Solenoid Valve include:

General

● Life cycle more than 20 million switching cycles● Ambient temperature �20 to �80 °C,

depending on type of protection and temperature class● Corrosion-resistant enclosure with degree of protection IP 65

for applications in humid, corrosive environments● Wall mounting or pipe mounting● Attachment to rotary actuators with NAMUR interface

according to VDI/VDE 3845● Attachment to linear actuators with NAMUR rib according to

IEC 60534-6-1

Pilot valve

● Solenoid and seat valve with return spring● Version without explosion protection

for nominal signal 24 V DC or 24/115/230 V AC● Type of protection “Increased safety“ EEx em

for nominal signal 24/115/230 V AC/DC● Type of protection “Flameproof enclosure“ EEx d

for nominal signal 24 V DC or 24/115/230 V AC,other nominal signals on request

● Power consumption max. 3 W (DC) or 10 VA (AC), depending on nominal signal

● Air supply 1.4 to 8.0 bar● Manual override as push button or rotary push button switch

(optional)● Electrical connection using a cable gland M 20 �1.5 to

terminals or using a connector

Booster valve

● Seat valve with diaphragm element and return spring● Piston valve, single or double actuated● 3 /2, 5/2, 5/3 or 6/2-way function● Exhaust feedback (optional)● Kvs value 1.4 or 4.3● Operating pressure max. 10.0 bar● Threaded connection G (NPT) 1/4 or 1/2● NAMUR interface 1/4’’ or 1/2’’

Fig. 1

Type 3962-4XX003XXXXXXX Solenoid Valve



Without explosion protection

EEx em

EEx d

Data Sheet T 3962-5 EN 2008-12 211


Type 3962-0XX103XXXXXXX● Without explosion protection● Nominal signal 24 V DC or 24/115/230 V AC● 5/2-way function

with spring return mechanism● Kvs value 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR 1/4“● Mounting to on-off rotary actuators with


Type 3962-4XX003XXXXXXX● Type of protection “Increased safety“ EEx em● Nominal signal 24/115/230 V AC/DC● 3/2-way function

with spring return mechanism● Exhaust feedback● Kvs value 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR 1/4“● Mounting to on-off rotary actuators with


Type 3962-9XX014XXXXXXX● Type of protection “Flameproof enclosure“ EEx d● Nominal signal 24 V DC or 24/115/230 V AC● 3/2-way function

with spring return mechanism● Kvs value 4.3● Connection G (NPT) 1/2● Wall mounting or pipe mounting

Versions

Examples of configuration

Without explosion protection EEx em EEx d

212 Data Sheet T 3962-5 EN 2008-12

Solenoid valves with NAMUR interface for rotary actuators

81�82�

EP

39

4

1

2

Type 3962-XXX013XXXXXXX● 3/2-way function

with spring return mechanism● Exhaust feedback● Kvs value 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4

81�82�

EP

45

3

9


with spring return mechanism● Kvs value 4.3● Connection G (NPT) 1/2

81�82�

EP

39 5

4

1

2


with spring return mechanism● Kvsvalue 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4

81�82�

EP

1.41.5

1.3

9 2.42.5

2.3



81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with spring-centered mid-position(2 and 4 closed)

● Kvs value 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4

81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39.1 9.25

4

1

2

PE


with spring-centered mid-position(2 and 4 vented)


81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with spring-centered mid-position(2 and 4 to air supply)


81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with two locking positions● Kvs value 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4

81�82�

EP

1.41.5

1.3

9 2.52.4

2.3



Versions

Solenoid valves with threaded connection for wall mounting or pipe mounting

81�82�

EP

39

4

1

2


with spring return mechanism● Exhaust feedback● Kvs value 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR 1/4“● Attachment to on-off rotary actuators

with NAMUR interface 1/8“ or 1/4“

81�82�

EP

4 5

3

9

5


with spring return mechanism● Exhaust feedback● Kvs value 4.3● Connection G (NPT) 1/2/NAMUR 1/2“● Attachment to on-off rotary actuators


81�82�

EP

39 5

4

1

2


with spring return mechanism● Kvs value 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR 1/4“● Attachment to on-off rotary actuators


81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with two locking positions● Kvs value 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR 1/4“● Attachment to rotary actuators with


81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with spring-centered mid-position(2 and 4 closed)

● Kvs value 1.4● Connection G (NPT) 1/4/NAMUR 1/4“● Attachment to rotary actuators with


81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39.1 9.25

4

1

2

PE


with spring-centered mid-position(2 and 4 vented)



81� 81�82� 82�

EP

39 95

4

1

2

PE


with spring-centered mid-position (2 and 4 to air supply)



Data Sheet T 3962-5 EN 2008-12 213

Electrical data for pilot valve without explosion protectionType 3962-03 3962-05 3962-06 3962-08Nominal signal Un 24 V DC (�10 %) 230 V AC (�10 %), 115 V AC (�10 %), 24 V AC �(10 %),

50 … 60 Hz 50 … 60 Hz 50 … 60 HzPower consumption Pick-up 2.7 W 6.0 VA 6.0 VA 6.0 VA

Hold 2.7 W 3.7 VA 3.7 VA 3.7 VAContinuous duty 100 %Ambient temperature �20 … �80 °CConnection Connector according to EN 175301-803, form A

1) According to EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 02 ATEX 2125 X and Certificate of Conformity NEPSI GYJ071071X

Technical data

Pneumatic data for pilot valveType 3962-0 3962-4 3962-9Air supply Medium Instrument air

Pressure 1.4 … 10 bar 1.4 … 8 bar 1.4 … 8 barOutput signal Pressure of air supplyAir consumption No air consumptionKvs value 1) 0.06 0.05 0.05Switching time 10 ms 30 ms 30 msControl connection CNOMO interface

General data for pilot valveType 3962-0 3962-4XXXXX0(1) 3962-4XXXXX2(3) 3962-9Construction Solenoid and seat valve with return springDegree of protection IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 66Material Casting compound Polyamide Polyurethane Polyurethane –

Enclosure Polyamide, black Polyamide and Polyamide and Aluminum,aluminum, aluminum, anodized andpowder coated, powder coated, powder coated,grayish-beige grayish-beige red

Internal parts Stainless steel and brass Stainless steel and brass, Stainless steel and brass, Brassnickel-plated nickel-plated

Screws Steel, galvanized Stainless steelGaskets Fluoro rubber Nitrile rubber

Mounting position As desiredSwitching cycles 2 �107

Weight approx. 170 g 550 g 650 g ca. 850 g

1) Air flow at p1 �2.4 bar and p2 �1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q �Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h

Electrical data for pilot valve with type of protection “Increased safety“ EEx em 1)Type 3962-44 3962-47 3962-42Nominal signal Un 230 V AC/DC (�15 … �10 %), 115 V AC/DC (�15 … �10 %), 24 V AC/DC (�15 … �10 %),

40 … 65 Hz 40 … 65 Hz 40 … 65 HzPower consumption 1.8 WContinuous duty 100 %Ambient temperature T6 �20 … �50 °Cin temperature class T5 �20 … �60 °CConnection Cable gland M 20 �1.5

Electrical data for pilot valve with type of protection “Flameproof enclosure“ EEx d 1)Type 3962-93 3962-95 3962-96 3962-98Nominal signal Un 24 V DC (�10 %) 230 V AC (�10 %), 115 V AC (�10 %), 24 V AC (�10 %),

50 … 60 Hz 50 … 60 Hz 50 … 60 HzPower consumption Pick-up 3 W 10 VA 10 VA 10 VA

Hold 3 W 9.5 VA 9.5 VA 9.5 VAContinuous duty 100 %Ambient temperature T6 �10 … �40 °C – – –in temperature class T5 �10 … �55 °C – – –(max. cable temperature) T4 �10 … �65 °C (105 °C) �10 … �40 °C (90 °C) �10 … �40 °C (90 °C) �10 … �40 °C (90 °C)

�10 … �80 °C ( 85 °C)T3 – �10 … �55 °C (105 °C) �10 … �55 °C (105 °C) �10 … �55 °C (105 °C)

Connection Female thread M 20 �1.5

1) According to EC Type Examination Certificate BAS 02 ATEX 2145, Certificate of Conformity IECEx BAS 04.0028 and Certificate ofConformity CEPEL-EX-195/04

214 Data Sheet T 3962-5 EN 2008-12

Booster valve with single actuation, Kvs value 4.3, with threaded connectionSwitching function 3/2-way function 3/2-way function 5/2-way function 6/2-way functionKvs value 1) 1.9 (4→3), 1.5 (3→4) 1.9 (4→3), 1.5 (3→4) 1.9 (4→3), 1.5 (3→4) 1.9 (4→3), 1.5 (3→4)(in direction of flow) 4.3 (3→5), 4.7 (5→3) 4.3 (3→5), 4.7 (5→3) 4.3 (3→5), 4.7 (5→3) 4.3 (3→5), 4.7 (5→3)Ambient temperature 2) �20 … �80 °C �45 … �80 °C �20 … �80 °C �20 … �80 °CConstruction Seat valve with diaphragm element, soft-seated type, with return springMaterial Enclosure GD AlSi 12, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019,

Stainless steel 1.4404 (special version)Diaphragm Chloroprene rubber Silicone rubber Chloroprene rubber Chloroprene rubberGaskets Chloroprene rubber Silicone rubber Chloroprene rubber Chloroprene rubberScrews Stainless steel 1.4571

Actuation Single actuated by one pilot valveOperating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, or nitrogen 3),

Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, lubricated air or noncorrosive gases 4)Operating pressure max. 10 bar (4→3, 3→5) 10 bar (4→3, 3→5) 10 bar (as desired) 10 bar (as desired)(in direction of flow) 2 bar (as desired) 2 bar (as desired) 2 bar (as desired) 2 bar (as desired)Switching cycles 107 ( 6 bar) 106 ( 6 bar) 107 ( 6 bar) 107 ( 6 bar)(operating pressure) 106 (10 bar) 105 (10 bar) 106 (10 bar) 106 (10 bar)Connection G (NPT) 1/2Weight approx. 585 g (standard version) 1 100 g (standard version)

1) Air flow at p1 = 2.4 bar and p2 = 1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q = Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h2) The permissible maximum temperature of the solenoid valve depends on the permissible ambient temperature of the components, the

type of protection and the temperature class3) With internal air supply4) With external air supply5) NAMUR interface according to VDI/VDE 3845

Booster valve with single actuation, Kvs value 4.3, with NAMUR interfaceSwitching function 3/2-way function with exhaust feedbackKvs value 1) 1.9 (4→3) 1.9 (4→3)(in direction of flow) 4.3 (3→5) 4.3 (3→5)Ambient temperature 2) �20 … �80 °C �45 … �80 °CConstruction Seat valve with diaphragm element, soft-seated type, with return springMaterial Enclosure GD AlSi 12, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019,

Stainless steel 1.4404 (special version)Diaphragm Chloroprene rubber Silicone rubberGaskets Chloroprene rubber Silicone rubberScrews Stainless steel 1.4571


Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, lubricated air or noncorrosive gases 4)Operating pressure max. 10 barSwitching cycles 107 ( 6 bar) 106 ( 6 bar)(operating pressure) 106 (10 bar) 105 (10 bar)Connection G (NPT) 1/2/NAMUR interface 1/2’’ 5)Weight approx. 1 500 g (standard version)

Technical data

Data Sheet T 3962-5 EN 2008-12 215

Technical data

Booster valve with single actuation, Kvs value 1.4, with threaded connection or NAMUR interfaceSwitching function 3/2-way function with exhaust feedback 5/2-way functionKvs value 1) 1.4Construction Piston valve, metal-to-metal seating, without overlap, with return springMaterial Enclosure GD AlSi 12, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019,

Stainless steel 1.4404 (special version)Gaskets SiliconeFilter PolyethyleneScrews Stainless steel 1.4571


Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, lubricated air or noncorrosive gases 3)Operating pressure max. 6 bar 2) or 10 bar 3)Ambient temperature 4) �45 … �80 °CSwitching cycles 2 �107

Connection G (NPT) 1/4 or NAMUR interface 1/4’’ 5)Weight approx. 485 g (standard version)

Booster valve with double actuation, Kvs value 1.4, with threaded connection or NAMUR interfaceSwitching function 5/2-way function 5/3-way function 5/3-way function 5/3-way function

with two locking with spring-centered with spring-centered with spring-centeredpositions mid-position mid-position mid-position

(2 and 4 closed) (2 and 4 vented) (2 and 4 to air supply)Kvs value 1) 1.4Construction Piston valve, metal-to-metal seating, without overlapMaterial Enclosure GD AlSi 12, powder-coated, grayish-beige RAL 1019,

Stainless steel 1.4404 (special version)Gaskets SiliconeFilter PolyethyleneScrews Stainless steel 1.4571

Actuation Double actuated by two pilot valvesOperating medium Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, or nitrogen 2),

Instrument air, free of corrosive particles, lubricated air or noncorrosive gases 3)Operating pressure max. 6 bar 2) or 10 bar 3)Ambient temperature 4) �45 … �80 °CSwitching cycles 2 �107

Connection G (NPT) 1/4 or NAMUR interface 1/4’’ 5)Weight approx. 685 g (standard version)

1) Air flow at p1 = 2.4 bar and p2 = 1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q = Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h2) With internal air supply3) With external air supply4) The permissible maximum temperature of the solenoid valve depends on the permissible ambient temperature of the components, the

type of protection and the temperature class5) NAMUR interface according to VDI/VDE 3845

216 Data Sheet T 3962-5 EN 2008-12

Type 3962 Solenoid Valve Order no. 3962- . . . . . . . . . . . . .Type of protection Without explosion protection 0 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

II 2 G EEx em II T5/T6 1) 4II 2 G EEx d IIC T3/T4/T5/T6 2) 9

Nominal signal 24 V AC/DC (type -4) 224 V DC (types -0 and -9) 3

230 V AC/DC (type -4) 4230 V AC (types -0 and -9) 5115 V AC (types -0 and -9) 6115 V AC/DC (type -4) 7

24 V AC (types -0 and -9) 8Manual override None 0

Push button accessible from the outside (types -0 and -9) 2Rotary push button switch accessible from the outside (type -0) 3Lever-type switch accessible from the outside (type -9) 4

Switching 3/2-way function with spring return mechanism 0function 5/2-way function with spring return mechanism 1

5/2-way function with two locking positions 25/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (2 and 4 closed) 35/3-way function with spring-centered mid-position (2 and 4 to air supply) 45/3-way function with spring centered mid position (2 and 4 vented) 56/2-way function with spring return mechanism 6

Attachment NAMUR interface according to VDI/VDE 3845 0Threaded connection for wall mounting or pipe mounting 1CNOMO interface, 30 mm (pilot valve as spare part) 2NAMUR rib according to IEC 60534-6-1 3

Kvs value 3) 1.4 34.3 40.05 (pilot valve as spare part) 5

Air connection G 1/4 01/4 NPT 1G 1/2 21/2 NPT 3Without threaded connection (pilot valve as spare part) 4

Air supply Internal connection for on-off actuators 0External connection for continuous actuators 1

Electrical Female thread M 20 �1.5 (type -9) 0 0connection Cable gland M 20 �1.5 made of polyamide, black (type -4) 0 1

Connector according to EN 175301-803, form A, made of polyamide, black 4) (type -0) 2 3Degree of IP 65 (types -0 and -4) 1protection IP 66 (type -9) 2Exhaust air filter None 0at the pilot valve Filter M 5 made of polyethylene, IP 54 (types -0 and -9) 1

Filter check valve G 1/4 made of stainless steel 1.4305, IP 65 (types -0 and -9) 2Ambient �20 … �80 °C (type -0) 0temperature 5) �20 … �60 °C (type -4) 1

�10 … �40 °C (type -9) 2�40 … �40 °C (type -9) 3


1) According to EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 02 ATEX 2125 X and Certificate of Conformity NEPSI GYJ071071X2) According to EC Type Examination Certificate BAS 02 ATEX 2145, Certificate of Conformity IECEx BAS 04.0028 and Certificate of

Conformity CEPEL-EX-195/043) Air flow at p1 = 2.4 bar and p2 = 1.0 bar can be calculated according to the following equation: Q = Kvs �36.22, expressed in m3/h4) The female connector is not included in the delivery (see “Spare parts and accessories“)5) The permissible maximum temperature of the solenoid valve depends on the permissible ambient temperature of the components, the

type of protection and the temperature class

Data Sheet T 3962-5 EN 2008-12 217

Spare parts for pilot valvesOrder no. Designation8502-1091 Molded gasket (for air supply on booster valve with Kvs value 1.4)

0520-0620 Diaphragm made of chloroprene rubber, �20 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 4.3)0520-0622 Diaphragm made of chloroprene rubber, �20 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 1.4)0520-1097 Diaphragm made of silicone rubber, �45 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 4.3)0520-1128 Diaphragm made of silicone rubber, �45 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 1.4)

1180-8311 Actuating element insert, �20 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 4.3)1180-8553 Actuating element insert, �45 to �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 4.3)

8421-0044 O-ring 2.9 �1.78 (for connection plate with CNOMO interface)8421-9002 O-ring 16 �2 (for booster valve with NAMUR interface 1/4’’)8421-0407 O-ring 26 �3 (for booster valve with NAMUR interface 1/2’’)8421-0085 O-ring 26 �2, �20 … �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 4.3)8421-0418 O-ring 26 �2, �45 … �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 4.3)8421-0102 O-ring 36 �2, �20 … �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 4.3)8421-0101 O-ring 36 �2, �45 … �80 °C (for booster valve with Kvs value 4.3)

Accessories for pilot valvesOrder no. Designation0790-6658 Female connector according to EN 175301-803, form A, made of polyamide, black, degree of protection IP 65, with

cable gland Pg 9 (for cable diameter 4 to 8 mm) and flat gasket made of nitrile rubber

8834-0388 Luminary gasket, 12 to 24 V AC/DC, with LED, green (for female connector according to EN 175301-803, form A)

8808-0200 EEx d cable gland M 20 �1.5 made of brass (for cable diameter 6.5 to 14 mm)

8324-1280 Filter made of polyethylene, connection M 5, degree of protection IP 54

1790-7408 Filter check valve with screw-in case G 1/4, made of polyamide, degree of protection IP 651790-7253 Filter check valve with screw-in case G 1/4, made of stainless steel 1.4305, degree of protection IP 651790-9645 Filter check valve with screw-in case G 1/4, made of polyamide, degree of protection NEMA 41790-9646 Filter check valve with screw-in case G 1/4, made of stainless steel 1.4305, degree of protection NEMA 4


Mounting kits for solenoid valves with threaded connectionOrder no. Designation1400-6759 Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 80/240 cm2, connection G 1/4)

with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of stainless steel

Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 350/700 cm2, connection G 3/8)1400-6735 with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/2/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6761 with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel

1400-6736 Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 1 400 cm2, connection G 3/4)with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/2/G 3/4, made of stainless steel

1400-6737 Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 2 800 cm2, connection G 1)with screwed pipe connection, connection G 1/2/G 1, made of stainless steel

Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 80/240 cm2, connection G 1/4)with bracket made of stainless steel

1400-6749 and screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of steel, galvanized1400-6750 and screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of stainless steel

Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 350/700 cm2, connection G 3/8)with bracket made of stainless steel

1400-6738 and screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanized1400-6739 and screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6743 and screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6744 and screwed joints for pipe 10 �1, connection G 1/2/G 3/8, made of polyamide1400-6745 and screwed joints for pipe 10 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of polyamide

Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 700 cm2, connection G 3/8)with bracket made of stainless steel

1400-6740 and screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/2/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanized1400-6741 and screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanized1400-6742 and screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/2/G 3/8, made of stainless steel

218 Data Sheet T 3962-5 EN 2008-12


Mounting kits for solenoid valves with NAMUR interfaceOrder no. Designation


1400-6746 with screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanized1400-6747 with screwed joints for pipe 12 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6748 with screwed joints for pipe 10 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of polyamide


1400-6752 with screwed joints for pipe 6 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of steel, galvanized1400-6753 with screwed joints for pipe 6 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of stainless steel1400-6756 with screwed joints for hose 10 �1, connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of polyamide


1400-6754 with screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of steel, galvanized1400-6755 with screwed joints for pipe 8 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of stainless steel1400-6757 with screwed joints for pipe 10 �1, connection G 1/4/G 3/8, made of polyamide

1400-6759 Mounting kit for linear actuators (actuator size 80/240 cm2, connection G 1/4)with screwed pipe connection G 1/4/G 1/4, made of stainless steel

1400-3001 Mounting kit for Type 3353 Angle Seat Valvewith adapter plate for NAMUR interface made of stainless steel 1.4301

Accessories for mounting kitsOrder no. Designation0320-1416 Bracket for NAMUR rib

(required when a positioner or a limit switch is to be mounted to linear actuators with nominal size � DN 50 at the same time)

8320-0131 Hexagon socket head screw M 8 �60 – A 4 DIN 931

1400-6751 Adapter plate NAMUR rib/NAMUR interface 1/4“

(Specifications subject to change without notice.)

Data Sheet T 3962-5 EN 2008-12 219

Supply Pressure Regulator Type 4708

ApplicationSupply pressure regulators used to provide pneumaticmeasuring and control equipment with a constant air supplySet point ranges 0.2 to 1.6 bar (3 to 24 psi) or

0.5 to 6 bar (8 to 90 psi)

The supply pressure regulator reduces and controls themaximum pressure of 12 bar (180 psi) in a compressed airnetwork to the pressure adjusted at the set point adjuster.The regulators have a filter which can be vented:– Type 4708-45 including filter with 15 μm– All other Type 4708 including filter with 20 μm or– Special version with 5 μm

Special features• Air blow-off and low air consumption• Almost independent of upstream pressure• Any mounting position (except version with filter receptacle)• Suitable for pipe and panel mounting as well as for attach-

ment to various positioners and actuators• Optionally with pressure gauge with CrNiMo steel housing

and brass measuring element or pressure gauge completelymade of CrNiMo steel (these regulator versions are com-pletely free of any copper alloy)

• Threaded ends G according to DIN ISO 228/1 or with NPTtapered pipe thread

VersionsSupply pressure regulators with continuously adjustable setpoint range from 0.5 to 6 bar (8 to 90 psi)– Type 4708-10 to -17 (Figs. 1, 2) · Regulators with optional

set point range from 0.2 to 1.6 bar (3 to 23 psi).Mounted on rails conforming with DIN EN 50022 orDIN EN 50035 with accessories or mounted using a univer-sal bracket

– Type 4708-45 (Fig. 3) · Regulators with ½” connections andincreased air capacity output

– Type 4708-53 to -58 (Fig. 7 onwards) · Regulators for directattachment to various positioners

– Type 4708-62 and -63 (Figs. 9 and 13) · Regulators fordirect attachment to Type 3277 and Type 3372 PneumaticActuators

Other versions– Type 4708-82 (Figs. 6 and 14) · Manual/automatic

switchover functioning as a pneumatic bypass for positioners– Type 4708-83 to -87 (Fig. 15) · Compressed air filters

Fig. 2 · Types 4708-17, -14 and -13 Supply Pressure Regulator,versions with stainless steel body

Fig. 1 · Types 4708-10, -11 and -12 Supply Pressure Regulatorwith aluminum body

Fig. 3 · Type 4708-45 Supply Pressure Regulator with½”connections

Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12 221

Principle of operation (Fig. 4)The Type 4708 Supply Pressure Regulator operates accordingto the force-balance principle. By turning the set point screw (7),the tension of the spring (6) is changed and the output pressureis adjusted accordingly. The set point ranges from 0.2 to1.6 bar or from 0.5 to 6 bar are obtained by using two differentsprings.The supply pressure regulator contains a filter cartridge (11). Todrain the condensate, open the screw plug (12) by half a turn.When mounting the regulator, make sure the screw plug is in ahorizontal or suspended position.For versions with separate filter receptacle and condensatedrainage, the regulator must be installed with the receptaclesuspended.

Supply pressure regulators combined with pneumatic orelectropneumatic devices (Fig. 7 onwards)Various adapter plates allow the supply pressure regulator tobe attached to the various devices.Note! If the regulator is connected to supply networks carryingair that contains dust, oil or condensate, we recommend to useSAMSOMATIC service units for compressed air treatment.

InstallationTo avoid the formation of excessive condensate, make sure thesupply pressure regulator is installed as closely as possible tothe compressor or the compressed air tank.The regulator is either mounted directly in the pipeline or intothe appropriate panel cut-out. In addition, it may be attacheddirectly to the positioner or the pneumatic actuator.Depending on the version used, the air connections are fittedwith either G ¼ or ¼-18 NPT threads (G ½ or ½-18 NPTthreads for Type 4708-45).

Manual/automatic switchoverThe output of a positioner is routed to the actuator over amanual/automatic switchover (Fig. 6). In automatic mode, thepositioner output is used and in manual mode, the outputpressure of the supply pressure regulator is routed directly to theactuator. This feature provides a manual bypass for thepositioner.The manual/automatic switchover is suitable for mounting onTypes 376x, 378x and 373x Positioners or for mounting on anadapter plate connected up to the actuator. Type 4708-53(Fig. 6) or Type 4708-54 can be connected to themanual/automatic switchover. All other supply pressureregulators are connected over piping.

AccessoriesAn additional filter (Fig. 16) can be fitted on Type 4708-53 andTypes 4708-55 to -63. The filter housing can be rotated 360° toensure that the filter and condensate drainage always facedownwards.

7

85

4

6

3

2.13.1

12

11

2

1.3

1

1.2

1.1

Fig. 4 · Sectional view of Type 4708 Supply Pressure Regulator

3

30

10

21 20

Fig. 5 · View of diverting gasket (10) and adjustment knob (30)

Legends for Figs. 4 and 5

1 Body1.1 Seat1.2 Plug1.3 Connecting bore2 Diaphragm plate2.1 Diaphragm3 Cover3.1 Venting bore4 Centering bushing5 Cap

6 Spring7 Set point screw8 Lock nut

10 Diverting gasket11 Filter cartridge12 Screw plug20 Fixing screw21 Spring washer30 Adjustment knob

Fig. 6 · Manual/automatic switchover withType 4708-53 Supply Pressure Regulatorwith pressure gauges and filter receptacle

222 Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12

Summary of SAMSON positioners and actuators with associated Type 4708-xx Supply Pressure Regulator

Positioner For actuator Associated supply pressure regulator

Type 3730Type 3731Type 376xType 378x

Type 3271Type 3277

120 cm² and 240 to 700 cm²with hooked-up accessories(solenoid valve,Type 3709-2 Lock-up Valve)

also with Type 4708-82 or withType 3709-1

Rotary actuatorsalso with Type 4708-82(not with Type 3709-1)

Type 3277240 to 700 cm²without any hooked-up accessoriesand without manual/automaticswitchover (Type 4708-82)

Type 3760 Type 3277120 to 350 cm²

Type 3761 Rotary actuators

Type 4763Type 4765

Type 3271

Integral attachedversion

Type 3372for Series V2001valves

Fig. 10Type 4708-57xx







Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12 223

Universal supply pressure regulators and filters Type

Manual/automatic switchover

Filter with filter receptaclefor universal attachment with piping

AccessoriesRotatable additional filter for mounting on supplypressure regulators

Fig. 16Filter forType 4708-53 andType 4708-55 to -63

Fig. 15Type 4708-8xxxPhotos: -83, -87

00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 [mn

3/h]

Q1

2

3

4

5

6

P [bar] 0.2 ... 1.6 bar0.5 ... 6.0 bar

Fig. 17 · Air flow characteristics with 8 bar supply pressure for Type 4708-xx Supply Pressure Regulators with ¼” connection

00 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 [mn

3/h]

Q1

2

3

4

5

6

P [bar] 0.5 ... 6.0 bar

Fig. 18 · Air flow characteristics with 8 bar supply pressure for Type 4708-45 Supply Pressure Regulator with ½” connection

Set point ranges

Set point

Set point ranges

Set point

Fig. 14Type 4708-82

224 Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12


Supply pressure regulators Type 4708-xx · ¼” connections Type 4708-45 · ½” connections

Supply pressure 1 bar (15 psi) above the adjusted set point,however, at least 1.6 bar (24 psi)

Minimum 1 bar (15 psi) abovethe adjusted set point

Max. supplypressure 12 bar (180 psi)

Set point range 0.2 to 1.6 bar (3 to 24 psi) or 0.5 to 6 bar (8 to 90 psi)

Air consumption at 7 barsupply pressure

≤ 0.05 mn³/h ≤ 0.1 mn³/h

Dependency on input pressure < 0.01 bar/Δp = 1 bar Negligible (< 10 mbar/4 bar)

Reversing error 0.1 to 0.4 bar(depending on set point)

50 mbar with set point range0.5 to 6 bar (8 to 90 psi)

Hysteresis < 0.1 bar 50 mbar with set point range0.5 to 6 bar (8 to 90 psi)

Filter cartridge mesh size 20 μm · Optional 5 μm 15 μm

Pressure gauge

Range of reading 0 to 1.6 bar (0 to 24 psi) or 0 to 6 bar (0 to 90 psi)

Connection G 18

Ambient temperature ranges

Supply pressureregulators Type 4708 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -17 -45 -53 -54 -55 -57 -58 -62 -63 -82 -83 -84 -86 -87

Standard–25...70 °C* • • • • •

–25...80 °C • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Version for lowtemperatures

–40...80 °C •

–50...70 °C* • • • • •

–50...80 °C • • • • • • • • • • • • •

* Applies also to rotatable additional filter

Weights

Regulator with¼” connections

Type 4708 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -17 -53 -54 -55 -57 -58 -62 -63 -82 -83 -84 -86 -87

Approx. kg 0.48 0.58 0.66 1.65 1.2 1.0 0.68 0.95 0.37 0.47 0.4 0.4 0.87 0.4 0.24 0.32 0.59 0.95

Regulator with½” connections

Type4708-45 0.74 kg (aluminum body and polyamide filter receptacle)


Pressure regulators Type 4708-xx · ¼” connections Type 4708-45 · ½” connections

Body Metal parts Aluminum (3.3547) or stainless steel (1.4404)

Plastic parts Polyamide, glass fiber reinforced

Cover Polyamide, glass fiber reinforced

Cap Polyamide, glass fiber reinforced

Plug Polyamide, glass fiber reinforcedand polyoxymethylene 1.4305 and polyoxymethylene

Diaphragm NBR · FVMQ for low-temperature version

Diaphragm plate Polyamide, glass fiber reinforced or aluminum

Set point spring 1.4310

Filter receptacle UV-resistant polyamide (Trogamid T 5004)

Filter cartridge Polypropylene Polypropylene and polyethylene

Pressure gauge

Body Stainless steel

Connection and measuringelement Nickel-plated brass or stainless steel for copper-free version

Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12 225

Dimensions in mm · Specifications in parentheses apply to additional compressed air connection as shown in Fig. 32

927

133 (157)99 122

66

47

122

Input Signal

Supply

Fig. 22 · (Photo in Fig. 10)Type 4708-57xx Supply PressureRegulator attached toType 3760 Positioner

80

0 6

0 6

70 25

51

65 (89)

Output

Supply

Fig. 19 · (Photo in Fig. 7)Type 4708-53xx Supply PressureRegulator attached to Types 376x,378x or 373x Positioners

60

4708-552.

60

66 (90)55

27

122

G

Output

Supply

Fig. 21 · (Photo in Fig. 12)Type 4708-55xx Supply PressureRegulator attached toType 4763 or Type 4765 Positioner

73

192

111

66

96

19

3

Output

Supply

Fig. 20 · (Photo in Fig. 8)Type 4708-54xx Supply PressureRegulator attached toType 376x, 378x or 373x Positioner

(for p/p positioner)

226 Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12

Output

Supply

99

42

44

Ø41

102123

12

59

Fig. 25 · (Photos in Figs. 1 and 2) Type 4708-12xx/-13xxSupply Pressure Regulator

157

45

258

57

83

60

Ø41

65

Fig. 26 · (Photo in Fig. 3) Type 4708-45 Supply PressureRegulator with ½” connections

138238

GO

utputO

utputS

Input6

5

43

2

1

0

27

60(84)93

56

30

Supply

111

Fig. 23 · (Photo in Fig. 11)Type 4708-58xx Supply PressureRegulator attached toType 3761 Positioner

43 180

111 13

4

47

123

88

Supply

G3/8

0 6

0 6

Fig. 24 · (Photo in Fig. 9)Type 4708-63xx Supply PressureRegulator for Type 3277 PneumaticActuator and Types 376x, 378x or373x Positioners

OutputSupply

Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12 227

Output

Supply

795243

19

51

60 44

182 (206)

Fig. 28 · (Photos in Figs. 1 and 2)Types 4708-11xx/-14xx Supply Pressure Regulator

0 6

G4708-622X

Supp

ly

113

113

60

1911

1 (1

35) 94

Fig. 27 · Type 4708-62xx Supply Pressure Regulatorfor Type 3372 Pneumatic Actuator

Output

Supply

795243

19

51

60 44

78 (102)

Fig. 29 · (Photos in Figs. 1 and 2)Types 4708-10xx/-17xx Supply Pressure Regulator

228 Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12

Ordering textSupply pressure regulator According to article code

AccessoriesFor Types 4708-10 to -45 and -81 to -87:

Mounting parts for valve attachment orDIN rails acc. to EN 50022 orDIN rails acc. to EN 50035

For Types 4708-10, -11, -14, -17, -53, -55, -57, -58:Intermediate plate for additionalcompressed air output (G ¼ or ¼ NPT)

For Type 4708-53 and Type 4708-55 to -63:Rotatable filter receptacle

For Type 4708-82:Adapter plate for freely configurablehook-up or NAMUR attachment(G ¼ or ¼ NPT)

4459

42

15

116

Fig. 30 · (Photo in Fig. 15)Type 4708-83xx/-84xx/-86xx/-87xx Filter

45

50

147

55

18

Fig. 31 · (Photo in Fig. 16)Rotatable filter receptacle

90

24Fig. 32 · Intermediate plate for additional compressed air

connection · Type 4708-55xx

7056

56

46

24

82

28

50

13

10

Fig. 33 · (Photo in Fig. 6)Type 4708-82 Manual/automatic Switchoverwith adapter plate

Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12 229

Article code

Supply pressure regulators Type 4708- x x x x 0 x x x x x 0 0 x

Aluminum/plastic body, with filter, without separate filter receptacle 1 0 25

01 0 1

Aluminum/plastic body, with transparent plastic filter receptacle 1 1 25

01 0 2

Aluminum body and filter receptacle 1 2 25

01 0 3

Stainless steel body and filter receptacle 1 3 25

01 1 4

Stainless steel/plastic body, with transparent plastic filter receptacle 1 4 25

01 1 2

Stainless steel/plastic body, with filter, without separate filter receptacle 1 7 25

01 1 1

Aluminum or stainless steel/plastic body, transparent plastic or metal filterreceptacle, increased air capacity output 4 5 6

712 1 0

1

234

0

Aluminum/plastic body, with filter, for attachment to Types 373x/376x/378xPositioners (linear actuators) 5 3 2

512 2 0 1

Aluminum/plastic body, with filter, for attachment to Types 373x/376x/378xPositioners (rotary actuators) 5 4 2

512 2 0 1

Aluminum/plastic body, with filter, for attachment to Type 476x Positioner 5 5 25 0 0 0 1

Aluminum/plastic body, with filter, for attachment to Type 3760 Positioner 5 7 25

12 1 0 1

Aluminum/plastic body, with filter, for attachment to Type 3761 Positioner 5 8 25

012

01 0 1

Aluminum/plastic body, with filter, for attachment to Type 3372 Actuator 6 2 25

12 1 0 1

Aluminum/plastic body, with filter, as connection block(direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator, 240 to 700 cm²) 6 3 2

512 2 0 1

Manual/automatic switchover 8 2 25 8 0 0 0 0

1 0

Compressed air filter, aluminum body, transparent plastic filter receptacle 8 3 25 8 0 0 2

Compressed air filter, aluminum body and filter receptacle 8 4 25 8 0 0 3

Compressed air filter, stainless steel body, transparent plastic filter receptacle 8 6 25 8 0 1 2

Compressed air filter, stainless steel body and filter receptacle 8 7 25 8 0 1 4

Threaded connections

ISO-228/1 - G ¼ 2

¼-18 NPT 5

ISO-228/1 - G ½ 6

½-14 NPT 7

Set point ranges

0.5 to 6.0 bar, without pressure gauge 0 0

0.5 to 6.0 bar, with pressure gauge,completely of CrNiMo (free of copper) 1 0

0.5 to 6.0 bar, with pressure gauge, (nickel-plated brass connection) 2 0

0.2 to 1.6 bar, without pressure gauge 3 0

0.2 to 1.6 bar, with pressure gauge,completely of CrNiMo (free of copper) 4 0

0.2 to 1.6 bar, with pressure gauge, (nickel-plated brass connection) 5 0

None 8 0

230 Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12


Supply pressure regulators Type 4708- x x x x 0 x x x x x 0 0 x

Number of pressure gauges

None 0

1 pressure gauge 1

2 pressure gauges 2

Body material

Aluminum 0

Stainless steel 1

Filter

None 0

in black plastic regulator body 1

in transparent plastic receptacle (not moveable) 2

in aluminum receptacle (not moveable) 3

in stainless steel receptacle (not moveable) 4

Temperature range

–20 to 70 °C, standard 0

–40 to 70 °C 6 3 1

–50 to 70 °C 2

Application

Standard 0

Device free of substances that can impair paint adhesion 1

Exhaust port with thread 2

Special version

None 0 0 0

Filter cartridge, mesh width 5 μm 0 0 1

Data Sheet T 8546 EN 2009-12 231

Service Unit Type 3999-009Xfor conditioning and control of compressed air

General

The reliability and efficiency of a pneumatic instrumentation andcontrol system depends largely on the condition of the supply air.Supply air conditioning to meet the operational requirements isessential for the functional reliability of pneumatic components.

The Type 3999-009X Service Unit is used for the compressed airsupply of pneumatic transmitters, controllers and valve position-ers. The unit removes dirt, water and oil from the compressed air.At the same time, the air pressure is regulated to a constant out-put pressure.

The Type 3999-0096 Filter Regulator (see Data Sheet T 3999-8 EN)can be used for the compressed air supply of pneumatic volumeboosters for large actuators.

Versions

Service unit with bracketcomprising coarse filter, pressure reducer, pressure gauge andsubmicro filter,condensate drainage over float valves Order no. 3999-0090condensate drainage over solenoid valves Order no. 3999-0093

Service unit on mounting platecomprising manual spool valve, coarse filter, pressure reducer,pressure gauge, submicro filter and pressure switch,condensate drainage over float valves Order no. 3999-0091condensate drainage over solenoid valves Order no. 3999-0094

Service unit on mounting platecomprising manual spool valve, coarse filter, pressure reducer,pressure gauge, submicro filter, differential pressure switch andpressure switch,condensate drainage over float valves Order no. 3999-0092condensate drainage over solenoid valves Order no. 3999-0095

Principle of operation

The compressed air flows across a manual spool valve � and acoarse filter � with a maximum input pressure p1 of 16 bar. Theair is cleaned of coarse dirt particles larger than 8 μm as well aswater and oil, while the pressure is reduced to a constant outputpressure p2 of 0.5 to 10 bar by a pressure reducer �. The out-put pressure p2 is indicated on a pressure gauge � and moni-tored by a pressure switch �. The prefiltered air flows across asubmicro filter �, retaining dirt particles larger than 0.01μm.The function of the submicro filter � is monitored by a differen-tial pressure switch �.

The coarse filter � and the submicro filter � are fitted with ei-ther float valves or solenoid valves. The float valves open auto-matically when a defined liquid level is reached. In the event offailure, the condensate receptacle can be drained manually byunscrewing the drain plug. The solenoid valves must be openedby an external control signal at regular intervals, depending onthe degree of contamination of the compressed air.

Fig. 1 · Type 3999-0092 Service Unit

�PE

PE

p2p1

� ��

�

� �

Block diagram

Fig. 2

� Manual spool valve (Types -0091/-0092/-0094/-0095)� Coarse filter� Pressure reducer� Pressure gauge� Submicro filter� Differential pressure switch (Types -0092/-0095)� Pressure switch (Types -0091/-0092/-0094/-0095)

Double-throw contact:1 � C (lilac)2 � NC (blue)4 � NO (red)

Data Sheet T 3999-6 EN 2006-07 233

General dataAttachment Pipe or wall mountingMounting position Upright, condensate drainage downwardsAmbient temperature �5 … �50 °CDegree of protection IP 54Connection Input G 3/8 female (for Types -0090/-0093),

G 3/8 male (for Types -0091/-0092/-0094/-0095)Output G 3/8 female (for Types -0090/-0093),

Compression fitting for pipe 12 mm (for Types -0091/-0092/-0094/-0095)Weight, approx. 3.6 kg (for Types -0090/-0093),

5.8 kg (for Types -0091/-0094),6.3 kg (for Types -0092/-0095)

Bracket (Types -0090/-0093)Material Steel, chromatedMounting plate (Types -0091/-0092/-0094/-0095)Material Steel, powder-coated, gray-beige RAL 1019Manual spool valve (Types -0091/-0092/-0094/-0095)Nominal size 3/8“Filter unitVersion Coarse filter, submicro filter, pressure reducer with secondary venting, pressure gaugeMaterial Coarse filter cartridge Sintered bronze

Submicro filter cartridge Borosilicate glassCondensate receptacle Makrolon, clear, with cromated steel cage

Medium Compressed air, free of corrosive particlesInput pressure p1 Max. 16 bar (max. 8 bar for solenoid valves with 24 V DC)Output pressure p2 0.5 … 10 bar, adjustableFlow rate According to characteristic (see Fig.3)Filter mesh Coarse filter cartridge 8 μm particle size

Submicro filter cartridge 0.01 μm particle sizeReceptacle volume 2 �65 cm3 condensateCondensate drainage Automatic over float valves (for Types -0090/-0091/-0092),

Automatic over solenoid valves (for Types -0093/-0094/-0095)Differential pressure switch (Types -0092/-0095)Set point 0.25 bar, set by manufacturerVersion Double-throw contact, floatingSwitching capacity Max. 250 V AC, 5 AConnection Connector according to EN 175301-801, form APressure switch (Types -0091/-0092/-0094/-0095)Set point 0.5 … 6 bar, adjustableVersion Double-throw contact, floatingSwitching capacity Max. 250 V AC, 5 AConnection Connector according to EN 175301-801, form ASolenoid valves (Types -0093/-0094/-0095)Rated signal 24 V DC (for p1� max. 8 bar), AC rated signal (for p1� max. 16 bar) on requestConnection Connector according to EN 175301-801, form A

Technical data

5

Output pressure p2 (bar)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10

15

20

25

30

00

Flow

rat

e Q

(m3 /

h)

Flow rate diagram

Fig. 3 · Flow rate Q at a differential pressure of 0.5 barbetween input pressure p1 and output pressure p2

234 Data Sheet T 3999-6 EN 2006-07

Dimensions Types 3999-0090/-0093


Dimensions Types 3999-0091/-0092/-0094/-0095

Designation Order no.� Manual spool valve G 3/8 0790-6697� Coarse filter –� Pressure reducer –� Pressure gauge 0790-6967� Submicro filter –� Differential pressure switch 0790-6659� Pressure switch 3994-9001 Mounting plate 0790-6683

�

�

�

�

�

�

3

6

3

57

138

App

rox.

184

50

154.5

5.5

G 1/8//

App

rox.

185

App

rox.

280

43.5

47

Approx. 125

34.5

220

3/8//

SW 24

G

G 1/8//Pg 11

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

6

3

G 1/8//

Approx. 1453

App

rox.

404

App

rox.

480

Approx. 420

120

Approx. 200 Approx. 200

169

7.5

185

150

6.5

34

440

G 3/8//

SW 24G 3/

G /8// Pg 11

bar

�

�

Designation Order no. Coarse filter cartridge 8 μm 0790-6691� Submicro filter cartridge 0.01 μm 0790-6692� Condensate receptacle 0790-6693� Diaphragm 0790-6694� Cable socket 0790-6658

according to EN 175301-803, form A Float valve G 1/8 0790-6965� Solenoid valve G 1/8 0790-6966

Data Sheet T 3999-6 EN 2006-07 235

Installation instructions

Ambient conditionsThe service unit may be installed only in rooms with an ambienttemperature of �5 to �50 °C. It should be installed preferably inthe coolest location in the room so that no water can condense inthe output pressure pipe.

Mounting positionThe service unit must be installed in the output pressure pipe withthe condensate drainage in the upright position facing down-wards. It must be installed at the lowest point of the output pres-sure pipe so that condensate can flow always to the service unit.

Output pressure pipeThe output pressure piping must be adequately sized so that thepressure loss is negligible.

Operation

The maximum permissible input pressure p1 of 16 barmust not be exceeded!

Adjustment instructions

The following adjustment instructions apply to the versions withpressure switch and differential pressure switch:

Differential pressure switchThe differential pressure switch is adjusted by the manufacturerto a set point of 0.25 bar.

This adjusted set point must not be changed!

Pressure switchThe set point of the pressure switch can be adjusted between 0.5to 6 bar (see Fig. 5). The set point is adjusted using a screwdriverby turning the stem �, after unscrewing the threaded pin �. Theset point is indicated on the scale �. The stem � must securedby retightening the threaded pin �.

Maintenance instructions

The following maintenance must be performed at regular inter-vals, dependent on the degree of contamination of the com-pressed air (see Fig. 4):

Filter cartridgesCheck coarse filter cartridge and submicro filter � for conta-mination and replace when heavily contaminated. For the ver-sions with differential pressure switch �, contamination of thesubmicro filter cardridge � is monitored continuously and auto-matically registered as contamination causes the pressure todrop.

Condensate drainageCheck functioning of the automatic drainage of the flow valve or the solenoid valves �. In case of failure, the condensate re-ceptacles � with float valves can be drained manually by un-screwing the drain plugs. The condensate receptacles � must beresealed afterwards by retightening the drain plugs.

Set point adjustment at the pressure switch

Fig. 5

� Stem� Threaded pin� Scale

�

�

� � �

(Specifications subject to change without notice.)

236 Data Sheet T 3999-6 EN 2006-07

Filter Regulator Type 3999-0096for filtering and control of compressed air

General

The reliability and efficiency of a pneumatic instrumentation andcontrol system depends largely on the condition of the supply air.Supply air conditioning to meet the operational requirements isessential for the functional reliability of pneumatic components.

The Type 3999-0096 Filter Regulator is used for the compressedair supply of pneumatic volume boosters for large actuators. Itremoves dirt, water and oil from the compressed air. At the sametime, the air pressure is regulated to a constant output pressure.

The Type 3999-009X Service Unit (see Data Sheet T 3999-6 EN)can be used for the compressed air supply of pneumatic transmit-ters, controllers and positioners.

Version

Filter regulator with bracketcomprising filter, pressure regulator and pressure gauge,condensate drainage over drain valve Order no. 3999-0096

Principle of operation

The compressed air flows across a filter � with a maximum inputpressure p1 of 16 bar. The air is cleaned of coarse dirt particleslarger than 8 μm as well as water and oil, while the pressure isreduced to a constant output pressure p2 of 0.5 to 10 bar by apressure reducer �. The output pressure p2 is indicated on apressure gauge �.

The filter � is fitted with a drain valve. The condensate recepta-cle must drained at regular intervals by unscrewing the drainplug, depending on the degree of contamination of the com-pressed air.

Fig. 1 · Type 3999-0096 Filter Regulator

Block diagram

Fig. 2

� Filter� Pressure reducer� Pressure gauge� Drain valve

Data Sheet T 3999-8 EN 2006-07 237

General dataAttachment Pipe or wall mountingMounting position Upright, condensate drainage downwardsAmbient temperature �40 … �60 °CDegree of protection IP 54Connection G 1/2 femaleWeight, approx. 1.8 kgBracketMaterial Steel, chromatedFilter unitVersion Filter, pressure reducer with secondary venting, pressure gaugeMaterial Filter cartridge Sintered bronze

Condensat receptacle Aluminium, powder-coated, gray-beige RAL 1019Medium Compressed air, free of corrosive particlesInput pressure p1 Max. 16 barOutput pressure p2 0.5 … 10 bar, adjustableFlow rate According to characteristic (see Fig. 3)Filter mesh 8 μm particle sizeReceptacle volume 65 cm3 condensateCondensate drainage Manual over drain valve

Technical data

0

Flow rate Q (m3/h)

60 120 180 240 3000

2

4

6

8

Out

put p

ress

ure

p2 (b

ar)

Flow rate diagram

Fig. 3 · Flow rate Q at an input pressure p1 of 8 bar

238 Data Sheet T 3999-8 EN 2006-07

Dimensions


Installation instructions

Mounting positionThe filter regulator must be installed in the output pressure pipewith the condensate drainage in the upright position facingdownwards. It must be installed at the lowest point of the outputpressure pipe so that condensate can flow always to the filterregulator.

Output pressure pipeThe output pressure pipe must be adequately sized so that thepressure loss is negligible.

Operation

The maximum permissible input pressure p1 of 16 barmust not be exceeded!

Maintenance instructions

The following maintenance must be performed at regular inter-vals, depending on the degree of contamination of the com-pressed air (see Fig. 4):

Filter cartridgeCheck filter cartridge � for contamination and replace whenheavily contaminated.

Condensate drainageDrain the condensate receptacle over the drain valve � byunscrewing the drain plug. The condensate receptacle must bethen resealed by retightening the drain plug.

Designation Order no.� Filter –� Pressure reducer –� Pressure gauge 0790-6967� Drain valve –

�

�

�

�

3

6

3

5713

8

54

5.5

App

rox.

230

App

rox.

300

87 Approx. 125

App

rox.

220

pp17

3

52.5

G 1/2// bar

�

�

�

Designation Order no.� Bracket –� Filter cartridge 8 μm 0790-6691� Diaphragm 0790-6694 Condensate receptacle 0790-6693

�

Data Sheet T 3999-8 EN 2006-07 239

ApplicationPressure adjustment in pneumatic systems

The remote adjuster is a precision pressure regulator which canbe manually adjusted. It is designed for use in pneumatic con-trol loops as either a set point adjuster or manual remote ad-juster and can be used as an adjustable precision pressure reg-ulator for measuring, calibration and testing equipment.

Special features• Precise adjustment• Constancy of the adjusted pressure value• Large air delivery• Small dimensions

VersionsThe Type 3759 Remote Adjuster is available for the followingpressure ranges: 0 to 0.6 bar, 0 to 1.6 bar, 0 to 4 bar and 0 to6 bar. The max. supply pressure for all versions is 7 bar.

Standard versionDesigned for panel mounting with adjustment screw which canbe turned using a screwdriver. The device can be equipped withthe following parts (see Table 2):– Rotary knob for manual adjustment– Rotary knob and mounting plate with cover bushing– Protective cover and mounting plate– Equipment for panel or wall mounting with bracket and, if re-

quired, rotary knob for manual adjustment

Principle of operationThe force of the leaf spring (2), adjustable via the adjustmentscrew (1), is balanced by a counterforce generated by the out-put pressure acting on the diaphragm (4).Increasing the spring force by turning the adjustment screw orlowering the output pressure causes the outlet nozzle (3) to beincreasingly covered. As a result, the pressure produced by thepressure divider, made up of the nozzle (5) and the outlet noz-zle (3), rises and is applied as intermediate pressure on the dou-ble diaphragm (6). The diaphragm moves the double plug (8)downwards. More supply air flows to the output and into thechamber below the diaphragm (6). This pressure increase re-sults in a new equilibrium.If the spring force is decreased or the output pressure rises, thepressure acting on the double diaphragm decreases, the doublediaphragm moves upwards, and the air can escape through theoutlet nozzle (3) until there is a new pressure balance.

Pneumatic Remote Adjuster

Type 3759

Fig. 1 · Type 3759 Pneumatic Remote Adjuster

10

9

87

6

5

1

4

3

2

Fig. 2 · Sectional drawing of Type 3759

Legend1 Adjustment screw2 Leaf spring3 Outlet nozzle4 Diaphragm5 Nozzle

6 Double diaphragm7 Return spring8 Double plug9 Output connection

10 Supply connection

Data Sheet T 8510 EN 2006-02 241


Output pressure bar 0 ... 0.6 0 ... 1.6 0 ... 4 0 ... 6

Requiredsupply pressure bar 1.4 ... 7 2 ... 7 5 ... 7 7

Flow rate in ln/h 1)

max. air delivery) atupstream pressure (bar)

2 2000

5 4000

7 5300

Perm. ambient temperature –20 ... +60 °C

Air consumption in ln/h 1)

in steady state atupstream pressure (bar)

2 70

5 110

7 130

Dependence on upstreampressure

0.001 bar/0.1 bar pressure variation

Influence of temperature °C(based on upper value) 0.035 % 0.02 % 0.035 %

Reproducibility bar 0.002

1) Measured against ambient pressure with remote adjusteropen to the maximum.

All pressures are effective pressures pe in bar (gauge) unlessotherwise specified.

Ø25

.5

12

126

95.5

4048

1230

M4

Panel mounting using bracket

Panel mounting using plate

Protective cap

Mounting plate

max. 3

Rotary knob

Bushing

118

50

4.3

68

110

28

15.5

Ø6

SW 17

41

26

1/8NPT

40

Fig. 3 · Panel cut-out for standard version

Table 2 · Accessories

Mounting Version with Item no.

Panelmounting withplate

Rotary knob 8442-0380

Rotary knob and plate 1400-5632

Protective cap and plate 1400-5631

Panelmounting withbracket

Bracket 0300-0394

Rotary knob and bracket 1400-5634

MountingPanel mounting using plate · For direct mounting of the stan-dard version, a panel cut-out according to Fig. 3 needs to bemade. On using the plate included in the accessories, a holewith 22 + 1 (mm) diameter is required.Panel mounting using bracket · The associated bracket must befastened using two screws.

242 Data Sheet T 8510 EN 2006-02

ApplicationPneumatic lock-up valve for shutting off the signal pressure lineof pneumatic actuators

The pneumatic lock-up valve shuts off the signal pressure line ei-ther when the air supply falls below an adjusted value or uponcomplete air supply failure. This causes the actuator to remainin its last position.

VersionsType 3709-1 (Fig. 1) · Lock-up valve for direct attachment toTypes 4765 or 3766 Pneumatic Positioners or Types 4763,3767, 3780 or 3785 Electropneumatic Positioners when theseare integrally attached to a Type 3277 Actuator, without con-nection block (not in connection with mounting block andType 4708 Supply Pressure Regulator).Type 3709-2 (Fig. 2) · Lock-up valve for arbitrary installation inthe signal pressure line.

Principle of operation (Fig. 3)The supply air produces a force on the diaphragm (4) which isbalanced by the spring (6). When the force produced on the di-aphragm is greater than the spring force, input and output areconnected, i.e. the signal pressure supplied by the positioner istransmitted unobstructed to the actuator. When the supply airpressure falls below the adjusted value, the spring force domi-nates, and the spring (6) moves the plug (3) fully into the seat(9). As a result, the pressure in the actuator is blocked.

Pneumatic Lock-up Valve

Type 3709

Fig. 2 · Type 3709-2 Pneumatic Lock-up Valve

p z

p e

p a

Fig. 3 · Sectional drawing of Type 3709-2

Legend for Fig. 3

1 Housing2 Cover3 Plug4 Diaphragm5 Diaphragm plate6 Spring

7 Spindle8 Cap9 Seatpa Signal pressure outputpe Signal pressure inputpz Supply air

Fig. 1 · Type 3709-1 Pneumatic Lock-up Valve

Data Sheet T 8391 EN 2010-02 243

Typical applications

Ordering textPneumatic Lock-Up Valve Type 3709- ...Attached to Positioner Type ...Connections ¼ NPT or G ¼


Dimensions in mm

3

1

2

y y

2

1

4

3

y

Pst

4

1

2

3

Closed loop control with interlocking Closed and open loop control with interlocking Closed loop control and safety interlocking

1 Pneumatic control valve2 Positioner3 Lock-up valve4 Solenoid valve

Technical data

Connections ¼ NPT or G ¼

Supply air Max. 12 bar

Signal pressure Max. 6 bar

KVS coefficient Approx. 0.2

Set point range Continuously adjustable from 0 to 6 bar

Recommended setting ≥ 0.2 bar above required signalpressure, min 1.6 bar

Permissible ambienttemperature

–25 ... 80 °CExtended range on request

Weight, approx. 0.4 kg

Materials

Housing Die-cast aluminum, plastic-coatedStainless steel on request

Cover Ultramid

Diaphragm CR (chloropene rubber with fabric)

Diaphragm plate Aluminum

130

42

Inputsignal

Output

123

70

OutputSupply

5228

28

5444

Supply

1125

23.5

1316

Type 3709-1

Type 3709-2

pa Signal pressure outputpe Signal pressure inputpz Supply pressure

244 Data Sheet T 8391 EN 2010-02

Series 3710

Reversing Amplifier Type 3710

ApplicationReversing amplifier to operate a double-acting pneumatic actu-ator using a single-acting pneumatic or electropneumaticpositioner or limit switch

The reversing amplifier is used together with single-actingelectropneumatic positioners of Series 3730 and 3731. It is alsosuitable for use with Types 3766, 3767 and 3780 Positioners aswell as Type 3768 Limit Switch in model versions 37xx-x..x.05and higher.It is attached to the positioner either• Without pressure gauge• With one pressure gauge when used with a Type 4708-54

Supply Pressure Regulator• With two pressure gauges

VersionsNormal version without pressure gauge with pressure gaugethreaded connections · Suitable for a maximum supply pres-sure of 6 bar at a permissible ambient temperature range from–25 to 80 °C, degree of protection IP 65 with polyamide checkvalve– Type 3710 (Fig. 1) · Reversing amplifier with pressure

gauge threaded connections at the front and back

Other versions– Type 3710 with two pressure gauges supplied as accessories

for Y1 and Y2 (Fig. 2)– With one pressure gauge for Y2 when used with a

Type 4708-54 Supply Pressure Regulator (Fig. 3)– Degree of protection IP 65 with stainless steel check valve

Figs. 1 and 2 · Type 3710 Reversing Amplifierwithout pressure gauge andtwo pressure gauges

Fig. 4 · Type 3710 Reversing Amplifier,Type 3730 Positioner and Type 3275 Piston Actuator

Fig. 3 · Type 3710 Reversing Amplifier andType 4708-54 Supply Pressure Regulatormounted on Type 3730 Positioner for a pneumaticpiston actuator

Data Sheet T 8392 EN 2010-01 245

Principle of operationThe reversing amplifier allows double-acting pneumatic actua-tors to be operated using single-acting pneumatic/electropneumatic positioners or limit switches.The positioner or limit switch creates an output signal pressureY1, to which the air pressure Y2 is added. The reversing ampli-fier uses the supply pressure Z as auxiliary power.The following rule applies:

Y1 + Y2 = Z

ExampleY1 of the positioner 1 barSupply pressure Z 6 barResulting Y2 5 bar

Note: A special connection plate must be used for older ver-sions of Types 3766, 3767 and 3780 Positioners andType 3768 Limit Switch (model versions lower than37xx-x…x.05). The order numbers are listed under Acces-sories.

Note: Before attaching the pressure gauge, the grub screwsmust be removed from the reversing amplifier and the seals in-cluded in the scope of delivery inserted in place of these screws.

Z

Y2

Y1

Z

Y1

Out

put 3

8Su

pply

9

Fig. 5 · Functional diagram of Type 3710 Reversing Amplifier

Positioner Reversing amplifier

Pressure is added to Y1to create 6 bar

Auxiliary power (max. 6 bar)

Venting (IP 65)

Chamber 1

Chamber 2

Double-actingpneumatic rotary

actuator

Air chamber 1 opensthe valve when thepressure rises

Air chamber 2 closesthe valve when thepressure rises

LegendZ Supply pressureY1 Output signal pressureY2 Resulting (opposing) air pressure

246 Data Sheet T 8392 EN 2010-01


Type 3710 Reversing Amplifier

Housing and cover Aluminum, powder paint coated

Diaphragm plate Aluminum, yellow chromated

Seat and plug Brass

Diaphragms Silicone rubber FVMQ

Pressure gauge, optional

Housing Stainless steel, device free of copper

Measuring unit and connection Stainless steel, free of copper · Nickel-plated brass connection


Type 3710 Reversing Amplifier

Permissible supply pressure 6 bar

KV coefficient Supply 0.11

Vent 0.12

Leakage Z to Y2 ≤ 20 l/h when Y2 = 0 bar and Z = 6 bar

Y2 to Vent ≤ 40 l/h when Y1 = 0 bar and Y2 = 6 bar

Connections ¼-18 NPT · ISO 228/1-G ¼


Permissible ambient temperature –25 … 80 °C · –58 … 185 °F

Weight 0.5 kg

Option

Pressure gauge ∅ 40 mm

Range of reading 0 to 6 bar · 0 to 90 psi

Connection G 18

Table 3 · Article code

Reversing amplifier Type 3710- 1 0 x 1 0 0 2 0

Connecting thread

ISO 228/1-G ¼ 1

¼-18 NPT 2

Data Sheet T 8392 EN 2010-01 247

Accessories Order no.

Pressure gauge 0 to 6 bar/psi/kPa

Completely made of stainless steel 1400-9945

St. steel/nickel-plated brass connection 1400-9946

Seals 1099-4305

Filter check valve, stainless steel 1.4305 1079-7253

Connection plate for older versions ofTypes 3766, 3767 and 3780 Positioners as wellas Type 3768 Limit Switch

1400-9621

Ordering textReversing amplifier with

Pressure gauge threaded connections Type 3710Used for Types 3730-x, 3731-x Positionersor model versions 37xx-x...x.05 or higher ofType 3766 Pneumatic Positioner,Type 3767 Electropneumatic Positioner,Type 3780 Positioner with HART® communicationType 3768 Limit Switch

With 2 pressure gauges for Y1 and Y2

With 1 pressure gauge for Y2for mounting onType 4708-54Supply Pressure Regulator

5686

13080

166

3086

Ø 101

8090

164

52 Output Y1

Output Y2

Supply (9)Output Y1

Output Y2

Fig. 6 · Dimensional drawing of Type 3710 Reversing Amplifier, mounted on Type 3730 Positioner

Reversing amplifierwith pressure gauges

248 Data Sheet T 8392 EN 2010-01

Series 3755

Pneumatic Volume BoosterType 3755

ApplicationThe volume booster is used together with positioners to increasethe positioning speed of pneumatic actuators.KVS for Supply and Exhaust 2.5 m³/hSignal-to-output ratio 1:1

The pneumatic volume booster supplies an air flow output at theactuator port whose pressure corresponds exactly with the sig-nal pressure, except that it has a much higher volume output.

Special features• Compact body made of cast aluminum• Fast dynamic response due low hysteresis• Bypass restriction with linear characteristic• Bypass restriction setting lead-sealable• Sintered polyethylene filter disc to reduce noise emission• Constant reversing pressure• Version with optimized dynamics• Exhaust feedback possible• Weather protection cover for version with sintered polyethyl-

ene filter disc

VersionsStandard version for mounting between positioner and actuatorLow-noise exhaust over sintered polyethylene filter disc · Supplypressure max. 10 bar · Signal and actuator pressure max. 7 barAmbient temperature range between –40 and80 °C · G ¾ connections for supply (SUP) and actuator (OUT)as well as G ¼ connection for signal (SIG)– Type 3755-1 (Figs. 1 and 2) · Pneumatic volume booster

with low-noise sintered polyethylene filter disc

Further version– Type 3755-2 (Fig. 3) · Pneumatic volume booster,

flanged-on exhaust port (ISO 228 G 1 or 1-11½ NPT)

Options– Connections with NPT thread

Fig. 1 · Type 3755 Pneumatic Volume Booster

Fig. 2 · Type 3755-1, showing sintered polyethylene filter disc

Fig. 3 · Type 3755-2, version with flanged-on exhaust port

Data Sheet T 8393 EN 2009-09 249

Principle of operationIf the positioner signal increases to supply air to the actuator, thepressure above the diaphragm (1) increases. The differentialpressure at the diaphragm causes the supply plug (2) to open,providing supply air up to a maximum of 10 bar to the actuator.In contrast, a positioner signal to vent the actuator causes theexhaust plug (3) to open. The pressure in the actuator is relievedover the exhaust port.The fail-safe action upon signal pressure failure always causesventing!The bypass restriction screw (4) is used to adjust the response ofthe pneumatic volume booster to match the system conditions.The setting of the bypass restriction screw can be locked in posi-tion by a lock nut to prevent it from being turned and addition-ally lead-sealed.The bypass restriction screw must never be completely closed.This prevents the system from hunting and allows for a stablecontrol performance by the positioner.Note: The bypass restriction screw (4) with lock nut (4.1) mustonly be hand-tightened. The maximum permissible tighteningtorque is 3 Nm.

Mounting on control valvesMount the pneumatic volume booster so that the air betweenSuppy and Actuator flows in the direction indicated on thebody. Mount the device between the positioner and pneumaticactuator (Fig. 5).

Pneumatic connectionsThe air connections for Signal, Supply, Actuator and for the ver-sion with flanged-on exhaust port are designed with G or NPTthreads depending on the female thread selected for the pipe.Note: If higher dynamic requirements are to be met, the supplypressure, hook-up and actuator bench range must be sized ac-cordingly.

Actuator

Exhaust

Supply

SignalBypass

4

1

2

3

4.1

Fig. 4 · Type 3755, cross-sectional drawing with pneumaticconnections

Supp

ly

Out

put

Positioner

Supply air

SUP

SIG

OUT

EXHBooster

Control valve

0/4

... 2

0 m

A

E

Fig. 5 · Connection diagram of Type 3755 with electropneumatic positioner and pneumatic control valve

Legend1 Diaphragm2 Supply plug3 Exhaust plug4 Bypass restriction screw4.1 Lock nut

250 Data Sheet T 8393 EN 2009-09


Type 3755 Pneumatic Volume Booster

Flow capacity

KVS Supply 2.5 m³/h

KVS Exhaust 2.5 m³/h

KVS Bypass 0.8 m³/h

Control performance

Pressure ratio Signal to output = 1:1

Reversing pressure 80 mbar

Dynamic versions Standard (options in preparation)

Pressure

Supply max. 10 bar · max. 150 psi

Actuator max. 7 bar · max. 105 psi

Signal max. 7 bar · max. 105 psi

Air quality according toISO 8573-1

Maximum particle size and density: Class 4 · Oil content: Class 3Pressure dew point: Class 3 or at least 10 K below the

lowest ambient temperature to be expected

Connecting thread

Supply (SUP) G ¾ (optionally ¾ NPT)

Output (OUT) G ¾ (optionally ¾ NPT)

Signal (SIG) G ¼ (optionally ¼ NPT)

Flanged-on exhaust port (EXH) G 1 or G ¾ (optionally 1 NPT or ¾ NPT)

Other operating parameters

Permissible ambient temperature –40 to 80 °C

Service life ≥ 1 x 107 full strokes

Degree of protection IP 42 (with the exhaust port facing downwards)

Safety instrumented systems Use in SIS acc. to IEC 61508/SIL 2 (in preparation)

Weight 2.1 kg · Version with flanged-on exhaust port: 2.4 kg


Body Cast aluminum, gray-beige, RAL 1019 powder paint coated

Flanged-on exhaust port Aluminium, gray-beige, RAL 1019 powder paint coated

Silencer(not for version with flanged-on exhaust port) Sintered polyethylene filter disc

Diaphragm VMQ

Other external parts Stainless steel 1.4301

Data Sheet T 8393 EN 2009-09 251

107

155

70

5215

Ø 105

Ø 120

Fig. 6 · Dimensional drawings of Type 3755 · Dimensions in mm

180

31

Version with flanged-on exhaust port

Standard version: Exhaust over sintered polyethylene filter disc

252 Data Sheet T 8393 EN 2009-09

Ordering textPneumatic Volume Booster Type 3755Version Low-noise exhaust

orFlanged-on exhaust port

Pneumatic connections G / NPTExhaust connection Silencer/

flanged-on exhaust portBody material AluminumColor Gray-beige,

structured finishRAL 1019

Article code

Pneumatic volume booster Type 3755- x x x 0 0 x x 0 0 x 0 0 0 0

Version

Standard: low-noise exhaust over sintered polyethylene filter disc 1

Flanged-on exhaust port 2


Standard: Supply and Actuator ISO 228 - G ¾ , Signal ISO 228 - G ¼ 1

Supply and Actuator ¾-14 NPT, Signal ¼-18 NPT 2

Exhaust connection

Standard: sintered polyethylene filter disc 0

Flanged-on exhaust port ISO 228 - G 1 3

Flanged-on exhaust port 1-11 ½ NPT 5

Flow capacity

Standard: Supply KVS = 2.5 m³/h, Exhaust KVS = 2.5 m³/h 0

Dynamic response

Standard 0

Body material

Standard, aluminium 0

Color

Standard: Gray-beige, RAL 1019, structured finish 0

Temperature range

Standard: –40 … 80 °C 0

Data Sheet T 8393 EN 2009-09 253

Control valvesfor industrial processes

Globe, three-way and angle valves

Butterfly control valves

Steam-converting valves

Actuators

Positioners

Limit switches, solenoid valves, converters, etc.

Self-operated regulatorsand accessories for piping systems

Temperature regulators

Pressure regulators

Differential pressure and flow regulators

Boiler regulators

Steam traps

Strainers

Air vents

Control valves for heating,ventilation and air-conditioning systems

Electric actuators

Control valves

Control valves with jet pumps

Combined self-operated regulatorswith electric actuators

Controllers and sensors for heating,ventilation and air-conditioning systems

Electronic controllers

Sensors, converters and controllers

Automation systems TROVIS · Process control systems on Windows

TROVIS MODULON · Distributed automation systemwith communication via Ethernet and LON

TROVIS 6600 · Automation system with native BACnet

Pneumatic and electric measuringand control equipment for process automation

Series 430 · Pneumatic indicating controllers

Series 420 · Pneumatic control system

Media · Liquid level, differential pressure and flow meters

Sensors

Converters

TROVIS 6400 · Automation system

SAMSOMATIC product range Logic elements and accessories for pneumatic controls

Design and supply of factory-assembledautomation packages

Appendix

SAMSON Product Range

255

SAMSON Subsidiaries, Agencies and Service FacilitiesWorldwide

Argentina VALTROL-SAMSONS.A.California 2082 ·Of. 307A, Edificio Central ParkC1289AAP Buenos AiresPhone: +54 11 4360-0421 · Fax: +54 11 4360-0421E-mail: [email protected]: www.valtrolsamson.com.ar

Australia SAMSONCONTROLS PTY LTDUnits 13A, 14A and 15A · Port Botany Industrial Park61-71 Beauchamp Road ·Matraville, NSW2036Phone: +61 2 93167800 · Fax: +61 2 96665963E-mail: [email protected]

Austria SAMSONMESS- UNDREGELGERÄTEGESELLSCHAFTM.B.H.Amalienstraße 57 · 1130WienPhone: +43 1 8772674-0 · Fax: +43 1 8772674-96E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.at

Bangladesh COSMOSMARKETING, CONSULTANTS (PVT) LTD.Cosmos Centre · 69/1,NewCircular Road,MalibaghP.O. BoxG3066 ·Dhaka 1217Phone: +880 2 405152, +880 2 411564,

+880 2 8312024Fax: +880 2 8314602, +880 2 9345540E-mail: [email protected]: www.cosmosgroup.net

Belgium S.A. SAMSONN.V.282/284, Rue St. Denis/St. Denijsstraat1190 Bruxelles/BrusselPhone: +32 2 3474849 · Fax: +32 2 3430033E-mail: [email protected]

Bosnia-Herzegovina

FASEK ENGINEERINGAND TRADINGD.O.O.Zvonigradska 4310000 Zagreb (Croatia)Phone: +385 1 3695-525, +385 1 3695-546Fax: +385 1 3695-525, +385 1 3695-546E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.fasek.com

Brazil SAMSONCONTROL LTDA.RuaMatrix 159 · Centro Empresarial CapuavaBairroMoinho Velho · 06714-360 Cotia / SPPhone: +55 11 46178181, +55 11 47027867Fax: +55 11 46178187E-mail: [email protected]: www.samsoncontrol.com.br

Bulgaria BJB LTD.25Hristo Belchev · 1000 SofiaPhone: +359 2 9867289 · Fax: +359 2 9867467E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.bjbgroup.com

Canada SAMSONCONTROLS INC.1-105 Riviera Drive ·Markham,Ontario L3R 5J7Phone: +1 905 4740354 · Fax: +1 905 4740998E-mail: [email protected]: www.samsoncontrols.com

Chile SAMSONCONTROLS S.A.Lo Boza 107,Módulo B-8, Flex Center · Pudahuel, SantiagoPhone: +56 2 240 5100 · Fax: +56 2 949 3390E-mail: [email protected]

Colombia STEAMCONTROL S.A.Carrera 27,No. 17-80, PaloquemaoSantafé de Bogotá, D.C.Phone: +57 1 3750033 · Fax: +57 1 3710452E-mail: [email protected]: www.steamcontrol.com

Croatia FASEK ENGINEERINGAND TRADINGD.O.O.Zvonigradska 43 · 10000 ZagrebPhone: +385 1 3695-525, +385 1 3695-546Fax: +385 1 3695-525, +385 1 3695-546E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.fasek.com

CzechRepublic

DLOUHÝ I.T.A. CZ S.R.O.Jinonická 805/57 · 150 00 Praha 5Phone: +420 2 57216955, +420 2 57216956Fax: +420 2 57216957E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson-cz.cz

Denmark SAMSONREGULERINGSTEKNIKA/SBlokken 55 · 3460 BirkerødPhone: +45 45819301 · Fax: +45 45819530E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-reg.dk

Ecuador ENERGYPETROL S.A.José PuertaN39-155 y Eloy Alfaro ·QuitoPhone: +593 2 2923064, +593 2 6003288,

+593 2 6003289Fax: +593 2 2923115E-mail: [email protected]: www.energypetrol.net

Egypt Middle East

SAMSONCONTROLS S.A.E.AreaNo. 128, First Industrial Zone · Badr City, Cairo 11829Phone: +20 2 28643050 · Fax: +20 2 28643051E-mail: [email protected]: www.samsoncontrols.com.eg

Finland OYSAMSONABKonalantie 9 · 00370HelsinkiP.O. Box 80 · 00371HelsinkiPhone: +358 10 4207060 · Fax: +358 9 535556E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.fi

France SAMSONREGULATIONS.A.1-3, rue Jean Corona · BP 14069512Vaulx en Velin CédexPhone: +33 4 72047500 · Fax: +33 4 72047575E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.fr

Germany SAMSONAKTIENGESELLSCHAFTMESS- UNDREGELTECHNIKWeismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt amMainPostfach 10 19 01 · 60019 Frankfurt amMainPhone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.de

SAMSOMATICGMBHWeismüllerstraße 20-22 · 60314 Frankfurt amMainPostfach 10 19 01 · 60019 Frankfurt amMainPhone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1644E-mail: [email protected]: www.samsomatic.de

257


Great Britain SAMSONCONTROLS (LONDON) LTD.Perrywood Business Park, Honeycrock LaneRedhill, Surrey RH1 5JQPhone: +44 1737 766391 · Fax: +44 1737 765472E-mail: [email protected]: www.samsoncontrols.co.uk

SAMSONAG · REPRESENTATIVEOFFICE (GREAT BRITAIN)Perrywood Business Park, Honeycrock LaneRedhill, Surrey RH1 5JQPhone: +44 1737 766391 · Fax: +44 1737 765472E-mail: [email protected]

Industrial customers only:

Scotland

CONTROL VALVE SYSTEMSLower Coilentowie · Callander, Perthshire FK17 8LWPhone: +44 1786 841228 · Fax: +44 1786 841944E-mail: [email protected]: www.control-valve-systems.co.uk

Greece EXAKMABETEANONYMOUSINDUSTRIALCOMMERCIAL&TECHNICALCO.Kallirrois Ave. 39 · 11743AthenPhone: +30 21 09215332, +30 21 09218441Fax: +30 21 09218761E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.exakm.gr

Hungary SAMSONMÉRÉS- ÉS SZABÁLYOZÁSTECHNIKAI KFT.1148 Budapest · Fogarasi út 10-14.Phone: +36 1 467-2889 · Fax: +36 1 383-8542E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.hu

India SAMSONCONTROLS PVT. LTD.D-281,MIDC Ranjangaon, Village Karegaon, Taluka ShirurDistrict Pune 412208,MaharashtraPhone: +91 2138 665600 · Fax: +91 2138 232767E-mail: [email protected]

Iran TECH. CONTROL · INDUSTRIAL CONSULTANTSCO.Unit 607, 6th floor, Sarve Saee Tower,Mostowfi StreetYoussefabad 1433894593 (Tehran)P.O. Box 14155/5516 · Youssefabad (Tehran)Phone: +98 21 88701112 · Fax: +98 21 88724924E-mail: [email protected]

Ireland VALVE SERVICES LTD.Euro Business Park, Little Island · Co. CorkPhone: +353 21 4510588 · Fax: +353 21 4351100E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.valve.ie

Israel KAMA LTD.20Hametsuda St. · P.O. Box 1 10 · 58190AzorPhone: +972 3 556-7747 · Fax: +972 3 556-7548E-mail: [email protected]

Italy SAMSONS.R.L.C.P. 58 – Uff. Postale di Pero · Via Figino 10920016 Pero (Milano)Phone: +39 02 33911159 · Fax: +39 02 38103085E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.it

Japan SAMSONK.K.6-38-28 Kamiasao, Asao-kuKawasaki, Kanagawa 215-0021Phone: +81 44 988-3931 · Fax: +81 44 988-3861E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: samsonkk.co.jp

Jordan RAMALLAH ENGINEERING&CHEMICAL EST.Wasafi Tal Street, Hamada Bldg. #302 ·Amman 11190P.O. Box 925 682 ·Amman 11190Phone: +962 6 5538256 · Fax: +962 6 5518257E-mail: [email protected]

Kazakhstan "ENERGYCENTER-ASIACOMPANY"196,Gaydara Str ·AlmatyPhone: +7 727 3929464, +7 727 3929465,

+7 727 3929466, +7 727 3929556Fax: +7 727 3929463E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.kz

Korea(South)

SAMSONCONTROLS LTD., CO.#119-82, Sasa-Dong, Sangrok-GuAnsan-Si, Gyeonggi-Do 426-220Phone: +82 31 4190464 · Fax: +82 31 4190465E-mail: [email protected]

Kuwait RAMI TRADINGCORP.P.O. Box 18 22 · Safat 13019Phone: +965 2400566, +965 2400577Fax: +965 2400588E-mail: [email protected]

Latvia SIA "INDUSTRIAL PROJEKTS"Kalnciema iela 17a-3 · Riga 1046Phone: +371 67480150 · Fax: +371 67605227E-mail: [email protected]

Libya ALBONIANWORKSHOPSAND PLANTSEQUIPMENT IMPORT COMPANY INC.El Jamhoriya St. El MansoraNo. 10.11.654 · TripoliPhone: +218 21 333-2178 · Fax: +218 21 333-1470E-mail: [email protected]: www.albonian.com.ly

Luxemburg S.A. SAMSONPhone: +352 489944Fax: +352 480193

Malaysia SAMSOMATIC (M) SDNBHD36 Jalan USJ 1/3347620 Subang Jaya, Selangor Darul EhsanPhone: +60 3 80230923 · Fax: +60 3 80238963E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-sea.com

SAMSOMATIC (M) SDNBHDKuantan Service CenterA-11 JalanGebeng 2/6,Gebeng Industrial Estate26080 Kuantan, Pahang DarulMakmurPhone: +60 9 5837541 · Fax: +60 9 5837542E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-sea.com

Mexico SAMSONCONTROL S.A. DE C.V.Calle San Carlos No. 9 · Corredor Industrial Toluca LermaMunicipio Lerma, Estado deMéxico, CP 52004Phone: +52 728 2852001 · Fax: +52 728 2852028E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson.com.mx

258


Netherlands SAMSONREGELTECHNIEK B.V.Signaalrood 10 · 2718 SH ZoetermeerPostbus 2 90 · 2700AGZoetermeerPhone: +31 79 3610501 · Fax: +31 79 3615930E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-regeltechniek.nl

Norway MATEK – SAMSONREGULERINGA/SPorsgrunnsvn. 4 · 3730 SkienPhone: +47 35900870 · Fax: +47 35900880E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.matek.no

Oman MIDDLE EASTOILFIELD SERVICES L.L.C.P.O. Box 35 00 · 112 Ruwi (Muscat)Phone: +968 24487152, +968 24487153Fax: +968 24483832E-mail: [email protected]

Pakistan ENGRO INNOVATIVEAUTOMATION PVT. LTD.140 E/1Gulberg – III · Lahore – 54660Phone: +92 42 111940940 · Fax: +92 42 5711356E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.iael.com

People`sRepublic ofChina

SAMSONCONTROLS (CHINA) CO., LTD.No. 11, Yong ChangNan Lu, BDABeijing 100176Phone: +86 10 67803011Fax: +86 10 67803196E-mail: [email protected]: www.samsonchina.com

Philippines SAMSONMARKETINGOFFICE IN PHILIPPINESPhone: +63 44 7602129 · Fax: +63 44 7602129E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-sea.com

Poland SAMSONSP. ZO.O.AUTOMATYKA I TECHNIKA POMIAROWAal. Krakowska 197 · 02-180WarszawaPhone: +48 22 5739-777 · Fax: +48 22 5739-776E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson.com.pl

Portugal SAMSON, S.A. ·MEDIDA E REGULAÇÃOZona Industrial Ligeira 2, Lote 112 · Apartado 3467520-309 SinesPhone: +351 269 634100 · Fax: +351 269 636104E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.pt

Qatar QATARMODERN INSTRUMENTS&CONTROLS CO.(Q.M. CONTROLS)P.O. Box 64 29 ·DohaPhone: +974 4432326, +974 4372895Fax: +974 4432460E-mail: [email protected]

Republic ofSouth Africa

SAMSONCONTROLS (PTY) LTD.6 Engine Ave,MontagueGardensMilnerton 7441, Cape ProvinceP.O. Box 3 05 ·Milnerton 7435, Cape ProvincePhone: +27 21 5526088, +27 21 5526089,

+27 21 5526510Fax: +27 21 5512515E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-sa.com

Romania CBCARMATURI INDUSTRIALE S.R.L.Str. Gladiolelor nr. 27, Vila E077025 Bragadiru, IlfovPhone: +40 21 4213852, +40 21 4213854Fax: +40 21 4213853E-mail: [email protected]: www.cbc-armaturi.ro

RussianFederation

OOOSAMSONCONTROLS"Business Center", 4. StockMarksistskaja Str. 16 · 109147MoskauPhone: +7 495 6474545 · Fax: +7 495 7373949E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.ru

SAMSONAG · REPRESENTATIVEOFFICEMOSKAU"Business Center", 4. StockMarksistskaja Str. 16 · 109147MoskauPhone: +7 495 6474545 · Fax: +7 495 7373949E-mail: [email protected]

Saudi Arabia ANASIA TRADINGCO., LTD.P.O. Box 5 09 59 · Jeddah 21533Phone: +966 2 6363825 · Fax: +966 2 6380720E-mail: [email protected]: www.anasiasaudi.com

Singapore SAMSONCONTROLS PTE LTD27 Kaki Bukit View · Kaki Bukit Techpark IISingapore 415962Phone: +65 67488810 · Fax: +65 67451418E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-sea.com

Slovakia DLOUHÝ I.T.A. S.R.O.PodHradiskom9 · 01004 ZilinaPhone: +421 41 7234370 · Fax: +421 41 7234371E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.sk

Slovenia GIA-S INDUSTRIJSKAOPEMAD.O.O.Industrijska cesta 5 · 1290GrosupljePhone: +386 1 7865-300 · Fax: +386 1 7863-568E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.gia.si

Spain SAMSONS.A.TÉCNICADEMEDICIÓNY REGULACIÓNPol. Ind. Cova Solera · Avda. Can Sucarrats, 104Apartado 311 · 08191 Rubi (Barcelona)Phone: +34 93 5861070 · Fax: +34 93 6994300E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.es

Sweden SAMSONMÄT-OCHREGLERTEKNIKABKungsporten 1A · 427 50 BilldalBox 67 · 427 22 BilldalPhone: +46 31 914015 · Fax: +46 31 914019E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.se

Switzerland SAMSONAG ·MESS- UNDREGELTECHNIKTechnisches Büro SchweizPostfach 187 · 4125 Riehen 1 (Basel)Phone: +49 7621 95695-0 · Fax: +49 7621 95695-6E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-ag.ch

Taiwan SAMSONCONTROLS CO., LTD.3F, 132, Hsin-Hu Third Road · Taipei 114Phone: +886 2 8792-1230 · Fax: +886 2 8792-1270E-mail: [email protected]

259


Thailand SAMSONCONTROLS LTD.267/233-4 Sukhumvit RoadMap Ta Phut, Muang · Rayong 21150Phone: +66 38 608939 · Fax: +66 38 608943E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.co.th

SAMSONCONTROLS LTD.Bangkok Branch · 24th floor UM TowerNo. 9 Ramkamheang Road, Suanluang · Bangkok 10250Phone: +66 2 7198214-5 · Fax: +66 2 7198237E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: www.samson.co.th

Turkey SAMSONÖLÇÜVEOTOMATIK KONTROL SISTEMLERISANAYI VE TICARETA.S

´.

EvrenMahallesi, Gülbahar Caddesi No: 9434212Günes

´li-Istanbul

P.K. 3 89 · 80003 Karaköy-IstanbulPhone: +90 212 6518746 · Fax: +90 212 6518750E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson.com.tr

U.S.A. SAMSONCONTROLS INC.4111Cedar Boulevard · Baytown, Texas 77523-8588Phone: +1 281 383-3677 · Fax: +1 281 383-3690E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-usa.com

SAMSONPROJECT ENGINEERING, INC.14811 St. Mary´s Lane, Suite 130 ·Houston, Texas 77079Phone: +1 281 7596900, +1 281 7596902Fax: +1 281 8708007E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson-pei.com

Ukraine "SAMSON-ENGINEERINGGMBH"Floor 10,Office 4 · 19Marina Raskowa St · 02002 KiewPhone: +380 44 4905305 · Fax: +380 44 4905305E-mail: [email protected]: www.samsoneng.kiev.ua

United ArabEmirates

SAMSONCONTROLS FZEP.O. Box 262793 · PBU YC01 (near R/A 08)Jebel Ali Free Zone, DubaiPhone: +971 4 8834933Fax: +971 4 8834944E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson.ae

Venezuela SAMSONCONTROLS S.A.Ur. Los Rosales, Calle Bermúdez · Edif. LaGarantíaCaracas 1040Distrito FederalPhone: +58 212 6903645 · Fax: +58 212 6935953E-mail: [email protected]: www.samson.com.ve

All addresses, including e-mail and Internet addresses, can be found athttp://www.samson.de

260

T 3701 ENType 3701 Solenoid Valve 167

T 3776 ENLimit Switch Type 3776 125

T 3962-5 ENSolenoid Valve Type 3962 211

T 3963 ENSolenoid Valve Type 3963 173

T 3967 ENSolenoid Valve Type 3967 199

T 3999-6 ENService Unit Type 3999-009X 233

T 3999-8 ENFilter Regulator Type 3999-0096 237

T 6116 ENi/p Converter Type 6116 109

T 6151 ENu/i Module Type 6151 115

T 6661 ENTROVIS-VIEW Software TROVIS 6661 79

T 8350 ENInformation SheetPositioners, Converters, Limit Switches,Position Transmitters, Solenoid Valves, Accessories 5

T 8355 ENPneumatic Positioner Type 3766Electropneumatic Positioner Type 3767 85

T 8356 ENInductive Limit Switchfor Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3768 141

T 8359 ENElectropneumatic Positioner Type 4763Pneumatic Positioner Type 4765 97

T 8363 ENAnalog Position Transmitter Type 4748 157

T 8365 ENElectric or Pneumatic Limit Switch Type 4746 119

T 8367 ENElectric Limit Switch Type 4744 145

T 8379 ENField Barrier Ex d/Ex i Type 3770 163

T 8384-0 ENElectropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-0 25

T 8384-1 ENElectropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-1 31

T 8384-2/3 ENElectropneumatic PositionerType 3730-2 and Type 3730-3with HART® communication 37

T 8384-4 ENElectropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-4with PROFIBUS-PA communication 45

T 8384-5 ENElectropneumatic Positioner Type 3730-5with FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus communication 53

T 8385 ENElectropneumatic Positioner andPneumatic Positioner Type 3760 103

T 8387-3 ENElectropneumatic Ex d Positioner Type 3731-3with HART® communication 59

T 8387-5 ENElectropneumatic Ex d Positioner Type 3731-5with FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus communication 65

T 8389 ENSeries 3730 and Series 3731EXPERTplus Valve Diagnosticswith Partial Stroke Test (PST) 71

T 8390 ENElectronic Limit Switch Type 3738-20 149

T 8391 ENPneumatic Lock-up Valve Type 3709 243

T 8392 ENReversing Amplifier Type 3710 245

T 8393 ENPneumatic Volume Booster Type 3755 249

T 8510 ENPneumatic Remote Adjuster Type 3759 241

T 8546 ENSupply Pressure Regulator Type 4708 221

Data Sheet Summary

261

3701 Solenoid Valve 167

3709 Pneumatic Lock-up Valve 243

3710 Reversing Amplifier 245

3730-0 Electropneumatic Positioner 25

3730-1 Electropneumatic Positioner 31

3730-2 Electropneumatic Positioner with HART® communication 37

3730-3 Electropneumatic Positioner with HART® communication 37

3730-4 Electropneumatic Positioner with PROFIBUS-PA communication 45

3730-5 Electropneumatic Positioner with FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus communication 53

3731-3 Electropneumatic Ex d Positioner with HART® communication 59

3731-5 Electropneumatic Ex d Positioner with FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus communication 65

3738-20 Electronic Limit Switch 149

3755 Pneumatic Volume Booster 249

3759 Pneumatic Remote Adjuster 241

3760 Electropneumatic Positioner and Pneumatic Positioner 103

3766 Pneumatic Positioner 85

3767 Electropneumatic Positioner 85

3768 Inductive Limit Switch for Pneumatic Control Valves 141

3770 Field Barrier Ex d/Ex i 163

3776 Limit Switch 125




3999-009X Service Unit 233

3999-0096 Filter Regulator 237

4708 Supply Pressure Regulator 221

4744 Electric Limit Switch 145

4746 Electric or Pneumatic Limit Switch 119

4748 Analog Position Transmitter 157

4763 Electropneumatic Positioner 97

4765 Pneumatic Positioner 97

6116 i/p Converter 109

6151 u/i Module 115

EXPERT* Series 3730 and Series 3731 EXPERTplus Valve Diagnostics with Partial Stroke Test (PST) 71

TROVIS 6661 TROVIS-VIEW Software 79

Type Application/Function Page Type Application/Function Page

Index

263

SAMSONSAM

SO

N

2010

-04

WS

· K 1

3 EN

SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK · Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · GermanyPhone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 · E-mail: [email protected] · Internet: http://www.samson.de

Control Valves for Industrial ProcessesVolume 3

Cont

rol V

alve

s fo

r In

dust

rial P

roce

sses

· Vo

lum

e 3

samson - "eks-m" elm İstehsalat mərkəzi | xoŞ … converters, limit switches, position...

Documents